RESOLUTION 2025-30
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF BANNING, CALIFORNIA, AWARDING A PROGRESSIVE DESIGN-BUILD AGREEMENT FOR PHASE 1 TO AECOM LYLES JV FOR PROJECT NO. 2022-01W “WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT AND RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES” IN THE AMOUNT OF $3,998,627 AND APPROVING A 10% CONTENGENCY FOR A TOTAL PROJECT BUDGET OF $4,398,490
WHEREAS, the City of Banning owns and operates a wastewater treatment plant WWTP) also knows as the Water Reclamation Facility which includes a current treatment process consisting of preliminary, primary, secondary, disinfection and sludge disposal; and WHEREAS, the WWTP has a design treatment capacity of 3.6 million gallons per day (MGD) and typical average daily discharges ranging from 2.0 MGD to 2.1 MGD into 10 unlined evaporation/percolation ponds; and
WHEREAS, the City has recognized a need to construct major improvements to the WWTP in order to comply with California Regional Water Quality Control Board, Colorado River Basin Region ( RWQCB) Board Order R7-2016-0015; to increase treatment capacity to support increasing demands; and to enhance the City's water supply portfolio by developing a recycled water supply; and
WHEREAS, the City Council approved Resolution 2021-50, adopting the 2020 Urban Water Management Plan (UWMP). The UWMP is a planning document with a 20-year planning horizon that assess the water supply and water demand for the City. As part of the assessment all current water supplies and in the future water supplies are include as part of the City’s water supply portfolio, which includes the use of “recycled water” to supplement potable demands (i.e. irrigation demands) and for groundwater recharge; and
WHEREAS, on August 9, 2024 the City released a request for proposals ( RFP) and received three (3) proposals from pre-qualified Progressive Design-Build Firms. Based on the evaluation and scoring criteria, and the results of an interview conducted by City staff, it was determined that AECOM Lyles JV scored the highest and has the qualifications and experience to successfully complete the scope of services as the Progressive Design-Builder on the Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades project; and WHEREAS, staff recommends awarding the Progressive Design-Build Agreement for Phase 1 of the Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades project to AECOM Lyles JV in the amount of $3,998,627; and
WHEREAS, the total project budget for Phase 1, including the Agreement and 10% contingency, is for an amount of $4,398,490; and
WHEREAS, the current adopted budget for Fiscal Year 2024/2025 includes a budgeted amount of $3,000,000 in Account No. 681-8000-454.95-12, and another $3,000,000 in Account No. 682-8050-454.95-10. The 10% contingency will be funded from Account 682. 964
Resolution 2025-30
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of Banning as follows:
SECTION 1. The City Council approves the Progressive Design-Build Agreement for Phase 1 with AECOM Lyles JV for Project No. 2022-01W “Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades” in the Amount of $3,998,627 and Approving a 10% Contingency for a Total Project Budget of $4,398,490.
SECTION 2. The City Council authorizes the City Manager to make non-substantive changes to the Progressive Design-Build Agreement and to execute the Progressive Design-Build Agreement with AECOM Lyles JV on behalf of the City Council.
SECTION 3. The City Council authorizes the City Manager, or designee, to make necessary budget adjustments, appropriations, and transfers related to this resolution and to approve change orders within the 10% contingency.
SECTION 4. The City Clerk shall certify to the adoption of this resolution and shall cause a certified resolution to be filed in the book of original resolutions.
PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED this 25th day of February, 2025.
Sheri Flynn, Mayor
City of Banning
ATTEST:
Caroline Patton, Administrative City Clerk
City of Banning
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
John Pinkney, City Attorney
Slovak, Baron, Empey, Murphy & Pinkney,
LLP
965
Resolution 2025-30
CERTIFICATION:
I, Caroline Patton, Administrative City Clerk of the City of Banning, California, do hereby certify that the foregoing Resolution 2025-30, was duly adopted by the City Council of the City of Banning, California, at a regular meeting thereof held on the 25th day of February, 2025 by the following vote, to wit:
AYES:
NOES:
ABSENT:
ABSTAIN:
Caroline Patton, Administrative City Clerk
City of Banning, California
966
Resolution 2025-30
EXHIBIT A
Progressive Design-Build Agreement for Phase 1 to AECOM Lyles JV for “Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades” Project
967
Progressive DesignBuild Agreement for
Water and Wastewater
Projects
This Progressive Design-Build Agreement has been developed in conjunction with and endorsed by the Water Collaborative Delivery Association.
.
Document No. 545
Second Edition, 2024
© Design-Build Institute of America
Washington, D.C.
DBIA Contract Document #545
968
1 | P a g e
CITY OF BANNING
This AGREEMENT is made as of the day of
in the year of 20 , by and between the following parties, for services in connection with the Project identified below:
OWNER:
Arturo Vela
Public Works Director
City of Banning
99 E. Ramsey Street
Banning, CA 92220
DESIGN-BUILDER:
AECOM & WML VIII, A Joint Venture
26501 Madison Avenue
Murrieta, CA 92562
PROJECT:
Design and Construction of the City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project
2242 Charles Street
Banning, CA 92220
In consideration of the mutual covenants and obligations contained herein, Owner and DesignBuilder agree as set forth herein. 969
1 | P a g e
Table of Contents
Article 1 Design-Builder’s Services and Responsibilities ...............................................................................................2 Article 2 Contract Documents.........................................................................................................................................8 Article 3 Interpretation and Intent ...................................................................................................................................9 Article 4 Ownership of Work Product .......................................................................................................................... 10 Article 5 Contract Time ................................................................................................................................................ 12 Article 6 Contract Price ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Article 7 Procedure for Payment ................................................................................................................................. 19 Article 8 Termination for Convenience ........................................................................................................................ 20 Article 9 Representatives of the Parties ...................................................................................................................... 22 Article 10 Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................................. 22 Article 11 Other Provisions .......................................................................................................................................... 23 Article 12 Limitation of Liability .................................................................................................................................... 23 Article 13 Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages ................................................................................................. 24 970
2 | P a g e
Article 1
Design-Builder’s Services and Responsibilities
1.1 General Services.
1.1.1 Design-Builder has demonstrated its competence and professional qualifications necessary for the satisfactory performance of the services designated herein by virtue of its experience, training, education and expertise.
1.1.2 Owner has provided Design-Builder with Project background documents, including but not limited to, the Design Criteria Report and Preliminary Design Drawings, (Exhibit A) depicting the Owner's program requirements and objectives for the Project, collectively referred to as the Basis of Design Documents. Owner's Basis of Design Documents may include conceptual documents, design specifications, design performance specifications, and other technical materials and requirements prepared by or for Owner.
1.1.3 Prior to the execution of construction Contract(s), Design-Builder has advanced the Owners' Design Criteria Report and Preliminary Drawings, and has provided additional, different or innovative approaches to the design and construction of the Project, upon which the Design-Builder has provided fixed Design-Build price(s).
1.1.4 Design-Builder shall have the sole and exclusive responsibility and liability for the design, construction and performance of the Project based on the scope and terms of the Agreement and, notwithstanding the information contained in the Owner's Project background documents, and to ensure compliance with all applicable Governmental Rules, Regulations, and Requirements.
1.1.5 All professional services work performed in connection with this Contract shall be performed in a manner consistent with the standard of care ordinarily exercised by those who provide architectural, engineering, planning and design services for projects of similar size, scope and complexity for water treatment facilities in the United States, and consistent with the standard of care ordinarily exercised by those who specialize in such specialty services. In addition, all work is to be performed within the standard of care for California architects, engineers, planners and designers. Neither review nor approval of Design-Builder’s work by Owner, any employee, any agent/consultant of Owner, or any other person shall in any way relieve Design-Builder from its duty to utilize this standard of care in the performance of its duties. Design-Builder agrees to provide its professional services in a manner that is in the Owner’s economic and governmental best interests, consistent with this standard of care and the Design-Builder’s professional obligations.
1.1.6 In compliance with Government Code section 7550, the Design Builder shall include a separate section in the proposal prepared pursuant to this Agreement, 971
3 | P a g e
which contains a list of all the subcontractors and dollar amounts of all contracts and subcontracts required for the preparation of work described in this Agreement.
1.1.7 Cooperation. The Design-Builder shall assist the Owner's staff and reasonably cooperate with the Owner and all other designated representatives during the design and construction of the Project. The Owner shall cooperate and cause its agencies to promptly review all documentation and submittals.
1.1.8 Management. The Design-Builder shall implement suitable management systems and work plans for the Project relative to Project safety, quality assurance and managing and controlling the Work.
1.1.9 Reports. The Design-Builder shall prepare and submit to the Owner, during both the Design Phase and the Construction Phase, monthly progress reports on the Work accomplished during the prior monthly period, which reports shall be prepared in a manner and in a format reasonably acceptable to the Owner and Design-Builder, and mutually agreed by both parties. Such reports shall be furnished at the time of submission of each monthly Application for Payment or Invoice. As part of such report, the Design-Builder shall provide an updated Schedule, including Critical Path Method (CPM) illustrating the progress which has been made, by reference to the CPM, and specifically whether the Work is on schedule or behind schedule and actions being taken to correct Schedule slippage.
The monthly report shall also set forth the Design-Builder's projected progress for the forthcoming month.
1.1.10 Close Out. The Design-Builder shall comply with all Owner requirements for the turnover of the facilities, including final regulatory submittals, submittal of close-out documents.
1.2 Phased Services.
1.2.1 Phase 1 Services (Design and Preconstruction)
1.2.1.1 Phase 1 Services. Design-Builder shall perform the services of design, pricing and other services for the Project based on Owner's Design Criteria and Preliminary Drawings, as may be revised, submitted and accepted by Owner. Design-Builder shall perform such services to the level of completion required for Design-Builder to establish the Guaranteed Maximum Price, upon which acceptance by the Owner, the Design-Builder and Owner will establish the Contract Price for Phase 2, as set forth in Section 1.3 below. The Contract Price for Phase 2 shall be developed during Phase 1 on an “open-book” basis. Design-Builder’s Compensation for Phase 1 Services is set forth in Article 6 herein. The level of completion required for Phase 1 Services is defined in Exhibit B, Scope of Work (either as a percentage of design completion or by defined deliverables), upon which the GMP(s) are based. Design-Builder shall perform such services to the level of completion required for Design-Builder to complete the Project.
972
4 | P a g e
1.2.1.2 The Contract Price for Phase 2 is to be documented through the Contract Price Amendment(s) for Phase 2, as set forth in Section 1.3 below.
Design work following the establishment of the Contract Price Amendment(s) shall also be considered Phase 1 work. Further, if the Design-Builder’s Guaranteed Price Proposal is rejected in accordance with Section 1.3.2.3 (iii) below, any design work required to complete the design shall be considered Phase 1 work. Design-Builder’s compensation for Phase 1 services is set forth in Section 6 herein.
1.2.1.3 Owner reserves the right to release multiple amendments for various early work packages associated with Phase 2 work. Design-Builder shall provide all guaranteed price proposals required to support the amendments to this agreement.
1.2.1.4 Design-Builder shall review and prepare a written evaluation of Owner -provided Project Criteria, including recommendations to the Owner for different and innovative approaches to the design and construction of the Project. The parties shall meet to discuss Design-Builder’s written evaluation of The Owner's Project Criteria and agree upon what revisions, if any, should be made to such criteria. The work involved in progressing from draft Owner Project’s Criteria to final Owner's Project Criteria shall be compensated as part of the Design-Builder’s Phase 1 services.
1.2.1.5 Basis of Design. The Design-Builder shall provide Basis of Design Report (BODR) based on the mutually agreed-upon project schedule, and comprehensive budget for the Cost of the Work prepared by the DesignBuilder. The documents shall establish the conceptual design of the Project illustrating the scale and relationship of the Project components. The BODR may include study models, perspective sketches, electronic modeling or combinations of these media. Preliminary selections of major project’s systems and construction materials shall be noted on the drawings or described in writing. These documents shall be presented to the Owner for review and approval.
1.2.1.6 Design Development Documents. The Design-Builder shall provide design development documents based on the approved BODR and updated comprehensive budget for the Cost of the Work. The design development documents shall illustrate and describe the refinement of the design of the Project, establishing the scope, relationships, forms, size and appearance of the Project by means of plans, sections and elevations, typical construction details, and equipment layouts. The design development documents shall include specifications that identify major material and systems and establish in general their quality levels. These documents shall be presented to the Owner for review and approval.
1.2.1.7 Construction Documents. The Design-Builder shall provide Construction Documents based on the approved design development documents and updated comprehensive budget for the Cost of the Work. 973
5 | P a g e
The Construction Documents shall set forth in detail the requirements for construction of the Project. The Construction Documents shall include drawings and specifications that establish in detail the quality levels of materials and systems required for the Project. These documents shall be presented to the Owner for review and approval.
1.2.1.8 Review of Construction Documents and Field Conditions.
Notwithstanding review and approval by the Owner, the Design-Builder shall be responsible for all errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Construction Documents. The Design-Builder shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field conditions and conditions and other information known to the DesignBuilder with the Construction Documents before commencing activities. If necessary to meet the schedule for this project, or if requested by the Owner, the Design-Builder may issue multiple Construction Document packages to permit phased construction of the Project. The Owner will facilitate this process by reviewing such packages on a timely basis. Such review and approval by the Owner shall not relieve the Design-Builder of its obligation to coordinate all aspects of the work.
1.2.2 Phase 2 Services. Design-Builder’s Phase 2 services shall consist of the procurement of all materials and equipment for the Project, the performance of construction services for the Project, the start-up, testing and commissioning of the Project, and the provision of warranty services, all as further described in the Contract Price Amendment. Upon receipt of Design-Builder’s proposed Contract Price for Phase 2, Owner may proceed as set forth in Section 1.3.
1.3 Guaranteed Price Proposal. Upon completion of the Phase 1 Services or when design work has progressed to an appropriate, mutually agreed stage, Design-Builder shall submit to Owner the Guaranteed Price Proposal (the “Proposal") or a defined portion of a Guaranteed Price (GP) for the construction of the Project upon which the parties may agree, for the construction for the Project for the Contract Price, which may be based on Lump Sum or Design-Builder’s Fee and Cost of the Work with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP).
1.3.1 The Proposal shall include the following unless the parties mutually agree otherwise:
1.3.1.1 The Contract Price that may be based on a Lump Sum or DesignBuilder’s Fee and Cost of the Work, with a GMP (which can be developed starting at the 60% design level), which shall be the sum of:
i Design-Builder’s Fee as defined in Section 6.4 hereof; ii The estimated Cost of the Work as defined in Section 6.7 hereof, inclusive of any Design-Builder’s Contingency as defined in Section 6.8 hereof; and
iii If applicable, any prices established under Section 6.8 hereof; 974
6 | P a g e
1.3.1.2 Details associated with Lump Sum implementation of the contract.
Such details should include a Lump Sum discount (if applicable), a listing of project milestones, details regarding how invoicing for Work will correspond to those project milestones, and other such details as necessary for Lump Sum implementation of the Guaranteed Price.
1.3.1.3 The Design-Builder developed Construction Documents will serve as the basis for the Guaranteed Price Proposal.
1.3.1.4 A list of the assumptions and clarifications made by Design-Builder in the preparation of the Guaranteed Price Proposal, which list is intended to supplement the information contained in the drawings and specifications.
1.3.1.5 The Scheduled Substantial Completion Date upon which the Proposal is based, to the extent said date has not already been established under Section 5.2.1 hereof, and a schedule upon which the Scheduled Substantial Completion Date is based and a Project Schedule for the Work;
1.3.1.6 Any applicable dates for Substantial Completion upon which the proposed Guaranteed Price is based.
1.3.1.7 A list of all Construction Documents used as a basis for the Guaranteed Price Proposal.
1.3.1.8 If applicable, a list of Allowance Items, Allowance Values, and a statement of their basis;
1.3.1.9 If applicable, a schedule of alternate prices;
1.3.1.10 If applicable, a schedule of unit prices;
1.3.1.11 If applicable, a statement of Additional Services which may be performed but which are not included in the Proposal, and which, if performed, shall be the basis for an increase in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time(s);
1.3.1.12 If applicable, a Savings provision;
1.3.1.13 If applicable, Performance Incentives;
1.3.1.14 Duration at which the Guaranteed Price Proposal is valid (minimum – 60 calendar days).
1.3.1.15 The time limit for acceptance of the Proposal (minimum – 60 calendar days); and
1.3.1.16 An Owner’s permit list, a list detailing the permits and governmental approvals that Owner will bear responsibility to obtain.
1.3.2 Review and Adjustment to Proposal.
975
7 | P a g e
1.3.2.1 After submission of the Proposal, Design-Builder and Owner shall meet to discuss and review the Proposal. If Owner has any comments regarding the Proposal, or finds any inconsistencies or inaccuracies in the information presented, it shall promptly give written notice to Design-Builder of such comments or findings. If appropriate, Design-Builder shall, upon receipt of Owner’s notice, make appropriate adjustments to the Proposal.
1.3.2.2 Acceptance of Proposal. If Owner accepts the Proposal, as may be amended by Design-Builder, the Contract Price and its basis shall be set forth in an amendment to this Agreement, when mutually agreed between the parties (Contract Price Amendment). Once the parties have agreed upon the Contract Price and Owner has issued a Notice to Proceed with Phase 2, Design-Builder shall perform the Phase 2 Services, all as further described in the Contract Price Amendment, as it may be revised.
1.3.2.3 Failure to Accept the Proposal. If Owner rejects the Proposal, or fails to notify Design-Builder in writing on or before the date specified in the Proposal that it accepts the Proposal, the Proposal shall be deemed withdrawn and of no effect. In such event, Owner and Design-Builder shall meet and confer as to how the Project will proceed, with Owner having the following options:
i Owner may suggest modifications to the Proposal, whereupon, if such modifications are accepted in writing by Design-Builder, the Proposal shall be deemed accepted and the parties shall proceed in accordance with Section 1.3.2.2 above;
ii Owner may determine that the design is not yet sufficiently complete for acceptance or rejection of the Proposal. As such, Owner may direct Design-Builder to continue to proceed with the Phase 1 work and further advance the design before submitting a revised Proposal.
iii Owner may determine that it does not intend to proceed with Phase 2 services with the Design-Builder. In such a case, the Owner may authorize the Design-Builder to proceed until the completion of Phase 1 work, at which time, Owner may elect to publicly bid the Phase 2 work. In such occurrence, the DesignBuilder and the Owner agree to transfer the contract responsibility from the contractual Design-Builder to the Designer-of-Record.
iv Owner may terminate this Agreement for convenience in accordance with Article 8 hereof; provided, however, in this event, Design-Builder shall not be entitled to the payment provided for in Article 8 hereof.
1.3.2.4 If Owner fails to exercise any of the above options, Design-Builder shall have the right to (a) continue with the Work as if Owner had elected to proceed in accordance with Section 1.3.2.3(ii). above, and be paid by 976
8 | P a g e
Owner accordingly, unless and until Owner notifies it in writing to stop the Work; (b) suspend performance of Work in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions of Contract, provided, however, that in such event Design-Builder shall not be entitled to the payment provided for in Section
8.2 hereof; or (c) may give written notice to Owner that it considers this Agreement completed. If Owner fails to exercise any of the options under Section 1.3.2 within ten (10) days of receipt of Design-Builder’s notice, then this Agreement shall be deemed completed. If Owner terminates the relationship with Design-Builder under Section 1.3.2(iv), or if this Agreement is deemed completed under this paragraph, then Design-Builder shall have no further liability or obligations to Owner under this Agreement.
Article 2
Contract Documents
2.1 The Contract Documents are comprised of the following:
2.1.1 All written modifications, amendments, minor changes and Change Orders to this Agreement;
2.1.2 The Contract Price Amendment referenced in Section 1.3.2.2 above or the Proposal accepted by Owner in accordance with Section 1.3 above;
2.1.3 This Agreement, including all exhibits (list for example, performance standard requirements, performance incentive arrangements, markup exhibits, allowances, unit prices or exhibit detailing offsite reimbursable personnel) but excluding, if applicable, the Contract Price Amendment;
2.1.4 The General Conditions of Contract;
2.1.5 Construction Documents prepared and approved in accordance with Section 2.4 of the General Conditions of Contract;
2.1.6 Exhibit B, Scope of Work; and
2.1.7 The following other documents, if any:
2.1.7.1 Applicable Laws and Regulations
2.1.7.2 Permits
2.1.7.3 Properly Executed Change Orders
2.1.7.4 Addenda
2.1.7.5 Executed Design-Build Agreement (DBIA Document No. 545), including Exhibits
2.1.7.6 General Conditions (DBIA Document No. 535)
977
9 | P a g e
2.1.7.7 Design Criteria Report
2.1.7.8 Design-Builder’s Proposal /GP Design-Build Proposal
2.1.7.9 Technical Specifications
2.1.7.10 Project Plans/Drawings (detailed plans having greater precedence)
2.1.7.11 Request for Proposals
Article 3
Interpretation and Intent
3.1 Design-Builder and Owner, at the time of acceptance of the Proposal by Owner in accordance with Section 1.3 hereof, shall carefully review all the Contract Documents, including the various documents comprising the Owner's Project background documents for any conflicts or ambiguities. Design-Builder and Owner will discuss and resolve any identified conflicts or ambiguities prior to execution of the Agreement, or if applicable, prior to Owner’s acceptance of the Proposal.
3.2 The Contract Documents are intended to permit the parties to complete the Work and all obligations required by the Contract Documents within the Contract Time(s) for the Contract Price. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary and interpreted in harmony so as to avoid conflict, with words and phrases interpreted in a manner consistent with construction and design industry standards. In the event inconsistencies, conflicts or ambiguities between or among the Contract Documents are discovered after Owner’s acceptance of the Proposal, Design-Builder and Owner shall attempt to resolve any ambiguity, conflict or inconsistency informally, recognizing that the Contract Documents shall take precedence in the order in which they are listed in Section 2.1 hereof. (Note, the parties are strongly encouraged to establish in the Contract Price Amendment or Proposal (as applicable) the priority of the various documents comprising such exhibit or proposal.)
3.3 Terms, words and phrases used in the Contract Documents, including this Agreement, shall have the meanings given them in the General Conditions of Contract.
3.4 If Owner’s Project Criteria contain design specifications: (a) Design-Builder is entitled to reasonably rely on the accuracy of the information represented in the design specifications and their compatibility with other information set forth in Owner’s Project Criteria, including any design performance specifications; and (b) Design-Builder shall be entitled to an adjustment in its Contract Price and/or Contract Time(s) to the extent Design-Builder’s cost and/or time of performance have been adversely impacted by such inaccurate design specification.
3.5 The Contract Documents form the entire agreement between Owner and DesignBuilder and by incorporation herein are as fully binding on the parties as if repeated herein. No oral representations or other agreements have been made by the parties except as specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 978
10 | P a g e
Article 4
Ownership of Work Product
4.1 Work Product. All drawings, specifications and other documents and electronic data, including such documents identified in the General Conditions of Contract, furnished by Design-Builder to Owner under this Agreement (“Work Product”) are deemed to be instruments of service and Design-Builder shall retain the ownership and property interests therein, including but not limited to any intellectual property rights, copyrights and/or patents, subject to the provisions set forth in Sections 4.2 through 4.5 below.
4.2 Owner’s License upon Project Completion and Payment in Full to Design-Builder.
Upon Owner’s payment in full for all Work performed under the Contract Documents, Design-Builder shall grant Owner a fully paid up, perpetual license to use the Work Product in connection with Owner’s occupancy of the Project, conditioned on Owner’s express understanding that its alteration of the Work Product without the involvement of Design-Builder is at Owner’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to DesignBuilder or anyone working by or through Design-Builder, including Design Consultants of any tier (collectively the “Indemnified Parties”), and on Owner’s obligation to provide the indemnity set forth in Section 4.5 herein.
4.3 Owner’s License upon Owner’s Termination for Convenience or Design-Builder’s Election to Terminate. If Owner terminates this Agreement for its convenience as set forth in Article 8 hereof, or if Design-Builder elects to terminate this Agreement in accordance with Section 11.4 of the General Conditions of Contract, Design-Builder shall, upon Owner’s payment in full of the amounts due Design-Builder under the Contract Documents, grant Owner a fully paid up, perpetual license to use the Work Product to complete the Project and subsequently occupy the Project, and Owner shall thereafter have the same rights as set forth in Section 4.2 above, conditioned on the following:
4.3.1 Use of the Work Product is at Owner’s sole risk without liability or legal exposure to any Indemnified Party, and on Owner’s obligation to provide the indemnity set forth in Section 4.5 herein, and
4.4 Owner’s License upon Design-Builder's Default. If this Agreement is terminated due to Design-Builder's default pursuant to Section 11.2 of the General Conditions of Contract, then Design-Builder grants Owner a fully paid up, perpetual license to use the Work Product to complete the Project and subsequently occupy the Project, and Owner shall thereafter have the same rights and obligations as set forth in Section 4.2 above.
Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, if it is ultimately determined that Design-Builder was not in default, Owner shall be deemed to have terminated the Agreement for convenience, and Design-Builder shall be entitled to the rights and remedies set forth in Section 4.3 above.
4.5 Owner’s Indemnification for Use of Work Product. Owner recognizes that in the event of an early termination of the Work, whether for convenience or for cause, DesignBuilder will not have the opportunity to finish or to finalize its Work Product. Therefore, if Owner uses the Work Product, in whole or in part, or if Owner is required to indemnify any Indemnified Parties based on the use or alteration of the Work Product under any of 979
11 | P a g e
the circumstances identified in this Article 4, Owner shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Indemnified Parties from and against any and all claims, damages, liabilities, losses and expenses, including attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from the use or alteration of the Work Product, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.
4.6 Obligations on Subcontractor. Any sub-contract entered into by Design-Builder relating to this Contract, to the extent allowed hereunder, shall include a like provision (on Owner’s ownership in Work Products) for work to be performed under this Contract to Contractually bind or otherwise oblige its subcontractor performing work under this Contract such that Owner’s ownership rights of all Work Products are preserved and protected as intended herein. Failure of Design-Builder to comply with this requirement or to obtain the compliance of its subcontractor with such obligations shall subject DesignBuilder to all remedies allowed under law and termination of this Contract.
4.7 Use of Work Products and Trade Secrets by Third Parties. Design-Builder shall not make available, provide or disclose any Work Product to any third party without prior written consent of Owner. Design-Builder further agrees that it will not disclose nor cause others to disclose any of Owner’s trade secrets or other potentially patentable matters including inventions, discoveries, improvements, and methods, developed during the performance of this Contract. Design-Builder shall be liable for any loss of patentable rights as a result of such disclosure whether such disclosure is inadvertent or not.
4.8 Non-Infringement Warranty. Design-Builder hereby represents and warrants that neither the Work Product, including Owner’s use thereof, nor performance of all obligations under this Contract shall in any way, directly or contributorily, infringe upon any third party’s intellectual property rights, including, without limitation, patents, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets, right of public Owner and proprietary information.
This section shall survive expiration or termination of this Contract.
4.9 In Design-Builder’s defense of the Owner, negotiation, compromise, and settlement of any such infringement legal action, the Owner shall retain discretion in and control of the litigation, negotiation, compromise, settlement, and appeals therefrom.
4.10 Where any Work Product furnished by Design-Builder is in a form of software or firmware (“Vehicle”), and if any part of the such Vehicle (a) becomes the subject of a legal action, (b) is adjudicated as infringing a third party’s Intellectual Property right, or (c) has its use enjoined or license terminated; Design-Builder shall, with the Owner’s consent, do one of the following immediately. Design-Builder shall at its expense either:
4.10.1 Procure for the Owner the right to continue using said part of the Vehicle; or
4.10.2 Replace the Vehicle with a functionally equivalent, non-infringing product.
4.11 Exercise of any of the above-mentioned options shall not cause undue business interruption to the Owner or diminish the intended benefits and use of the Work Product by the Owner under the specifications herein.
980
12 | P a g e
4.12 Rights and remedies available to the Owner hereinabove shall survive the expiration or other termination of this Contract. Further, the rights and remedies are cumulative of those provided for elsewhere in this Contract and those allowed under the laws of the United States, the State of California, and the County of San Bernardino. This Paragraph shall survive the expiration or other termination of this Contract.
4.13 Unless expressly stated otherwise, for all pre-existing third-party and DesignBuilder’s intellectual property (if any), including software, required to operate or use any Work Product delivered by Design-Builder, Design-Builder hereby grants and will cause others to grant Owner (including its agents and consultants) an irrevocable license to use such pre-exiting intellectual property internally by Owner (including its agents and consultants).
Article 5
Contract Time
5.1 Date of Commencement. The Phase 1 Services shall commence within five (5) days of Design-Builder’s receipt of Owner’s Notice to Proceed unless the parties mutually agree otherwise in writing. The Work shall commence within five (5) days of DesignBuilder’s receipt of Owner’s Notice to Proceed for Phase 2 Services (“Date of Commencement”) if the Proposal is accepted and the Contract Price Amendment is agreed upon, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise in writing.
5.2 Substantial Completion and Final Completion.
5.2.1 Substantial Completion of the entire Work shall be achieved no later than (To be included in the Phase 2 Amendment) calendar days after the Date of Commencement (“Scheduled Substantial Completion Date”).
5.2.2 The parties agree that the definition for Substantial Completion set forth in Section 1.2.38 of the General Conditions of Contract applies.
5.3 Interim milestones and/or Substantial Completion of identified portions of the Work shall be achieved as follows:
5.3.1 Completion of Basis of Design Report
5.3.2 Submittal of the Proposal(s)
5.4 Final Completion of the Work or identified portions of the Work shall be achieved as expeditiously as reasonably practicable. Final Completion is the date when all Work is complete pursuant to the definition of Final Completion set forth in Section 1.2.21 of the General Conditions of Contract.
5.5 All of the dates set forth in this Article 5 (“Contract Time”) shall be subject to adjustment in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract. 981
13 | P a g e
5.6 Time is of the Essence. Owner and Design-Builder mutually agree that time is of the essence with respect to the dates and times set forth in the Contract Documents.
5.7 Liquidated Damages.
5.7.1 Design-Builder understands that if Substantial Completion is not attained by the Scheduled Substantial Completion Date, Owner will suffer damages which are difficult to determine and accurately specify. Design-Builder agrees that if Substantial Completion is not attained by the Scheduled Substantial Completion Date (the “LD Date”), Design-Builder shall pay Owner five thousand Dollars ($5,000) as liquidated damages for each calendar day that Substantial Completion extends beyond the LD Date.
5.7.2 Design-Builder understands that if Final Completion is not attained by the Scheduled Final Completion Date, Owner will suffer damages which are difficult to determine and accurately specify. Design-Builder agrees that if Final Completion is not attained by the Scheduled Final Completion Date (the “LD Date”), DesignBuilder shall pay Owner twenty-five hundred Dollars ($2,500) as liquidated damages for each calendar day that Final Completion extends beyond the LD Date.
5.7.3 The parties agree that the Liquidated Damages set out in section 5.7.1 and
5.7.2, above, shall constitute Owner’s sole remedy for delay.
5.8 Owner’s Review Time. The parties have established the following maximum and minimum amount of time for Owner to review Design Submissions and the Project Schedule or any updates thereto unless the parties agree in writing otherwise.
5.8.1 Owner shall have a minimum of fifteen working days of receipt by Owner to review all Design Submissions, the Project Schedule, and any updates thereto.
5.8.2 Owner shall review and (if applicable) provide a response to Design-Builder on all Design Submissions, the Project Schedule and any updates thereto within fifteen working days of receipt by Owner.
Article 6
Contract Price
6.1 Contract Price.
6.1.1 Owner shall pay Design-Builder on a time and material basis in accordance with a not to exceed of three million, nine hundred and ninety-eight thousand, six hundred and twenty-seven dollars ($3,998,627) for the Phase 1 Services, subject to adjustments made in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Phase 1 Services compensation is deemed to include all sales, use, consumer and other taxes mandated by applicable Legal Requirements.
982
14 | P a g e
6.1.2 Owner and the Design-Builder agree to execute the amendment to this Agreement for Phase 2 related work after successful completion and acceptance by the Owner of the Proposal(s) and amendment(s). For Phase 2 Services, Owner shall pay Design-Builder in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions of Contract a contract price (“Contract Price”) equal to the negotiated Contract Price Amendment, or equal to Design-Builder’s Fee (as defined in Section 6.4 hereof) plus the Cost of the Work (as defined in Section 6.7 hereof), subject to any GMP established in Section 6.8 hereof or as set forth in the Contract Price Amendment and any adjustments made in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
6.2 Markups for Changes. If the Contract Price requires an adjustment due to changes in the Work, and the cost of such changes is determined under Section 9.4.1 of the General Conditions of Contract, the following markups shall be allowed on such changes:
6.2.1 For additive Change Orders, including additive Change Orders arising from both additive and deductive items, it is agreed that Design-Builder shall receive fifteen percent (15%) of the additional costs incurred for that Change Order for overhead and profit.
6.2.2 For deductive Change Orders, including deductive Change Orders arising from both additive and deductive items, the deductive amounts shall include an amount equal to the sum of five percent (5%) for profit applied to the direct costs of the net reduction (which amount will account for a reduction associated with Design-Builder’s Fee) applied to the direct costs of the net reduction.
6.3 Not Used
6.4 Basis of Compensation. Design-Builder’s compensation for Phase 1 work will be provided on the basis of actual hours of work performed, hourly rates agreed upon by Owner and Design-Builder, and the not-to-exceed prices.
6.5 For certain trades, Owner and Design-Builder may agree upon lump sum or notto-exceed prices for services such as geotechnical exploration of the site, utility potholing, piloting equipment, surveying, etc. after selection of Design-Builder. Prices negotiated will be consistent with the Design-Builder’s proposal for the work.
6.6 Phase 1 Invoices. Prior to the first invoice for Phase 1 Work, the Design-Builder shall submit a sample invoice to the Owner for approval showing a detailed breakdown structure and percent complete for different tasks of Phase 1 of the project.
6.7 Cost of the Work.
6.7.1 The term “Cost of the Work” shall mean costs reasonably incurred by Design-Builder in the proper performance of the Work. The Cost of the Work shall include only the following:
6.7.1.1 Wages of direct employees of Design-Builder performing the Work at the Site or, with Owner’s agreement, at locations off the Site, provided, however, that the costs for those employees of Design-Builder performing 983
15 | P a g e
design services shall be calculated on the basis of prevailing market rates for design professionals performing such services or, if applicable, those rates set forth in an exhibit to this Agreement.
6.7.1.2 Wages or salaries of Design-Builder’s supervisory and administrative personnel engaged in the performance of the Work and who are located at the Site or working off-Site to assist in the production or transportation of material and equipment necessary for the Work.
6.7.1.3 Wages or salaries of Design-Builder’s personnel stationed at Design-Builder’s principal or branch offices, but only to the extent said personnel are identified in Exhibit C and performing the function set forth in said Exhibit. The reimbursable costs of personnel stationed at DesignBuilder’s principal or branch offices shall include a ten percent (10%) markup to compensate Design-Builder for the Project-related overhead associated with such personnel.
6.7.1.4 Costs incurred by Design-Builder for employee benefits, premiums, taxes, insurance, contributions and assessments required by law, collective bargaining agreements or which are customarily paid by Design-Builder, to the extent such costs are based on wages and salaries paid to employees of Design-Builder covered herein.
6.7.1.5 The reasonable portion of the cost of travel, accommodations and meals for Design-Builder’s personnel necessarily and directly incurred in connection with the performance of the Work.
6.7.1.6 Payments properly made by Design-Builder to Subcontractors and Design Consultants for performance of portions of the Work, including any insurance and bond premiums incurred by Subcontractors and Design Consultants.
6.7.1.7 Costs incurred by Design-Builder in repairing or correcting defective, damaged or nonconforming Work (including any warranty or corrective Work performed after Substantial Completion), provided that such Work was beyond the reasonable control of Design-Builder, or caused by the ordinary mistakes or inadvertence, and not the negligence, of Design-Builder or those working by or through Design-Builder. If the costs associated with such Work are recoverable from insurance, Subcontractors or Design Consultants, Design-Builder shall exercise best efforts to obtain recovery from the appropriate source and provide a credit to Owner if recovery is obtained.
6.7.1.8 Costs, including transportation, inspection, testing, storage and handling of materials, equipment and supplies incorporated or reasonably used in completing the Work.
6.7.1.9 Costs less salvage value of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools not customarily owned by the workers 984
16 | P a g e
that are not fully consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Design-Builder, including the costs of transporting, inspecting, testing, handling, installing, maintaining, dismantling and removing such items.
6.7.1.10 Costs of removal of debris and waste from the Site.
6.7.1.11 The reasonable costs and expenses incurred in establishing, operating and demobilizing the Site office, including the cost of facsimile transmissions, long-distance telephone calls, postage and express delivery charges, telephone service, photocopying and reasonable petty cash expenses.
6.7.1.12 Rental charges and the costs of transportation, installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling and removal of temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools not customarily owned by the workers, which are provided by Design-Builder at the Site, whether rented from Design-Builder or others, and incurred in the performance of the Work.
6.7.1.13 Premiums for insurance and bonds required by this Agreement or the performance of the Work.
6.7.1.14 All fuel and utility costs incurred in the performance of the Work.
6.7.1.15 Sales, use or similar taxes, tariffs or duties incurred in the performance of the Work.
6.7.1.16 Legal costs, court costs, and costs of mediation and arbitration arising from Design-Builder’s performance of the Work; provided they are not due to the Design-Builder’s negligence, wrongful acts, or breach of this Agreement; as determined by agreement of the parties, or final judicial decision. Such costs do not include costs incurred by the Design-Builder in connection with a dispute resolution process that results in Design-Builder’s payment to settle a third party claim.
6.7.1.17 Legal costs, court costs, and costs of mediation and arbitration reasonably arising from claims based on the Owner’s negligence, wrongful acts, or breach of this Agreement; as determined by agreement of the parties, or final judicial decision. Such costs include costs incurred by the Design-Builder that arise out of a dispute resolution process that results in Owner’s payment to settle a third party claim.
6.7.1.18 Costs for permits, royalties, licenses, tests and inspections incurred by Design-Builder as a requirement of the Contract Documents.
6.7.1.19 The cost of defending suits or claims for infringement of patent rights arising from the use of a particular design, process or product 985
17 | P a g e
required by Owner, paying legal judgments against Design-Builder resulting from such suits or claims, and paying settlements made with Owner’s consent.
6.7.1.20 Deposits which are lost, except to the extent caused by DesignBuilder’s negligence.
6.7.1.21 Costs incurred in preventing damage, injury or loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property.
6.7.1.22 Accounting and data processing costs related to the Work.
6.7.1.23 Other costs reasonably and properly incurred in the performance of the Work to the extent approved in writing by Owner.
6.7.2 Non-Reimbursable Costs. The following shall be excluded from the Cost of the Work:
6.7.2.1 Compensation for Design-Builder’s personnel stationed at DesignBuilder’s principal or branch offices.
6.7.2.2 Overhead and general expenses, which may be recoverable for changes to the Work.
6.7.2.3 The cost of Design-Builder’s capital used in the performance of the Work.
6.7.2.4 If the parties have agreed on a GMP, costs that would cause the GMP, as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents, to be exceeded.
6.8 The Guaranteed Maximum Price.
6.8.1 Design-Builder guarantees that it shall not exceed the GMP of ______ Dollars ($ To be included in the Phase 2 Amendment ). Documents used as a basis for the GMP shall be identified in the Contract Price Amendment to this Agreement. Design-Builder does not guarantee any specific line item provided as part of the GMP, and has the sole discretion to apply payment due to overruns in one line item to savings due to underruns in any other line item.
Design-Builder agrees, however, that it will be responsible for paying all costs of completing the Work which exceed the GMP, as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents.
6.8.2 The GMP includes a Contingency in the amount of
Dollars ($ To be included in the Phase 2 Amendment ) which is available for Design-Builder’s exclusive use for unanticipated costs it has incurred that are not the basis for a Change Order under the Contract Documents. By way of example, and not as a limitation, such costs may include: (a) trade buy-out 986
18 | P a g e
differentials; (b) overtime or acceleration; (c) escalation of materials; (d) correction of defective, damaged or nonconforming Work, design errors or omissions, however caused; (e) Subcontractor defaults; or (f) those events under Article 8 of the General Conditions of Contract that result in an extension of the Contract Time but do not result in an increase in the Contract Price. The Contingency is not available to Owner for any reason, including changes in scope or any other item which would enable Design-Builder to increase the GMP under the Contract Documents. Design-Builder shall provide Owner notice of all anticipated charges against the Contingency, and shall provide Owner as part of the monthly status report required by Section 2.1.2 of the General Conditions of Contract an accounting of the Contingency, including all reasonably foreseen uses or potential uses of the Contingency in the upcoming three (3) months. Design-Builder agrees that with respect to any expenditure from the Contingency relating to a Subcontractor default or an event for which insurance or bond may provide reimbursement, Design-Builder will in good faith exercise reasonable steps to obtain performance from the Subcontractor and/or recovery from any surety or insurance company. Design-Builder agrees that if Design-Builder is subsequently reimbursed for said costs, then said recovery will be credited back to the Contingency.
6.9 Allowance Items and Allowance Values.
6.9.1 Any and all Allowance Items, as well as their corresponding Allowance Values, are set forth in the Contract Price Amendment or the Proposal.
6.9.2 Design-Builder and Owner have worked together to review the Allowance Items and Allowance Values based on design information then available to determine that the Allowance Values constitute reasonable estimates for the Allowance Items. Design-Builder and Owner will continue working closely together during the preparation of the design to develop Construction Documents consistent with the Allowance Values. Nothing herein is intended in any way to constitute a guarantee by Design-Builder that the Allowance Item in question can be performed for the Allowance Value.
6.9.3 No work shall be performed on any Allowance Item without Design-Builder first obtaining in writing advance authorization to proceed from Owner. Owner agrees that if Design-Builder is not provided written authorization to proceed by the date set forth in the Project schedule, due to no fault of Design-Builder, DesignBuilder may be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Time(s) and Contract Price.
6.9.4 The Allowance Value includes the direct cost of labor, materials, equipment, transportation, taxes and insurance associated with the applicable Allowance Item.
All other costs, including design fees, Design-Builder’s overall project management and general conditions costs, overhead and Fee, are deemed to be included in the original Contract Price, and are not subject to adjustment notwithstanding the actual amount of the Allowance Item. 987
19 | P a g e
6.9.5 Whenever the actual costs for an Allowance Item is more than or less than the stated Allowance Value, the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, subject to Section 6.9.4. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect the difference between actual costs incurred by Design-Builder for the particular Allowance Item and the Allowance Value
6.9.6 Interim Milestones – Not Used
Article 7
Procedure for Payment
7.1 Contract Price Progress Payments.
7.1.1 Design-Builder shall submit to Owner on the fifth (5th) day of each month, beginning with the first month after the Date of Commencement, Design-Builder’s Application for Payment in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions of Contract.
7.1.2 Owner shall make payment within thirty (30) days after Owner’s receipt of each properly submitted and accurate Application for Payment in accordance with Article 6 of the General Conditions of Contract, but in each case less the total of payments previously made, and less amounts properly withheld under Section 6.3 of the General Conditions of Contract.
7.1.3 Not Used.
7.2 Retainage on Progress Payments.
7.2.1 Owner will retain five percent (5%) of each Application for Payment provided, however, that when fifty percent (50%) of the Work has been satisfactorily completed by Design-Builder and Design-Builder is otherwise in compliance with its contractual obligations, Owner may choose to not retain any additional retention amounts from Design-Builder’s subsequent Applications for Payment. Owner will also reasonably consider reducing retainage for Work completed early in the Project.
7.2.2 There will be no retainage withheld during Phase 1 of the Project.
7.2.3 Substitution of Securities. At the request and expense of the Design-Builder, in accordance with California Public Contract Code Section 22300, in lieu of Owner withholding the five percent (5%) retention, the Design-Builder may: (1) substitute a deposit of securities at least equivalent to the retention to be paid, or (2) request Owner to pay retention directly to an escrow agent. If the Design-Builder requests that retention be paid into an escrow account, the Design-Builder and Owner shall enter into an escrow agreement in the exact form set forth in the Public Contract Code Section 22300. All forms or correspondence pertaining to Security Deposit in Lieu of Withhold shall be addressed to Owner for review by the legal counsel for Owner.
988
20 | P a g e
7.3 Final Payment. Design-Builder shall submit its Final Application for Payment to Owner in accordance with Section 6.6 of the General Conditions of Contract. Owner shall make payment on Design-Builder’s properly submitted and accurate Final Application for Payment (less any amount the parties may have agreed to set aside for warranty work) within thirty (30) days after Owner’s receipt of the Final Application for Payment, provided that Design-Builder has satisfied the requirements for final payment set forth in Section
6.6 of the General Conditions of Contract.
7.4 Record Keeping and Finance Controls. Design-Builder acknowledges that this Agreement is to be administered on an “open book” arrangement relative to Costs of the Work. Design-Builder shall keep full and detailed accounts and exercise such controls as may be necessary for proper financial management, using accounting and control systems in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and as may be provided in the Contract Documents. During the performance of the Work and for a period of three (3) years after Final Payment, Owner and Owner’s accountants shall be afforded access to, and the right to audit from time to time, upon reasonable notice, DesignBuilder’s records, books, correspondence, receipts, subcontracts, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda and other data relating to the Work, all of which Design-Builder shall preserve for a period of three (3) years after Final Payment. Such inspection shall take place at Design-Builder’s offices during normal business hours unless another location and time is agreed to by the parties. Any multipliers or markups agreed to by Owner and Design-Builder as part of this Agreement are only subject to audit to confirm that such multiplier or markup has been charged in accordance with this Agreement, but the composition of such multiplier or markup is not subject to audit.
Article 8
Termination for Convenience
8.1 The Owner, through its City Council resolution or recorded minute action, may terminate for convenience any part of the remaining work under the Contract at any time, or from time to time, by written notice to the Design-Builder. Such notice shall specify the extent to which the performance of work is terminated and the effective date of such termination.
8.2 Upon receipt of such notice, the Design-Builder shall:
8.2.1 Immediately discontinue work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice and place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities, other than as may be required for completion of such portion of work that is not terminated;
8.2.2 Promptly obtain cancellation upon terms satisfactory to Owner of all purchase orders, subcontracts, rentals or any other contracts existing for the performance of the terminated work or assign those contracts to Owner as directed;
989
21 | P a g e
8.2.3 Assist Owner in the maintenance, protection, and disposition of work in progress, plant, tools, equipment, property, and materials acquired by the DesignBuilder or furnished by the Design-Builder under this Contract; and
8.2.4 Complete performance of the Work which is not terminated.
8.3 Upon any such termination, the Design-Builder shall waive any claims for damages on account thereof; but as the sole right and remedy of the Design-Builder, Owner shall pay Design-Builder substantiated costs in accordance with the following:
8.3.1 All amounts due and not previously paid to the Design-Builder for work completed in accordance with the Contract prior to such notice of termination, and for work thereafter completed as specified in such notice, up to but not exceeding the contract value for the work using the progress schedule, schedule of values and other project controls as applicable;
8.3.2 Reasonable costs incurred in demobilization and the disposition of residual material, plant and equipment; and
8.3.3 There shall be no claim or right to lost profits on unperformed work under any theory or any circumstances. There shall be no other right or claim for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability. These limits apply to a termination for convenience and also to any termination for default subsequently determined wrongful and therefore treated as a termination for convenience.
8.4 Design-Builder shall submit within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of notice of termination a proposal for an adjustment to its compensation including all incurred costs described herein. Should the logistics of such a termination preclude pricing any item of cost, the Design-Builder shall estimate costs to the best of its ability. Owner shall review, analyze, and verify such proposal, and negotiate an equitable adjustment, subject to City Council approval as needed, and the Contract shall be amended in writing accordingly.
8.5 No compensation will be paid to the Design-Builder for unabsorbed or under absorbed overhead, nor shall the Design-Builder be paid for loss of anticipated profits in any form.
8.6 If an agreement cannot be reached concerning an equitable adjustment, Owner may issue a unilateral Change Order.
990
22 | P a g e
Article 9
Representatives of the Parties
9.1 Owner’s Representatives.
9.1.1 Owner designates the individual listed below as its Senior Representative (“Owner’s Senior Representative”), which individual has the authority and responsibility for avoiding and resolving disputes under Section 10.2.4 of the General Conditions of Contract: Arturo Vela, Public Works Director, City of Banning; 99 E. Ramsey Street, Banning, CA 92220; (951) 922-3134
9.1.2 Owner designates the individual listed below as its Owner’s Representative, which individual has the authority and responsibility set forth in Section 3.4 of the General Conditions of Contract: Arturo Vela, Public Works Director, City of Banning; 99 E. Ramsey Street, Banning, CA 92220; (951) 922-3134
9.2 Design-Builder’s Representatives.
9.2.1 Design-Builder designates the individual listed below as its Senior Representative (“Design-Builder’s Senior Representative”), which individual has the authority and responsibility for avoiding and resolving disputes under Section 10.2.4 of the General Conditions of Contract: Joe Lawrence, Design-Build Manager; 26501 Madison Avenue, Murrieta, CA 92562; (559) 647-6650
9.2.2 Design-Builder designates the individual listed below as its Design-Builder’s Representative, which individual has the authority and responsibility set forth in Section 2.1.1 of the General Conditions of Contract: Marcos Reyes, Construction Manager; 26501 Madison Avenue, Murrieta, CA 92562; (951) 973-7393 Article 10
Bonds and Insurance
10.1 Insurance. Design-Builder and Owner shall procure the insurance coverages set forth in the Insurance Exhibit attached hereto and in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions of Contract.
10.2 Bonds and Other Performance Security. Prior to commencement with Phase 2, Design-Builder shall provide the following performance bond and labor and material payment bond or other performance security:
Performance Bond.
Required Not Required
991
23 | P a g e
Payment Bond.
Required Not Required
Article 11
Other Provisions
11.1 Listing of Exhibits and documents incorporated herein:
i. Exhibit A – Design Criteria Report and Preliminary Design Drawings ii. Exhibit B – Scope of Work and Schedule
iii. Exhibit C – Supporting Pricing Information
iv. Exhibit D – List of Reference Documents
v. Exhibit E – Design-Builder's Proposal
vi. Exhibit F – Permits and Approvals
vii. (Not Used)
viii. Exhibit H – Insurance Terms
ix. Exhibit I – Funding, Grant, and Environmental Permits Requirements (To be included in the Phase 2 Amendment)
x. (Not Used)
xi. Exhibit K – Form of Performance Bond
xii. Exhibit L – Form of Payment Bond
xiii. Exhibit M – Wage Determination Schedules
Article 12
Limitation of Liability
12.1 Limitation. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the total liability, in the aggregate, of Design-Builder, its Design Consultants, and Subcontractors, surety (if any) and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents, and any of them, to Owner and anyone claiming by, through or under Owner, for any and all claims, losses, liabilities, costs or damages whatsoever arising out of, resulting from or in any way related to the Project or this Agreement from any cause, including but not limited to the negligence, indemnity, professional errors or omissions, strict liability, breach of contract or warranty (express or implied), shall not exceed one-hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price. The parties agree that specific consideration has been given by Design-Builder for this limitation and that it is deemed adequate.
992
24 | P a g e
Article 13
Mutual Waiver of Consequential Damages
13.1 NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING HEREIN TO THE CONTRARY (EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN SECTION 13.2.1 BELOW), NEITHER DESIGN-BUILDER NOR OWNER
SHALL BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL LOSSES OR
DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE, PROFITS, BUSINESS, REPUTATION OR FINANCING.
13.1.1 The consequential damages limitation set forth in Section 13.1 shall not: (i) affect the payment of liquidated damages or lost early completion bonus, if any, set forth in Article 5 of the Agreement, which both parties recognize has been established, in part, to reimburse Owner or reward Design-Builder for some damages that might otherwise be deemed to be consequential; or, (ii) apply to claims and liabilities for bodily or personal injury, death, or property damage claims required to be indemnified by Design-Builder.
In executing this Agreement, Owner and Design-Builder each individually represents that it has the necessary financial resources to fulfill its obligations under this Agreement, and each has the necessary corporate approvals to execute this Agreement, and perform the services described herein.
OWNER: DESIGN-BUILDER:
993
25 | P a g e
______________________________
(Name of Owner) (Name of Design-Builder)
(Signature) (Signature)
(Printed Name) (Printed Name)
(Title) (Title)
Date: Date:
994
Exhibit A
Design Criteria Report and
Preliminary Design Drawings
995
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment
Plant Recycled Water Upgrades
21 June 2024
996
Prepared by: N2W Engineering
997
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades I Executive Summary
The City of Banning (City or Banning) owns and operates the Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP). The objective of the Banning WWTP and Recycled Water Upgrades Project (Project) is to enhance the WWTP to comply with impending Regional Water Quality Control Board Order (Board Order) requirements and Title 22 standards for recycled water.
The scope of this report includes defining the following:
Reclaimed Water Demand
Anticipated Regulatory Approvals
Description of Existing Unit Processes
Influent Characteristics
Effluent Limits
Furthermore, the following critical items are included in the proposed improvements:
Overview
Design Flows
Process Modeling, Evaluation, and Selection
Description of New Unit Processes
Engineering Design Guidelines
o Mechanical
o Civil
o Structural
o Architectural
o HVAC
o Electrical
o Instrumentation and Controls
o SCADA
o Miscellaneous
The existing treatment plant includes primary and secondary treatment processes, with chlorine disinfection prior to disposal into on-site percolation ponds. The primary treatment involves a mechanical bar screen, with a manual bypass screen, followed by a vortex grit chamber and primary clarifiers. Screenings are processed through a washer compactor before being collected in a bin for disposal. Grit is processed in a hydrocyclone and classifier before being dropped into a bin for disposal. The screened and degritted effluent is settled in two primary clarifiers.
Secondary treatment consists of trickling filters and secondary clarifiers. Secondary sludge is pumped to the headworks for co-thickening with the primary sludge. The sludge can be thickened before being conveyed to the digesters, but the gravity sludge thickener is currently bypassed. Digested sludge is applied to the drying beds.
After investigating some options for upgrading the trickling filter system, it was determined that the option that would best meet the City’s objectives was decommissioning the trickling filter system and replacing it with a membrane bioreactor (MBR) system. MBR produces the best water quality, positioning the City to supply WWTP effluent to recycled water customers. The Sun Lakes Country Club will be the City’s primary recycled water customer, with an expected demand of 0.76 Million Gallon per Day (MGD).
998
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades II A preliminary BioWin model was created for the proposed facilities. The effluent limits aim to achieve Board Order and Title 22 requirements. Two different activated sludge process configurations were modeled. One is a conventional modified Ludzack-Ettinger (MLE) process configuration, where the return of activated sludge (RAS) and mixed liquor return (MLR) from the aerobic zone are both delivered to the anoxic zone. In an effort to avoid the recycling of high dissolved oxygen loads to the anoxic zone resulting from an elevated RAS flow and DO concentrations, which would inhibit denitrification, an alternate MLE configuration was considered. This alternative configuration involves rerouting the RAS to the aerobic zone and relying on the MLR to introduce both nitrate and biomass to the anoxic zone.
The proposed upgrades to the existing Banning WWTP include:
Enhancements to the ferric sulfate storage and dosing system Addition of one primary clarifier, if needed.
Construction of a new MBR system, which includes
o Installation of new fine screens (2 mm)
o Construction of new aeration basins
o Installation of new aeration blowers, each with new aeration diffusers and an internal mixed liquor return pump
o Installation of new membrane tanks
o Installation of new mixed liquor pumps
o Installation of new scour blowers
o Installation of waste activated sludge pumps
Construction of a new chlorine contact basin with new effluent pumps Installation of rotary drum thickeners
Conversion of the existing secondary digester into a primary digester, including the installation of mixing pumps and a heat exchanger.
Installation of a new RO facility, either at the WWTP or at Sun Lakes Country Club o Construction of salt evaporation ponds or a brine line, depending on which RO facility location is selected
.
999
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades III Contents
1. Introduction 1
1.1 Assumptions 1
1.2 Reclaimed Water Demand 1
1.3 Anticipated Regulatory Approvals 2
2. Description of Existing Unit Processes 3
2.1 Plant Overview 3
2.2 Headworks 4
2.3 Primary Clarifiers 5
2.4 Equalization Basin and Pump Station 5
2.5 Chlorine Contact Tank 5
2.6 Effluent Pump Station and Percolation Ponds 5
2.7 Solids Handling 5
3. Influent Characteristics 6
4. Effluent Limits 7
4.1 RWQCB Board Order 7
4.2 Title 22 8
4.3 Beaumont Basin Plan 9
5. Proposed Improvements 9
5.1 Overview 9
5.2 Design Flows and Loads 9
5.3 Process Modeling, Evaluation, and Selection 10
5.3.1 Approach 10
5.3.2 Process Configurations 10
5.4 Description of New Unit Processes 11
5.4.1 Headworks 11
5.4.2 Primary Clarifier 11
5.4.3 Secondary Treatment System 11
5.4.4 Chlorine Contact Tank 12
5.4.5 Solids Handling 12
5.4.6 RO Facility 12
6. Engineering Design Guidelines 13
6.1 Mechanical 13
6.1.1 Valves 13
6.1.2 Pumps 28
6.1.3 Chemical Storage and Feed Facilities 34
6.1.4 Primary Clarifier 36
6.1.5 Secondary Treatment System 36
6.1.6 Chlorine Contact Tank 37
6.1.7 Solids Handling 37
6.1.8 Reverse-Osmosis Facilities 37
6.2 Civil 37
6.2.1 Civil Narrative 37
6.2.2 General Civil Requirements 38
1000
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades IV
6.3 Structural 43
6.3.1 Structural Narrative 43
6.3.2 Design Loads 44
6.3.3 General Structural Requirements 44
6.4 Architectural 49
6.5 HVAC 60
6.6 Electrical 69
6.6.1 Existing Electrical Installation 69
6.6.2 Electrical Scope of Work 69
6.6.3 Preliminary of Electrical Installation Plan 69
6.6.4 Estimated Load Calculation 70
6.6.5 General Electrical Requirements 71
6.6.5.1 Electrical Supply and Distribution 71
6.6.5.2 Technical Requirements 72
6.7 Instrumentation and Controls 80
6.7.1 Process Control Narrative 80
6.7.2 Level of Automation 80
6.7.3 Plant Control Architecture 81
6.7.4 Motor Control Centers (MCCs) 83
6.7.5 Instrumentation and Field Devices 84
6.7.5.1 Instrument Specific Requirements 84
6.7.5.2 Instrument Mounting and Access 84
6.7.6 Controllers and Input/Output (I/O) Modules 85
6.7.6.1 Spare Hardware 85
6.7.6.2 Backups 85
6.7.7 General Instrumentation and Controls Requirements 85
6.7.7.1 Instrumentation and Field Devices 85
6.7.7.2 Instrument Specific Requirements 86
6.8 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 90
6.8.1 Approved SCADA platforms 90
6.8.2 Typical Monitoring and Control 91
6.8.3 Control Philosophy 91
6.8.4 System Integration & Testing 92
6.8.5 General SCADA Requirements 92
6.8.5.1 Design Deliverables 96
6.9 Miscellaneous 101
Table Index
Table 1 Potential recycled water users 1
Table 2 Existing primary clarifier design characteristics 5 Table 3 Existing chlorine contact tank design characteristics 5 Table 4 Existing anaerobic digesters design characteristics 6 Table 5 Average monthly plant data for calendar year 2022 6 Table 6 Average digester operating parameters for calendar year 2022 6 Table 7 Average results for sampling performed in December 2023 7 Table 8 Influent TKN and related data 7
Table 9 WWTP effluent limitations per Board Order R7-2016-0015 8 Table 10 California Code of Regulations Title 22 requirements 8 1001
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades V Table 11 Beaumont Basin Plan Maximum Benefit Objectives 9 Table 12 Influent characteristics used for design 9
Table 13 Design goals and limits 10
Table 14 Mechanical fine screen design criteria 11
Table 15 MBR system design criteria 11
Table 16 Chlorine contact tank design criteria 12
Table 17 RO facility design criteria 12
Table 18 General mechanical requirements 13
Table 19 Valves, general 13
Table 20 Gate valves 15
Table 21 Check valves 15
Table 22 Double offset butterfly valves 16
Table 23 Pressure reducing/pressure relief valves 17
Table 24 Diaphragm valves 18
Table 25 Air release and vacuum valves 18
Table 26 Air valve sizing 18
Table 27 Sluice/slide gates 19
Table 28 Miscellaneous valves 23
Table 29 Valve actuators 24
Table 30 Pipe and valve schedule 25
Table 31 Pumps, general 28
Table 32 Horizontal centrifugal pumps 30
Table 33 Submersible Sump Pumps 30
Table 34 Submersible wastewater pumps 30
Table 35 Sludge dewatering piston pumps 31
Table 36 Positive displacement rotary lobe pumps 31
Table 37 Progressive cavity pumps 31
Table 38 Vertical turbine pumps 32
Table 39 Axial & mixed flow pumps 32
Table 40 End-suction centrifugal pumps 33
Table 41 Pump schedule 33
Table 42 Chemical storage and feed facilities, general 34 Table 43 Chemical metering pumps 34
Table 44 Chemical storage facilities 35
Table 45 Primary clarifier, general 36
Table 46 Secondary treatment system, general 36
Table 47 Chlorine contact tank, general 37
Table 48 Solids handling, general 37
Table 49 Reverse-osmosis facilities, general 37
Table 50 General civil requirements 38
Table 51 General structural requirements 44
Table 52 General architectural requirements 49
Table 53 HVAC general 60
Table 54 Air conditioning units 63
Table 55 Heat pumps 64
Table 56 Exhaust fans 65
Table 57 Ductwork and accessories 65
Table 58 Ventilation schedule 67
1002
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades VI Table 59 Power Supply to Site 71
Table 60 Arc Flash 72
Table 61 Lightning Protection & Grounding 72
Table 62 Switchgear 72
Table 63 Motor Control Centers (MCCs) 73
Table 64 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) 73
Table 65 Motors 74
Table 66 Transformers 75
Table 67 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 75
Table 68 Interior Lighting 75
Table 69 Exterior Lighting 75
Table 70 Conduit 76
Table 71 Conductors 76
Table 72 Harmonic Filter 76
Table 73 Receptacles and Ancillary Equipment 76
Table 74 Backup Generator 77
Table 75 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) 78
Table 76 SCADA system elements descriptions 82
Table 77 General 85
Table 78 General 86
Table 79 Junction Boxes 88
Table 80 Local Control Panels 88
Table 81 Instrument Mounting and Access 88
Table 82 System Specifications 92
Table 83 Design Deliverables 97
Table 84 PLC Programming Specifications 97
Table 85 HMI Configuration 98
Table 86 Typical Monitoring and Control 99
Table 87 Security 100
Table 88 General miscellaneous requirements 101
Figure Index
Figure 1 City of Banning potential recycled water customers (courtesy of Carollo) 2 Figure 2 Process schematic for existing WWTP 4
Figure 3 Modified Ludzack-Ettinger process configuration 10 Figure 4 Alternative Modified Ludzack-Ettinger process configuration 11 Figure 5 Existing switchboard 69
Figure 6 Layout of new electrical equipment 70
Figure 7 Existing connected load 70
Figure 8 Estimated new Load list and calculated power 71 Figure 9 New loading of the main switchboard 71
Figure 10 An example of a scalable plant architecture 81 Figure 11 The solution shall have the flexibility of connectivity and manageability using thin clients. 82
Figure 12 Architecture elements virtualization 83
Figure 13 Typical resilient DLR topology 83
1003
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades VII Appendices
Appendix A: Conceptual Design Drawings
1004
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 1
1. Introduction
The City of Banning (City) owns and operates the Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP). The City engaged N2W Engineering to complete the preliminary design of the WWTP upgrades at the current rated capacity of
3.6 MGD.
The WWTP effluent is currently in compliance with discharge requirements, but it requires significant upgrades to comply with impending total nitrogen (TN) discharge limits by the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB).
In addition, the existing Trickling Filters (TFs), which perform secondary treatment, have reached their end of life.
By replacing existing equipment with new facilities that can treat the water to Title 22 standards for recycled water, this will allow the City to meet the impending RWQCB requirements as well as use the WWTP effluent to serve existing and future non-potable water customers.
Several upgrade options were initially considered in consultation with the City, including options for upgrading the TFs by replacing the plastic media, followed by denitrification filters to achieve the required TN limits. This effort included assessing the condition of the TFs. Preliminary cost estimates confirmed that it would serve the City better to construct a new membrane bioreactor (MBR) facility and decommission the existing TFs. The new MBR system would not only provide better results but would also allow for reuse by producing an effluent suitable for direct use in a reverse osmosis (RO) desalination facility.
This design criteria report (DCR) documents the upgrades required to meet the new limits.
1.1 Assumptions
This DCR has been prepared based the following assumptions:
1. The planned rehabilitation and upgrades for the Project will be designed and constructed via a Progressive Design Build (PDB) delivery.
2. The City has a limited budget for the Project, and the progressive design process would be conducted to maximize benefits for the City within the available budget.
1.2 Reclaimed Water Demand
The City has an existing non-potable water system that delivers water from a non-potable groundwater well, Well M7, to Sun Lakes Country Club for irrigation use. The City has begun constructing a 24-inch diameter pipeline to connect the existing non-potable water pipe to the WWTP. The backbone pipeline is expected to be completed, tested, and accepted by mid-2024. Once reclaimed water becomes available from the upgraded WWTP, the WWTP will replace Well M7 to serve Sun Lakes Country Club as part of this Project. Typical annual demand for the Sun Lakes Country Club is 850 AFY (0.76 MGD).
Since the Sun Lakes Country Club is located on the westerly end of the City, other potential customers listed in Table 1 will be within proximity to receive recycled water. Figure 1 on the following page shows the planned backbone pipeline and laterals to the potential recycled water customers.
Table 1 Potential recycled water users
Customer Recycled Water
Demand (AFY)
Recycled Water
Demand (MGD)
Existing Customers Currently Using Potable Water or Ground Water from Non-Potable Wells Sun Lakes Country Club 850 0.76
Banning High School 175 0.16
Dysart Park 87 0.08
Lions Park 79 0.07
Subtotal 1,191 1.07
1005
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 2 Projected Future Developments
Rancho San Gorgonio Development 217 0.19
Five Bridges Development 223 0.20
Neighborhood Park 35 0.03
Subtotal 475 0.42
Total 1,666 1.49
Figure 1 City of Banning potential recycled water customers (courtesy of Carollo) This Project will only involve meeting the 0.76 MGD demands of the Sun Lakes Country Club. Constructing the laterals to the other customers will be a future development. More information regarding the City’s reclaimed water needs can be found in the 2024 Feasibility Study (attached to the RFP).
1.3 Anticipated Regulatory Approvals
Permit review and issuance, as well as compliance and verification, are essential parts of this Project, involving close coordination with regulatory agencies. The Project must be evaluated under the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), and the City of Banning will have to provide discretionary approval for the Project as the CEQA Lead Agency. If the Lead Agency determines the Project will not have a significant effect on the environment, the Project may qualify for a Categorical Exemption. If impacts to the environment are anticipated, then an Initial Study Mitigated Negative Declaration (IS/MND) or Environmental Impact Report (EIR) may be appropriate to facilitate Project 1006
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 3 development. Pursuant to CEQA Guidelines Section 15124(d)(2), actions necessary to fully develop the Project as proposed include:
Adoption of the Project under CEQA
o Categorical Exemptions under CEQA
Section 15301: Existing Facilities and or;
Section 15302: Replacement or Reconstruction) or;
o Certification of an IS/MND or EIR
A previous IS-MND is included as an attachment to the RFP for reference only. The City is in the process of updating to include new CEQA and NEPA requirements; the completion of the update is anticipated in Q1 of 2025.
The following agencies have jurisdiction over the Banning WWTP in relation to the proposed Project improvements, and the City of Banning will need to coordinate with multiple agencies regarding the review and approval of permit applications to construct and commission the proposed improvements. Potential regulatory approvals that may be required at the regional, state, and federal levels include various approvals from and coordination with the following:
City of Banning (CEQA Lead Agency)
o Community Development
Building Permit
o Public Works
Encroachment Permit
County of Riverside
o Department of Environmental Health
Solid Waste Facility Requirements
o Fire Department – Hazardous Materials Division
Hazardous Material Business Plan
California State Waterboard Region 7: Colorado River
o Industrial User Waste Discharge Requirements
o Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Updates - Proposed changes to the facility that may affect the existing National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit (for stormwater discharges associated with industrial activities) requirements and/or stormwater monitoring, the existing SWPPP must be updated
o Title 22 Engineering Report for the Production, Distribution, and Use of Recycled Water o Title 27 Engineering Report for Brine Evaporation Ponds (if required) South Coast Air Quality Management District
o Authority to Construct Permit
o Permit to Operate
2. Description of Existing Unit Processes
2.1 Plant Overview
The Banning WWTP has a capacity of 3.6 million gallons per day (MGD) and is designed to treat wastewater to secondary standards. The WWTP consists of primary treatment, secondary treatment, solids handling, disinfection 1007
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 4 (currently not in use), and evaporation/percolation ponds. The primary treatment system consists of a mechanical bar screen, compactor, grit removal system, and cyclone separator. Effluent from headwork is gravity fed to two primary clarifiers. Primary effluent is pumped to two Trickling Filters, each rated for 1.8 MGD. The Trickling Filter effluent is sent to two secondary clarifiers.
Secondary effluent flows through a chlorine contact chamber and is then discharged to 10 unlined evaporation/percolation ponds which recharges the Cabazon Groundwater Basin. This recharge is provided only through surface percolation, and no injection wells are used by the City.
Primary and secondary sludge is processed via two primary anaerobic digesters. A second-stage digester is currently used as a sludge holding tank before thickened sludge is sent to the sludge drying beds. Sludge is allowed to dry and then is hauled offsite for final disposal. A gravity thickener was used to thicken secondary sludge but is currently not in service.
The quantities of wastewater generated are proportional to the City’s population and the water used by its residents.
The average flow of wastewater collected in the City in 2022 was 2.06 MGD.
An overall process schematic of the existing WWTP is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Process schematic for existing WWTP
2.2 Headworks
The existing headworks consist of a chemical feed system, bar screens, screening compactor, grit tank, and grit washer and cyclone. The chemical feed system includes a ferric sulfate feed tank and dosing pump skid; this system is in operation for 3-4 months of the year. There are two bar screens: one 0.25-inch opening multi rake mechanical bar screen (in operation) and one 1.5-inch manual screen (not in operation). The 0.25-inch bar screen is designed to handle 3.6 MGD average daily flow and maximum design flow of 5 MGD. The screening shaftless conveyor compactor has a maximum solid loading rate equal to the solids generated by the rated plant flow of 3.6 MGD. The 1008
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 5 18-foot diameter vortex grit basin is designed to handle up to 30 MGD, assuming an HRT of 2 min, and the grit washer and cyclone have maximum flow rates of 3.6 MGD.
2.3 Primary Clarifiers
There are two existing circular primary settling clarifiers that can accommodate an average flow of up to 3.6 MGD.
The dimensions of the existing units are summarized in Table 2.
Table 2 Existing primary clarifier design characteristics Units West East
Design Flow Rate 1.6 2
Diameter, ft 45 50
Side Water Depth, ft 6.5 7
Surface Area, sf 1,600 1,965
Volume, gal 77,300 102,900
2.4 Equalization Basin and Pump Station
Currently, the City is in the process of designing an Equalization (EQ) Basin and Primary Effluent Pump Station. The EQ basin will be located in the existing stormwater detention pond and will have a capacity of 3.5 million gallons.
The pump station will have three submersible pumps, each rated at 3.6 MGD. Since primary clarifier effluent will be directed to the new EQ basin, this EQ pump station will replace the existing primary effluent pump station.
2.5 Chlorine Contact Tank
An existing chlorine contact tank is located at the WWTP, but the use of a disinfectant has been discontinued. The existing tank is sized for 2.4 MGD and 60 minutes of contact time. The dimensions of the existing tank are summarized in Table 3.
Table 3 Existing chlorine contact tank design characteristics Parameter Value
Length, ft 60
Width, ft 20
Side Water Depth, ft 12 (with 1 ft freeboard)
Tank Volume, gal 107,712
2.6 Effluent Pump Station and Percolation Ponds
The final effluent pump station consists of two (2) 15 HP final effluent pumps located on a reinforced concrete chamber adjacent to the chlorine contact tank.
The final effluent is pumped to 10 unlined evaporation/percolation ponds which recharge to the Cabazon Groundwater Basin. The total surface area of these ponds is 26.5 acres with an operating depth of 2 feet.
2.7 Solids Handling
Sludge generated at the WWTP is anaerobically digested. The existing digestion system includes two primary digesters and one secondary digester. Currently, only the primary digesters are mixed, heated, and used for digestion, while the secondary digester is unmixed and unheated and is only used for sludge holding and some thickening. Assuming 20 days SRT and 4% solids concentration, the existing primary digesters can accommodate sludge generated from a wastewater flow of 2.3 MGD under the current trickling filter treatment system. A summary 1009
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 6 of the dimensions of the existing three digesters is shown in Table 4. A gravity sludge thickener is onsite but is not operated based on past operating experience. Treated sludge is gravity fed to the facility’s drying beds where it remains until approximately 85% of the moisture is removed. Dried sludge is then hauled off for beneficial reuse as a fertilizer and soil amendment.
Table 4 Existing anaerobic digesters design characteristics Units East
Primary
West
Primary
Secondary
Diameter, ft 35 35 35
Side Water Depth, ft 26 26 21
Water Surface Elevation, ft 24 24 19
Total Volume, gal 172,718 172,718 136,735
Design SRT, days 20 20 20
Design Sludge Flow Capacity, gpd 8,636 8,636 6,837
3. Influent Characteristics
The average monthly data plant data for calendar year 2022 are summarized in Table 5.
Table 5 Average monthly plant data for calendar year 2022 Parameter Influent Primary Effluent Secondary Effluent
Flow, MGD 2.07 NA 2.06
pH, - 7.59 NA 7.61
TSS, mg/L 318 91 20.3
BOD, mg/L 317 175 25.3
TKN, mg/L NA NA 12.3
NO2-N, mg/L NA NA 0.55
NO3-N, mg/L NA NA 13.9
TN, mg/L NA NA 26.8
Temp, °F 76 NA 70
NA = Not Available
The table shows that the primary clarifier achieved approximately 71% TSS removal and 45% BOD removal based on the average values. This compares well with typical industry values of 60% and 30%, respectively.
The parameters for the solids handling system are summarized in Table 6.
Table 6 Average digester operating parameters for calendar year 2022 Parameter Value
Feed Volatile Solids, % 86%
Digestate Volatile Solids, % 72%
Volatile Solids Reduction, %(1) 58%
Hydraulic Retention Time, days 18.2
Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit 96.0
1010
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 7 Parameter Value
pH, - 7.2
Alkalinity, mg/L as CaCO3 1,963
Volatile Acids, mg/L 61
Volatile Acids/Alkalinity 0.033
(1) Estimated using the Van Kleeck equation
To add some critical information, a round of sampling was completed in December 2023. Three 24-hour composite samples were collected, but only one sample was analyzed for nitrogen species. The average results are summarized in Table 7 below.
Table 7 Average results for sampling performed in December 2023 Parameter Influent
Primary
Clarifier
Feed
Primary
Effluent
Secondary
Effluent
Total Alkalinity, mg/L as CaCO3 337 297 310 140
Biochemical Oxygen Demand 355 297 193 53
Dissolved BOD 118 113 117 ND
c-Biochemical Oxygen Demand 280 267 187 42
Nitrate as N ND ND ND 23
Nitrite as N ND ND ND 0.50
Ammonia-Nitrogen 32 36 39 9.3
Kjeldahl Nitrogen 56 54 52 21
Dissolved Kjeldahl Nitrogen 33 37 31 9.4
NA = Not Detected
Influent TKN is a key parameter when designing a system to achieve a certain effluent total nitrogen concentration.
Limited influent TKN data is available, as summarized in Table 8.
Table 8 Influent TKN and related data
Date BOD, mg/L TSS, mg/L TKN, mg/L BOD/TKN
4/5/2022 430 600 77 5.6
10/4/2022 250 260 46 5.4
1/5/2023 330 260 53 6.2
12/21/2023 380 56 6.8
Average 348 373 58.0 5.7
The limited data shows an average influent TKN concentration of 58 mg/L.
4. Effluent Limits
4.1 RWQCB Board Order
On June 30, 2016, the RWQCB adopted Board Order R7-2016-0015 (Board Order), which describes the Waste Discharge Requirements (WDRs) and other terms and conditions of operation for the WWTP. The Board Order 1011
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 8 requires the WWTP to remove constituents that present the greatest risk to groundwater quality such as nitrogen, coliforms, and total dissolved solid (TDS). According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA), the maximum contaminant level (MCL) for Nitrate as Nitrogen is 10 mg/L. Per the Board Order, it is assumed all nitrogen available converts to nitrate/nitrite so Total Nitrogen (TN) is used as the measurement of concern. The wastewater effluent limitations per the Board Order are outlined in Table 9.
Table 9 WWTP effluent limitations per Board Order R7-2016-0015 Parameter 30-Day Average 7-Day Average
20°C BOD5 30 mg/L 45 mg/L
TSS 30 mg/L 45 mg/L
pH 6.0 - 9.0
30-Day Daily Dry
Weather Discharge < 3.6 MGD
DO Upper Zone of the Ponds > 1.0 mg/L
TDS Not to Exceed 300 mg/L above the Water Supply
TN 10 mg-N/L
The WDRs identified TN and TDS as constituents of concern. The WDRs state that effluent TDS is not to exceed a level of 300 mg/L above the potable water supply “reasonably protects present and anticipated beneficial uses of groundwater in the area,” (typical incremental addition of dissolved salts from domestic water usage is 150 to 380 mg/L.) The level of TDS in Banning’s potable water supply is approximately 200 mg/L, which would result in an effluent TDS limit of approximately 500 mg/L. The new TN limit is therefore the primary parameter of interest to the design of the new membrane bioreactor (MBR) plant.
Currently, there is no set timeframe for the City to comply with the Board Order.
4.2 Title 22
The City plans to serve recycled water from the WWTP to the Sun Lakes Country Club (and other irrigation customers in the future). The WWTP effluent must therefore meet the State Water Resources Control Board, Division of Drinking Water (DDW) water recycling criteria outlined in the California Code of Regulations Title 22 requirements. These criteria are summarized in Table 10 below.
Table 10 California Code of Regulations Title 22 requirements Parameter Limit
Average Daily Turbidity, nephelometric
turbidity unit NTU(1)
<2
Chlorine Residual, milligram-minutes per liter
(mg-min/L)(2)
450
Total Coliform, most probable number (MPN),
per 100 milliliters (mL)(3)
2.2 (1) Effluent cannot exceed 5 NTU more than 5% of the time. Effluent cannot exceed 10 NTU at any time. Coagulant must be added if the influent to the filter exceeds 5 NTU for more than 15 minutes, or 10 NTU at any time. (2) Under minimal modal contact time (CT) of 90 minutes. This corresponds to a residual of 5 mg/L or less, or any process that achieves 5-log virus removal.
(3) No more than one sample per month can exceed an MPN of 23 per 100 mL. 1012
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 9
4.3 Beaumont Basin Plan
The City’s primary recycled water customer will be the Sun Lakes Country Club, which is located above the Beaumont Basin. In order to serve the Sun Lakes Country Club, the water must meet the Beaumont Basin Plan Maximum Benefit Objectives listed in Table 11 below.
Table 11 Beaumont Basin Plan Maximum Benefit Objectives Parameter Limit
Effluent Total Dissolved Solids (TDS), mg/L <330
Effluent Total Nitrogen (TN), mg/L <5.0
The Beaumont Basin Plan will not apply to any of the other potential recycled water users listed in Table 1 in Section
1.2. 5. Proposed Improvements
5.1 Overview
The Banning WWTP will be upgraded to meet the Title 22 regulations and the Board Order’s future TN limit. The MBR system would facilitate reuse by producing an effluent that is suitable to be fed directly to the reverse osmosis (RO) desalination facility, which will be necessary to comply with the Beaumont Basin Maximum Benefit Objectives of TDS and TN.
5.2 Design Flows and Loads
The average dry weather flow for the new facility will be 3.6 MGD. The average influent characteristics are assumed to be similar to that indicated by the available data and presented in Table 5 in Section 3.
The average influent characteristics used for design are summarized in Table 12.
Table 12 Influent characteristics used for design
Parameter Influent
pH, - 7.6
TSS, mg/L 318
BOD, mg/L 317
TKN, mg/L 58
BOD/TKN 5.5
NO2-N, mg/L 0
NO3-N, mg/L 0
Total Alkalinity, mg/L as CaCO3 337
Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit 66
Temperature, degrees Celsius 19
1013
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 10
5.3 Process Modeling, Evaluation, and Selection
5.3.1 Approach
The main goal of the process modeling was to determine the volumes of the aeration basins required to meet the new effluent limits, in particular, a total nitrogen concentration of 10 mg/L. Due to the limited influent and plant operating data, a more conservative design approach was used than what would be used for a plant where more data is available so that the design could be optimized. The specific design goals and limits are summarized in Table 13.
Table 13 Design goals and limits
Parameter Value
Effluent Ammonia-Nitrogen, mg/L <0.25
Effluent Total-Nitrogen, mg/L <7.5
Aerobic Solids Retention Time, days >8
Due to the limited data available, the BioWin model settings were left as default as much as possible. One change was to revise the membrane tank aeration settings from the default coarse bubble aeration to fine bubble aeration.
This resulted in reasonable model-estimated DO concentrations (2.0 – 4.0 mg/L, depending on the conditions modeled and the loads used). Another change was to adjust the half saturation DO concentration (KDO) for nitrite oxidizing bacteria (NOBs). The default KDO setting in the model is 0.50 mg/L, which is double the KDO for AOBs.
The KDO for NOBs was reduced to match the KDO for AOBs (0.25 mg/L).
5.3.2 Process Configurations
Two different activated sludge process configurations were modeled. A conventional modified Ludzack-Ettinger (MLE) process configuration where the return activated sludge (RAS) and mixed liquor return (MLR) from the aerobic zone are both delivered to the anoxic zone, as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 Modified Ludzack-Ettinger process configuration In MBR systems, the concern with the MLE configuration is that the combination of the high DO concentration in the membrane tank and the high RAS ratio of 4.0 can result in excessive DO loads returned to the anoxic zone. Since the heterotrophic bacteria that perform denitrification would consume oxygen rather than nitrate, excessive DO may limit denitrification in the anoxic zone. An alternative process MLE configuration often used in MBR systems routes the RAS to the aerobic zone and relies on the MLR to return both nitrate and biomass to the anoxic zone, as shown in Figure 4.
Raw Influent Anoxic Aerobic #1 Aerobic #2 Swing Effluent MLR RAS MBR WAS Raw Influent Anoxic Aerobic #1 Aerobic #2 Swing Effluent MLR
RAS MBR WAS
1014
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 11 Figure 4 Alternative Modified Ludzack-Ettinger process configuration Both process configurations were shown to be successful for this Project. However, the alternative configuration required excessive MLR ratios (more than 10 times the influent flow). In addition, the alternative configuration requires splitting the RAS flow equally between all aeration basins in service mid-basin, on top of the equal split of primary effluent required at the inlet of the aeration basins. SRT calculations for the alternative configuration are also more complex since there are three different mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) concentrations in the system (anoxic zone, aeration basin excluding anoxic zone, and membrane tank) as opposed to just two for the MLE configuration.
The model process used for design can be the Modified Ludzack-Ettinger Process Configuration, Alternative Modified Ludzack-Ettinger Process Configuration, or equal.
5.4 Description of New Unit Processes
The WWTP will be upgraded as described below. Where applicable, the new equipment will match existing equipment as much as possible.
To ensure sufficient redundancy, all major process units, including primary clarifiers, aeration basins, membrane tanks and chlorine contact basins, should be designed to provide the required treatment with the largest unit out of service during max month flows and loads. Assume a maximum-month flow peak factor of 1.2 and load peak factor of 1.25.
Conceptual design drawings of the proposed WWTP upgrades, including a process flow diagram (PFD), plant hydraulic profile, site layout, and piping and instrumentation diagram (P&ID) are included in Attachment A. All conceptual drawings are subject to change by the Design Build Entity (DBE).
5.4.1 Headworks
The DBE is to perform a condition assessment on the existing ferric sulfate system and design improvements as necessary. See Tables 42 through 44 in Section 6.1.3 for design guidelines.
5.4.2 Primary Clarifier
The 3.6 MGD capacity of the two existing primary clarifiers does not allow for peak daily flow or redundancy.
Therefore, a third primary clarifier is recommended for the Project. See Table 45 in Section 6.1.4 for design guidelines.
5.4.3 Secondary Treatment System
The existing trickling filters and secondary clarifiers will be replaced with a new MBR system consisting of aeration basins and membrane tanks. The requirements of the new secondary treatment system process units are summarized in Table 14 and Table 15.
Table 14 Mechanical fine screen design criteria
Parameter Value
Minimum No. of Standby Screens 1
Total Capacity Goal, MGD 3.6
Size of Screens Opening, Micron 2000
External Water Source Required Yes (high pressure spray) Table 15 MBR system design criteria
Parameter Value
Effluent Ammonia-Nitrogen, mg/L <0.25
1015
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 12 Parameter Value
Effluent Total Nitrogen (TN), mg/L <7.0
Aerobic Solids Retention Time (aSRT), days >8
Total Capacity Goal of Aeration Basins, MGD 3.6
Total Capacity Goal of Membrane Tanks, MGD 3.6
Additional design guidelines can be found in Table 46 in Section 6.1.5 for additional design guidelines.
5.4.4 Chlorine Contact Tank
The existing chlorine contact tank is rated for 2.4 MGD and 60 minutes of contact time. In order to achieve 3.6 MGD capacity and the 90 minutes of contact time required under Title 22, a second chlorine contact tank is recommended.
The requirements of the new chlorine contact tank are summarized in Table 16.
Table 16 Chlorine contact tank design criteria
Parameter Value
Chlorine Contact Tank (CCT) Meet California Title 22 Requirements Total Capacity Goal of CCTs (Existing and
New), MGD 3.60
Additional design guidelines can be found in Table 47 in Section 6.1.6 for additional design guidelines.
5.4.5 Solids Handling
In order to accommodate the 3.6 MGD plant capacity, it is recommended that the existing digesters be reconfigured.
The existing secondary digester can be converted into a primary digester by adding recirculation pumps and heating elements to the system. This will provide a total capacity of 482,000-gallons and 24,000 gpd of wasted sludge if the three existing digesters are operated in parallel.
Additionally, it is recommended that a new mechanical sludge thickener, such as a rotary screw or drum thickener, be installed to improve the total solids content in the digester influent.
See Table 48 in Section 6.1.7 for design guidelines.
5.4.6 RO Facility
In order to comply with the Beaumont Basin Maximum Benefit Objectives to supply Sun Lakes Country Club with recycled water, a portion of the MBR permeate will be fed to a reverse-osmosis (RO) facility. There are two options for the RO facility. Option 1 is to install an RO facility at the WWTP. Brine will be disposed of in salt evaporation ponds to be constructed at the WWTP site. Option 2 is to install the RO facility at the point-of-use, the Sun Lakes Country Club. Under Option 2, brine can be disposed of into the sewer, which would ultimately return to the WWTP, or through a brine line to be built from the RO facility to the Beaumont Wastewater Treatment Plant.
The minimum requirements of the new RO facility are summarized in Table 13.
Table 17 RO facility design criteria
Parameter Value
Effluent Total Dissolved Solids (TDS), mg/L <330
Effluent Total Nitrogen (TN), mg/L <5.0
Minimum Total Blended Flow, MGD 0.76
1016
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 13 Additional design guidelines can be found in Table 49 in Section 6.1.8.
6. Engineering Design Guidelines
6.1 Mechanical
The following tables contain the Engineering Design Guidelines for mechanical criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
Table 18 General mechanical requirements
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to General Mechanical
Requirements
1 Stainless Steel
Treatment
All fabricated stainless steel shall be pickle and
passivated (P&P) to ASTM380 to remove free iron,
heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities.
P&P shall be done by full emersion of fabricated
parts.
SST items include: piping, structural elements,
supports, fabricated items. cut items, and other parts.
Field cutting and drilling of holes in SST boxes or
fabricated items shall be field cleaned and
P&P. Field cutting shall be approved on a case by
case basis.
2 PVC Flanges and
Plastic Flanges Vanstone flanges are NOT allowed
3 Factory
Acceptance
Testing (FAT)
Contractor shall certify, a minimum of 48 hours
before the date of the FAT witness by the City, that
all manufacturer QC activities and the approved
factory test plan have been successfully completed
without failures/deficiencies/damage/incompleteness
/not passing. Contractor shall submit successfully
completed, signed off factory test(s) by the
manufacturer to the City. If not provided, City can
cancel the FAT witness and DBE shall be
responsible for all costs and impacts associated with
rescheduling the FAT witness.
This is applicable if the
City plans to perform
the FAT witness.
4 Mechanical
Equipment
Installation
Tolerances
Tolerances for all installations by DBE of mechanical
equipment (valves, gates, flowmeters, pumps,
blowers, etc.) shall be within allowable
manufacturers’ requirements.
6.1.1 Valves
Table 19 Valves, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to all valves.
1 Valve Location
Valves shall be accessible (i.e., not buried, with chain operator or valve box), unless otherwise necessary
and noted. Valves shall be installed in locations with
enough room for maintenance personnel to maintain
valves with the proper equipment. Minimize locating
valves with actuators in classified areas, when
possible.
1017
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 14 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
2 Valve and Gate
Automation
Apply automation on critical pipes and channels to
enhance equipment O&M.
Automation and
connection to SCADA
is preferred.
3 Valve
Maintenance
Incorporate dismantling joints into design layout to
ease removal of valves.
Consider access hatches, rollup doors, and lifting
devices for large and critical valves.
4 Actuator Type
Incorporate pneumatic/electric actuators for
proportional control (modulating) valves and gates,
unless otherwise noted or not available.
Provide chain operator
for valves over 6-ft
high.
Buried valves shall have extension stems to grade
with square nuts and cast iron or steel pipe
extensions. Stem supports shall prevent shearing of
the stem.
5 Actuator Sizing Oversize actuator to allow for
aging/corrosion/scaling/ clogging of equipment.
6 Surge Control Specify speed of opening and closing to avoid significant increase in pressures.
7 Factory Testing
Data
Submit Factory Acceptance Test data before
shipment of the valve. The data shall also include
certification of quality and test results for factoryapplied coatings.
8 Labeling and
Valve Tags
Label all valves with manufacturer's name and
working pressure cast in raised letters on valve body.
A Type 316 SS tag that includes the valve Reference
Number shall be mounted to the valve with Type 316
SS attachments.
9 Painting and
Coating
(General)
Required for the exterior surfaces of valves.
Required for the wet interior surfaces of ferrous
valves.
Painting and
Coating (Buried
Valves)
Epoxy coated and wrapped with polyethylene
encasement.
Painting and
Coating (Aboveground Valves)
Ferrous interior surfaces: Epoxy.
Ferrous exterior surfaces: Epoxy.
Non-ferrous surfaces: Coat machined, polished, and
non-ferrous surfaces (including gears, bearing
surfaces and similar unpainted surfaces) with
corrosion prevention compound which shall be
maintained during storage and until equipment
begins operation.
10 Pressure Testing,
Field
Conduct on closed valves.
Test system at pressure equal to 1.5 of design
pressure.
Maximum system pressure test shall not exceed
valve manufacturer’s maximum pressure limit.
11 Bolts, Nuts,
Studs, Washers,
Gaskets
All bolts, nuts, studs and washers shall be of Type
316 stainless steel. Buried service shall be stainlesssteel 316 with bituminous coating.
Gaskets shall be full-face type. Gasket material shall
conform to manufacturer's recommendations.
12 End Connections
2.5-inch and smaller may be provided with threaded
or flanged end connections
3-inches and larger require flanged end connections
Unless otherwise shown or otherwise specified, all
flanged valves shall have ends conforming to AWWA
C115, 125 lb. flange.
1018
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 15 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
13 Manufacturer
A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for
coordination of design, testing, and furnishing each
valve.
Where 2 or more valves of the same type and size
are required, the valves shall be furnished by the
same manufacturer.
Shall have a successful record of not less than 5
years in the manufacture of the valves indicated
Require manufacturer to provide Certificate of Proper
Installation.
Table 20 Gate valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to gate valves.
1 Type
Types:
-Resilient-seated (conform to AWWA C509).
-Metal-seated double disk
2 Manufactures Manufacturers: Mueller
-Or equal
3 Pressure Rated 250 PSI. Minimum.
4 Materials
Body:
-Ductile iron.
Trim: 316 SS
5 End
Connections
Type:
-Exposed: flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1,
Class 125.
-Buried: mechanical joint ends conforming to ANSI
A21.11.
Bell and spigot end connections by City approval only.
6 Size Maximum 16”.
Table 21 Check valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to swing check, slanting disc, chemical check, and air service check valves.
1 Swing Check
Type:
-Full opening passages.
-Flanged cover piece (for access to disc).
-Outside lever and spring.
-Air cushioned or hydraulic cushioned, controlled
closing.
Size: 3-inches and larger.
Pressure: Rated 250 PSI working pressure.
Manufacturers: APCO/DeZurik.
-Or equal
Body: Heavy Cast or Ductile Iron.
2 Slanting Disc
Type:
-55 degree seating angle.
-Guaranteed not to stick in closed position.
-Flanged connections for Dashpot or Hydraulic
Snubber.
-Position indicator.
Pressure: Rated 250 PSI working pressure.
Manufacturers: APCO/DeZurik.
-Or equal
1019
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 16 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Body: Ductile Iron, Carbon Steel, and Stainless Steel.
3 Chemical (Type
Check Valve)
Type:
-Self-contained, straight-through design.
-Used for all liquid chemical feed systems.
Material: Chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride (CPVC),
conforming to ASTM8F441.
Manufacturers:
Ryan Herco.
-GF Plastic Systems.
-Asahi/America.
-Or equal
4 Air Service
(Type Check
Valve)
Type:
-Double Door Check Valve.
- Wafer or Lugged Style
-Operate without hammer or shock.
-Spring loaded.
-Normally closed.
Body: 316 Stainless Steel.
Manufacturers: APCO/DeZurik.
-Or equal
Hinge and stop pins 316 SS.
5 End
Connections (all
check valve
types)
Flanged (conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.1), Class
125.
6 Position
Switches (all
check valve
types)
Housing: 316 Stainless Steel.
Manufacturers:
-Westlock Silver Bullet Model 316.
-Or equal.
Table 22 Double offset butterfly valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This section applies to all types of double offset butterfly valves for reclaimed water applications Double Offset, AWWA 1 Materials
Ductile Iron Body (A536 65-41-12)
Flanged End Connection (AWWA)
Shaft Seal: Dry Shaft or Wet Seal
EPDM O-rings or
Chevron V-Type
Packing (pressure
energized seal only)
Trim: 316 SS
2 Size 8” and above 6” and under refer to
Gate Valve Guidelines
3 Maximum Flow
Velocity 16 fps (Bi-Directional Sizing Required)
4 Manufacturers DHC (BTD), VAG (EKN AWWA), or City pre-approved equal
5 Pressure Class
Class 250B and Class 150B
Class 250 with ANSI 125 flanges (Back Spotting of
Flanges Required)
6 Disc Ductile iron ASTM A536 65-45-12, 316 Stainless Steel Double offset disc design for all valves
1020
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 17 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Prior to application of required coating install stainless steel seat edge (where applicable).
Mechanically secured to shaft with Type 304 stainless
steel, straight through taper pins and locking nuts
(where applicable).
Material selection for
pins shall be based on
pressure class
No travel stops for disc on interior of body
Bubble tight with rated pressure applied from either
side of valve.
Bi-directional for control of flow from either direction. 7 Rubber Seats Rubber seats shall be in-body or disc and the retainer shall be a (1-piece) 316 stainless steel seat retainer. 8 Disc Seating
Edge
Type 316 Stainless Steel or Nickel Aluminum Bronze.
Seat shall completely cover and envelope the entire
leading edge of the disc.
Valves disc that do not completely cover the disc edge
or that have coated disc edges are not acceptable.
9 Shaft
Seals
Shaft seals shall be EPDM O-ring or Chevron V-type
pressurized seals only.
10 Coating Fusion Bonded Epoxy
Epoxy shall be a minimum of 10 mils DFT
11 Operators
Sized for bi-directional flow
AWWA Worm Gear:
300 ft-lb input torque to stop
12 Input Torque
Required input torque with maximum hand wheel pull
of 80lbs and 150 ft. lbs. for 2” operating nuts. Per
AWWA C504
13 Gear Reducers
Totally enclosed, permanently lubricated and sealed
gear reducers.
Self-locking with open and close stops provided to
limit valve disc travel.
Worm Gear (SAMBO AWWA or City pre-approved
equal).
Buried service gears shall be minimally 90% grease
packed with a generous slathering of all interior
surfaces.
Submit calculations for valve torque requirements to
Engineer as part of Shop Drawing submittal
package. Velocity for dynamic torque must be 16 fps.
Mill Test Reports Shall
Be Required for Plain
Stem Valve Metallic
Components
(Operators Excluded)
14 Compliance
Compliant with AIS requirements (for SRF AIS
Funding) - Manufactured using Iron and Steel
products produces in the United States.
In Accordance with AWWA C504.
Table 23 Pressure reducing/pressure relief valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document applies to pressure reducing, pressure
sustaining, flow control, level control, and pressure
relief valves.
1 Type Single diaphragm globe or angle valve.
Hydraulically operated, adjustable, pilot controlled.
2 Materials
Body Materials: Ductile Iron (ASTM A 536).
Trim: 316 SS.
3 Pressure Rated: 250 PSI.
1021
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 18 4 Manufacturers Manufacturers: Cla-Val Company.
-Or equal
Table 24 Diaphragm valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to diaphragm valves.
1 Service Types
Service Types:
-Chemical.
-Water.
2 Body Materials: PVC; CPVC; PVDF; and 316SS where
appropriate.
3 Diaphragm
Materials:
-EPDM.
-TFE
4 Manufacturers
Manufactures:
-ITT Grinnel.
-Asahi/America.
-Hayward
-RG Sloane
-Chemtrol
Table 25 Air release and vacuum valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document applies to air release, air and vacuum,
and combination air valves.
1 Air Release Valve
(ARV)
Type: Float operated, compound lever.
Include isolation valve to allow removal of valve
without shutting down the equipment.
2 Air and Vacuum
Valves (AVV)
Float has no direct contact with air and water.
Float is centered or peripheral guided for positive
shutoff into seat.
Seat shall be fastened into the valve cover.
3 Combination Air
Valves (CAV)
Type: Single-body construction designed to provide all
functions within one housing.
4 Air Valve for
Vertical Turbine
Pumps
Types:
-3-inches and smaller: AVV with throttling device.
-4-inches and larger: Dual body CAV mounted on top
of surge check.
5 Pressure See Air Valve Sizing Table in 2.1.8
6 Materials
Body: Cast Iron, Ductile Iron, Stainless steel or
composite materials.
Trim: 316 SS.
7 Manufacturers
Manufacturers :
-APCO/DeZurik.
-A.R.I. Flow Control Accessories.
-Or equal
Table 26 Air valve sizing
Air Valve Sizing
Service Valve
Type
Pressure
Range Manufacturer and Model Notes
Potable / Reclaimed
Water ARV
≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. S-050 or Equal.
> 150 PSI -A.R.I. S-015 or Equal.
> 500 PSI -A.R.I. S-016 or Equal.
1022
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 19 Air Valve Sizing
Service Valve
Type
Pressure
Range Manufacturer and Model Notes
AVV
≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. K-060 or Equal.
> 150 PSI -A.R.I. K-060 or Equal.
> 500 PSI -A.R.I. K-064 or Equal.
CAV
≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. D-040 or Equal.
> 150 PSI -A.R.I. D-060-C HF or Equal.
> 500 PSI -A.R.I. D-064-C HF or Equal.
Sewer / Wastewater
Treatment Plants
ARV ≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. S-050 or Equal.
AVV ≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. K-020 or Equal.
CAV ≤ 150 PSI -A.R.I. D-023 or Equal.
Table 27 Sluice/slide gates
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to sluice or slide gates. 1 Design
Requirement
The design requirements for the slide, frame and
guides shall be either “Standard” or “Heavy Duty”.
The “Standard” or “Heavy Duty” gate design shall be
determined by the “gate factor”
The “gate factor” is the product of the width times the design head
If the “gate factor” exceeds 120, the “Heavy Duty”
design shall be used.
The “Heavy Duty” gate may also be selected
regardless of the “gate factor” number, if it is
designated in the Gate Schedule
2 Manufacturers
Manufacturers:
-Rodney-Hunt.
-Waterman.
-Whipps.
-Golden Harvest.
- Fontaine-Aquanox
-Or approved equal.
3 Materials
Body: Stainless Steel, Type 316. Type of material
should be reviewed for
suitability for
environment. 316 L
should be used for all
welded components
Gate: Stainless Steel, Type 316.
Trim: 316 SS.
Slide gates, seals:
- UHMWPE for sides and top
- Neoprene or EPDM for bottom
4 Standard Frame
In addition to the minimum requirements of AWWA
C561, latest edition, the guide fabrication with
UHMWPE shall support the slide fully in open
position.
Design for the maximum design head specified, with a
minimum safety factor of 4 with regard to ultimate
tensile, compressive and shear strengths published in
referenced ASTM Material standards.
Where frames extend above the operating floor, the
frame design is to be self-supporting so that no further reinforcing or support is required. For cases where
extreme height requires additional bracing, such
bracing shall be provided by the gate manufacturer,
and shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.
From Stainless Steel plate and/or structural members
to provide a rigid, one piece frame and guide.
Minimum thickness of all members 1/4 –inch. Bolt
together frame and guide designs are not acceptable.
1023
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 20 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Design shall allow for embedded mounting directly to
a wall with stainless steel anchor bolts and grout or
mounting to a wall thimble with stainless mounting
studs and a mastic gasket material. Mounting style
shall be as shown on the contract drawings and gate
schedule.
The structural portion of the frame and guide that
incorporated the seat/seals shall be framed or welded
into a one-piece shape for rigidity. Frame and guide
designs that consist of two or more bolted.
Structural members for water loads transferred
through the assembly bolts are specifically not
acceptable.
Gussets shall be “wraparound” gussets. The gussets
shall extend over the guide section to ensure the
guide surfaces are at 90 degrees. The wraparound
gussets shall be welded to guide groove as well as
welded to and extend fully to the outside width of the
wall base plate. Gussets to be on vertical guide
members and bottom invert guide member to stabilize
guide groove dimensions, prevent twisting of guide
groove transfer force to wall mounting plate at each
anchor location besides the wall opening.
Invert seal shall be mounted in the frame with
mechanical fasteners. As an alternate, the invert seal
may be mounted to the slide with mechanical
fasteners.
Allow replacement of the frame’s top, bottom and side
seals without dismantling or removing the frame from
the concrete or wall thimble.
Mounting surface of the frame to be flat and provide
leak-tight closure between the frame and the
mounting surface.
Face mounted, wall thimble mounted or embedded
frame, as shown on the contract drawings or in the
Gate Schedule.
Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMWPE)
per ASTM D4020 to be inserted into guide for contact
with slide.
Minimum UHMWPE contact width of 1 inch.
A rigid stainless invert member shall be provided
across the bottom of the opening. The invert member
shall have a face continuous with the sides of the
frame on downward opening weir gates.
A rigid stainless steel top seal member shall be
provided across the top of the opening on gates
designed to cover submerge openings.
Anchor bolts shall not pass through the sealing
surface of the frame or guides.
5 Heavy Duty
Frame
Formed Stainless Steel Plate and/or structural
members to provide rigid, one-piece frame. Note:
multi-piece frame will only be considered when
shipping restriction does not allow one-piece. If a
multi-piece frame is proposed, submit this deviation
for approval by the ENGINEER.
The structural portion of the frame that incorporates
the seat/seals shall be formed or welded into onepiece shape for rigidity. Frame and guide designs that consist of two or more bolted structural members for
1024
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 21 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
water loads transferred through the assembly bolts
are specifically not acceptable.
Minimum section thickness of all members shall be
1/4-inch. When the “gate factor” exceeds 240,
minimum section thickness of all members shall be
3/8-inch.
Engagement dimensions must be increased to
accommodate Heavy Duty Slide.
6 Gates: Standard
Slide
In addition to the minimum requirements of AWWA
C561
All materials shall be stainless steel as called for in the gate schedule.
Rectangular or square.
Fabricated with a flat plate reinforced with structural members and/or formed plate stiffeners to form a
rigid, one-piece slide. Minimum section thickness of
all members, except seal retainers, shall be 1/4-inch
Reinforcing stiffeners shall be welded to the slide and mounted horizontally. Vertical stiffeners shall be
welded on the outside of the horizontal stiffeners and
gate surface for additional reinforcement and stress
distribution.
Deflection shall not exceed 1/720 of the span of the
gate or 1/16” whichever is less, when under the
maximum design head
Design for the maximum design head specified, with a
minimum safety factor of 4 with regard to ultimate
tensile, compressive and shear strengths published in
the referenced ASTM material standards
The stem connector shall be constructed of two
angles or plates and shall be welded to the slide and
to at least one horizontal stiffener. A minimum of two
bolts shall connect the stem to the stem connector
7 Gates: Heavy
Duty Slide
Design
Stainless steel plate with structural members and/or
formed plate stiffeners to form rigid, one-piece slide.
Note: multi-piece slide will only be considered when
shipping restriction does not allow one-piece. If a
multi-piece slide is proposed, submit this deviation for approval by the ENGINEER.
Minimum section thickness of all members, except
seal retainers, shall be 1/4-inch. When “gate factor”
exceeds 240, the minimum section thickness of all
members, except seal retainers, shall be 3/8-inch.
Heavy Duty slide shall include an increased section at
insertion into the guides (thick-edge design). When
the “gate factor” exceeds 120, the minimum gate edge
thickness inserting into the guide groove shall be a 1
½” plate, or a boxed fabrication, suitably designed, to achieve for each foot of slide height a minimum
section modulus of 3.50 inch3 as well as at sections
through the horizontal ribs. When the “gate factor”
exceeds 240, the minimum gate edge thickness
inserting into the guide groove shall be a minimum 2”
thick plate, or a boxed fabrication, suitably designed, to achieve for each foot of slide height, a minimum
section modulus of 7.00 inch3 as well as at all sections through the horizontal reinforcement ribs.
8 Seals Seal shall be self-adjusting.
1025
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 22 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
- UHMWPE for side and top seals
- Shall be neoprene or EPDM for bottom seals.
All gates shall be provided with a self-adjusting, low
coefficient of friction, UHMW polyethylene seat/seal
system with a continuous compression cord to ensure
contact between the seals/seats and the slide, and to
restrict leakage in accordance with the performance
requirements listed in this specification. SelfAdjusting seals shall be on the sides and top of upward opening gates and shall be on the sides and
bottom of downward opening gates.
The seal system shall have been factory tested to
confirm negligible wear (less than 0.01”) and proper
sealing. The factory testing shall consist of an
accelerated wear test comprised of a minimum of
25,000 open-close cycles using a well-agitated
sand/water mixture to simulate fluidized grit, and a retest of leakage to confirm compliance with this specification’s leakage limits.
Resilient J-seals, P-seals or crown seals shall not be
acceptable.
Pressure pads, or any other arrangement requiring
adjustment to maintain seal compression shall not be
acceptable.
All seals must be bolted or otherwise mechanically
fastened. Arrangements with seals that are force fit or held in place with adhesives are unacceptable.
The seals shall be mounted so as not to obstruct the
waterway opening.
All upward opening gates shall be provided with a
resilient seal to seal the bottom portion of the gate.
The seal shall be attached to the invert member of the
frame. As an alternate, the invert seal may be
mounted to the bottom of the slide. Invert seal shall be held in place with stainless steel attachment hardware
The seal system shall be durable and shall be
designed to accommodate high velocities and
frequent cycling without loosening or suffering
damage.
All seats/seals shall be field replaceable without
removing the frame from the wall or wall thimble.
9 Stems
Shall be full depth ACME threads with a 16-microinch
finish.
Stainless steel
The stem shall be constructed of solid stainless steel
bar for the entire length. Extension pipes are not
acceptable.
The stem shall be threaded to allow full travel of the
slide unless the travel distance is otherwise shown on
the Contract Drawings or Gate Schedule.
Minimum outside diameter at the stem thread shall be
1.50 Stems shall have rolled threads or machine-cut-andpolished threads of the American Standard full depth ACME type with a surface finish on the thread flanks
of 16 micro-inch or better. Stub ACME threads or
metric DIN 103 threads are not acceptable.
1026
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 23 Table 28 Miscellaneous valves
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to ball valves; solenoid valves; and pet cocks.
1 Ball Valves
General: Line size ball valve and union shall be
installed upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch, or other in-line electrical device for isolation during maintenance.
PVC Ball Valves
(Sizes 1/2-inch to
4-inches)
Materials: Body, ball, stem and connector - Schedule
80 PVC or CPVC.
Type:
Double block (or full block) designed to prevent seal
carrier blow-out.
Pressure:
-Rated to 150 PSI at 70°F.
-90° ON/OFF actuation.
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
The selected stem configuration shall provide the
most efficient combination of stem diameter/pitch/lead
and keep the operating temperature at the stem nut to
a minimum during operation. If the proposed stem
configuration will result in any deviation from the
specified speed range, the proposed deviation must
be submitted for approval by the ENGINEER.
Stem diameter, stem guide quantity and stem guide
spacing shall provide a slenderness ratio (l/r) not
exceeding 200.
Tensile strength shall be suitable to withstand the
stem design force, as defined in AWWA C561, with a
safety factor of 5 on the ultimate tensile strength
published in the referenced ASTM material standards.
Compressive strength shall be suitable to resist
buckling at two times the stem design force, as
defined in AWWA C561. Determine critical buckling
load using Euler Column formula defined in AWWA
C561, where C=2.
Stems of more than one section shall be joined with
silicon bronze (ASTM B584 C87200 or C87300) or
stainless steel couplings which shall be threaded and
keyed to the stem or threaded and bolted to the stem.
Fasteners shall include an anti-loosening feature such
as thread locking compound or nylon-insert nuts.
Fasteners shall be stainless steel and shall be
lubricated at assembly.
Stems, on manually operated gates, shall be provided
with adjustable manganese bronze (ASTM B584
C86300 or C86500 or the wrought equivalent) stop
collars to prevent over closing of the slide.
Gates having width greater than 2 times the height
shall be provided with 2 stems and 2 lifting
mechanisms connected by a tandem shaft.
Cross drill and connect the stem to the slide structural sections. Fasteners shall include an anti-loosening
feature such as thread locking compound or nyloninsert nuts. Fasteners shall be stainless steel and shall be lubricated at assembly.
1027
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 24 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Manufacturers:
-Hayward (Sizes 1/2-inch to 4-inches).
-Spears.
-M&T Plastic Inc. (Sizes 1/2-inch to 6-inches)
-The Harrington Corp. (Sizes 1/2-inch to 4-inches).
-Ryan Herco Products Corp. (Sizes 1/2-inch to 4-
inches).
-or approved equal.
Bronze or SS
Ball Valves
(Sizes 1/2-inch to
4-inches)
Type:
-For general water and air service.
-Top entry type.
-Screwed ends.
-Full bore ports.
-Hand lever operators.
Materials:
-All-bronze or SS.
-Teflon seats.
Pressure: Minimum rating of 250 PSI for Bronze or
1,000 PSI WOG (cold, non-shock).
Manufacturers:
-Apollo Ball Valve Division.
-Or equal.
2 Solenoid Valves
Type:
-Two-way, normally closed (i.e., closes when deenergized). -Packless construction.
-Threaded ends.
-Threaded conduit connection.
-Strainer to be installed upstream of each valve.
Materials:
-Seat: Resilient Buna "N" and Teflon.
-Body: Forged brass or stainless steel body and ball
where appropriate
-Internal parts (in contact with fluid): Series 300 and 400 stainless steel.
Manufacturers: ASCO/DeZurik.
-Or equal
3 Pet Cocks (2.5-
inch and smaller)
Provide lever or tee handle operator.
Materials: All brass (ASTM B 16).
Manufacturers: Lunkenheimer Figure 478 or 479.
-Or equal
Table 29 Valve actuators
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document applies to all valve actuating
equipment. This includes manual and automated
electric and pneumatic actuators.
1 Chain actuators Required for manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 6-feet above working level.
2 Spur Gear and
Hand wheel
Required for:
-Gate valves 8-inches and larger.
-Where chain actuator is required.
3 Automated
Electric Actuators
Manufacturers: AUMA.
-Or equal
Must meet area
classification
requirements.
1028
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 25 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
4 Automated
Pneumatic
Actuators
Manufacturers: Fisher.
-Or equal
5 Manual Operator
(exposed)
Types:
-Worm gear drive and nut.
-Hand wheel or chain.
Chain wheel, sprocket, and aluminum chain required
if mounted more than 6 feet above the operating floor.
6 Manual Operator
(buried valves)
Provide valve box, 2-inch square operating nut, and
position indicator.
Extension: required if top of valve nut is greater than 12-inches below top of valve box.
7 Valve Boxes
(buried valves)
Material:
-Cast iron.
-Concrete.
-Or similar.
Cover Size: allow operation of valve actuators.
Cover Marking:
-Potable Water: Water.
-Recycled Water: RW.
-Sanitary Sewer: Sewer.
Table 30 Pipe and valve schedule
Item Pipe Material Preferred Type
of Valve
Preferred
Manufacturers
Process (> 3”)
FORCEMAIN
HDPE, Steel, Ductile Iron,
ANSI A21, 51 (AWWA
C151)
AWWA C900
Plug DeZurik
INFLUENT / EFFLUENT
Steel, AWWA C200,
Welded.
Plug (in vault), DeZurik, Clow
Gates Waterman, FontaineAquanox
SECONDARY EFFLUENT Plug (in vault) DeZurik, Clow
TERTIARY EFFLUENT Butterfly (in vault) DeZurik, Pratt
FINAL EFFLUENT
Butterfly (in vault) DeZurik, Pratt
Gates Waterman, FontaineAquanox
RECYCLED WATER
Butterfly (in vault) DeZurik, Pratt
Gates Waterman, FontaineAquanox
PRIMARY EFFLUENT
Steel, AWWA C200,
Welded or Ductile Iron,
ANSI A21, 51 (AWWA
C151).
Plug (in vault) DeZurik, Clow
SLUDGE / SCUM / FROTH
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151), Glass-lined
or Steel Sch. 40, ASTM
A120, Glass-lined, HDPE
(below ground only).
Plug DeZurik, Clow
CIRCULATED SLUDGE Plug DeZurik, Clow
RAW SLUDGE Plug DeZurik, Clow
THICKENED SLUDGE Plug DeZurik, Clow
MIXED LIQUOR Plug DeZurik, Clow
1029
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 26 Item Pipe Material Preferred Type
of Valve
Preferred
Manufacturers
RAS / WAS /
SUPERNATANT
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151), Glasslined, HDPE (below ground
only).
Plug DeZurik, Clow
THICKENER
PRESSURIZED RECYCLE Plug DeZurik, Clow
THICKENER SUBNATANT Plug DeZurik, Clow
DIGESTER SUPERNATANT Plug DeZurik, Clow
DIGESTED SLUDGE
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151), Glass-lined
or PVC, ASTM D2241,
HDPE (below ground
only).
Plug DeZurik, Clow
DRAIN Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151). Plug DeZurik, Clow
STORM DRAIN RCP, AWWA C302. Plug DeZurik, Clow
STRUCTURE
UNDERDRAIN
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151).
Plug DeZurik, Clow
SANITARY SEWER Extra Strength. PVC or
HDPE Plug DeZurik, Clow
STRUCTURE
UNDERDRAIN
COLLECTOR
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151).
PLANT INFLUENT
Glass-Lined Ductile Iron,
ANSI A21, 51 (AWWA
C151), HDPE (below
ground only).
Plug (in vault).
DeZurik, Clow
Waterman, Fontaine
GRIT SLURRY
Ductile Iron AWWA C151,
HDPE (below ground
only).
Plug DeZurik, Clow
Misc. Piping, all sizes
FUEL OIL RETURN
Steel, ASTM A120; Sch.
40, Black, Welded.
Ball Watts, Apollo
FUEL OIL SUPPLY Ball Watts, Apollo
LUBE OIL Ball Watts, Apollo
WASTE LUBE OIL Ball Watts, Apollo
HOT WATER RETURN
Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black, Welded. Ductile
Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151), HDPE
(below ground only).
Ball Watts, Apollo
HOT WATER SUPPLY
Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black, Welded. Ductile
Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151), HDPE
(below ground only).
Ball
Watts, Apollo
Maximum temperature is
200 degrees F
INSTRUMENT AIR Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 80. Ball Swagelok
DIGESTER GAS (Low
Pressure)
Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 10.
Butterfly, Eccentric
Plug DeZurik
VACUUM Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 80. Ball Swagelok
PLANT AIR Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 80 Ball Swagelok
FIRE PROTECTION
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black. By Code By Code
1030
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 27 Item Pipe Material Preferred Type
of Valve
Preferred
Manufacturers
ENGINE COOLING WATER
RETURN
Steel, Ductile Iron, ANSI
A21, 51 (AWWA C151).
SUMP PUMP DISCHARGE Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151). Plug DeZurik, Clow
ENGINE EXHAUST
Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black, Welded.
Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 40S.
N/A Caterpillar
Follow Caterpillar
recommendations.
LIQUIFIED AERATION Stainless Steel 316SS,
ASTM A312, Sch. 40S.
Butterfly, eccentric
butterfly DeZurik, Fisher
LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS Steel, ASTM A106 or A53,
Sch. 80, Seamless, Black. By code
RAIN WATER LEADER Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black, Welded.
DEFOAMING CHEMICAL
SOLUTION PVC, Sch. 80. Ball Asahi/America, Spears
PLANT DRAIN
PVC, Sch. 80 or Ductile
Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151).
Plug DeZurik
POTABLE WATER
Distraction / Transmission:
- PVC (AWWA
C900 or C905,
CPVC (ASTMF
441), Sch. 80
- Ductile Iron, ANSI
A21, 51 (AWWA
C151)
- Welded Steel
Plumbing:
- Sch. 80 PVC
LANDSCAPING
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PVC, Sch. 80 or
Copper, ASTM B88, Type
K.
DEMINERALIZED WATER PVC, Sch. 80 or FRP. Ball Asahi/America, Spears
PLANT OVERFLOW
Steel, AWWA C200,
Welded or RCP, AWWA
C302.
Gates Waterman, Clow
RAW WATER
Steel, AWWA C200,
Welded or RCP, AWWA
C302.
SANITARY DRAINS AND
VENTS
Steel, ASTM A120, Sch.
40, Black, Welded.
SAMPLE LINES (SEE LIST
AT RIGHT)
Ductile Iron, ANSI A21, 51
(AWWA C151) or PVC,
Sch. 80.
Ball Swagelok
CHEMICAL DRAIN AND
VENT
Polypropylene, ASTM
D2146, Sch. 40, Heat
Fused Joints or
Tempered Class Pipe.
Ball Asahi/America, Spears
1031
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 28 Item Pipe Material Preferred Type
of Valve
Preferred
Manufacturers
UTILITY WATER (NONPOTABLE WATER)
Copper, ASTM B88, Type
K or Ductile Iron, ANSI
A21, 51 (AWWA C151);
Distraction / Transmission:
- PVC (AWWA
C900 or C905,
CPVC (ASTMF
441), Sch. 80
- Ductile Iron, ANSI
A21, 51 (AWWA
C151)
- Welded Steel
Plumbing:
- Sch. 80 PVC
FROTH SPRAY
PVC, Stainless Steel
316SS, ASTM A312, Sch.
40S.
FOUL AIR FRP.
Chemical Storage and Feed Facilities
HYPOCHLORITE Sch. 80 CPVC.
Double contained in buried
and unburied locations
Ball Asahi/America, Spears
LIQUID ALUM Ball Asahi/America, Spears
POLYMER - ANIONIC Ball Asahi/America, Spears
POLYMER - CATIONIC Ball Asahi/America, Spears
POLYMER - NONIONIC
CAUSTIC SODA Steel, ASTM A106 or A53,
Sch. 40, Seamless, Black Ball Asahi/America, Spears
SULFUR DIOXIDE (GAS OR
LIQUID STATE)
Steel, ASTM A106 or A53,
Sch. 80, Seamless, Black.
SULFURIC ACID
Stainless Steel 316SS if
<10% concentration,
ASTM A312, Sch. 40S.
Pipe joints to be welded.
PVDF ball or
diaphragm valves,
or TFE lined steel
plugs for >10%
acid concentration.
LIME SLURRY Flexible Rubber Hose.
Channel Control/Isolation
HEADWORKS N/A Sluice Fontaine, Hydrogate,
Whipps
6.1.2 Pumps
Table 31 Pumps, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document provides guidelines for general pump
requirements, which shall be applicable to pump
installations.
1 Configuration
The pumps and pumping appurtenances shall be by a
single manufacturer responsible for furnishing and
functional operation of complete pump system.
1032
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 29 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
2 General
No cavitation shall be allowed in pumps operating
within the stable operating range for the specified
operating conditions. For the purposes of this
provision, cavitation shall be recognized and accepted
as being present in a pumping unit if cavitation noise
can be perceived either by the human ear or by
acoustic instruments or devices. The presence or
absence of cavitation noise shall be verified by the
City and/or its consultant during both the factory/field performance tests of the pumps and during operation
of the pumps up to the end of the warranty period. To
assist in revealing potential cavitation during the
factory/field performance tests, in addition to all other required tests, the Manufacturer shall force the pumps
to operate at the specified minimum net positive
suction head available for each of the following
conditions: minimum flow rate, design flow rate and
head, and maximum flow rate.
3 Testing
Engineer to ensure pumps and motors are tested at
factory. Minimum of 7 certified sets of test data shall be submitted.
Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with
ANSI/HI 14.6” Grade 1U
Verity the testing
range falls within
operational
performance range:
Flow +10%, Head
+6%
4 Design
Specify pump type and identify process.
Specify performance curve and pump data.
Specify electrical requirements and controls.
Assemble drawings showing location and process.
Specify pump drive and motor.
Shall require Contractor to produce bearing
calculations, indicate points on H/Q curves, pump
detailed description, installation drawings.
5 Mechanical Seal
Where indicated for the pump seal, they shall be of
the best quality, using the Manufacturer's suggested
materials best suited for the specific application. For drainage and liquids containing sediments, the seals
shall be fresh-water flushed, using lantern rings.
Mechanical Seals
If using mechanical
seals, use Couplers or
Split Seal if in a
location that is difficult
to access.
Mechanical Seals: rotating balanced O-ring type.
Water lubrication - cooling. Materials:
Metal parts except springs: 316 stainless steel.
Springs: Hastelloy C. Seal faces: Tungsten carbide,
except where required for chemical resistance or in
the presence of oxidants. In such cases, follow pump
manufacturer's recommendation.
Elastomers: Viton.
6 Flanges (suction
and discharge)
Cast Iron (ANSI/ASME B16.1), Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800. Or ANSI/ASME B16.5. Or ASTM A-36 steel
plate with a minimum wall thickness of ¼ inch.
7 Lubrication
Vertical pump shafts (clean water) - Product water
lubricated;
Deep-well/dry barrels - Water or oil lubricated
bearings, seals, and enclosed line shafts.
Vertical propeller, mixed-flow, and turbine pumps or
bowl sizes 10-inches and larger (other than deep well
pumps) - Stainless steel tube attached to the column
for grease lubrication of the bottom bearing
8 Vortex
Suppressors
Provide for vertical pumps with marginal
submergence.
In accordance with Hydraulic Institute requirements
1033
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 30 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
9 Pump Casing
Ductile Iron, Austenitic (ASTM A 439).
Cast iron, Stainless steel or Bronze.
Stainless Steel, Type 416 or 316, SAE63 Bronze.
Hot-dipped galvanized (not buried or submerged),
stainless steel (buried or submerged).
10 Pump Guards All rotating surfaces must be guarded.
Pump guards are to be provided by the manufacturer.
Table 32 Horizontal centrifugal pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to horizontal, variable-speed, non-clog or non-clog mixed flow centrifugal pumps.
1 Operation
1200* rpm, maximum, ventilated spaces. *Maximum shaft speed dependent on casing/
impeller diameter
Waste Activated Sludge or Return Activated Sludge,
up to 15,000 mg/l suspended sludge, 6.5-8.5 pH, 65-
85 degrees F.
2 Liquids Unscreened municipal wastewater solids.
Unscreened industrial wastewater solids.
3 Materials
Casing - Cast iron.
Suction and discharge flanges - provide by pressure
class.
Volute lining - Fusion bonded epoxy.
Impeller - Silicon bronze.
Shaft - Stainless steel type 316.
Bearings - minimum 100,000 hours, grease lubricated.
4 Drive Horizontal inverter-duty.
5 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 33 Submersible Sump Pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to submersible sump pumps. 1 Operation Intermittent and continuous, submerged.
2 Liquids
Process water.
Surface runoff.
Washdown.
3 Materials
Shaft: Stainless Steel 316.
Impeller: cast iron or SAE63 bronze.
Seal: mechanical, single or double, in an oil reservoir.
Hardware: exposed shall be stainless steel 316.
Connection: flange or screw with neoprene pressure
hose.
4 Drive Submersible electric.
5 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 34 Submersible wastewater pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to submersible wastewater pumps.
1 Operation Constant speed, on/off cycling, submerged partially submerged or dry condition up to 65' depth.
1034
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 31 2 Liquids
Process drainage from cleaning and maintenance
activities, up to 15,000 mg/l suspended sludge, 50-95
degrees F.
Unscreened wastewater solids, RAS, WAS.
Materials
Casing: Cast iron Class 30.
Pump lining - Fusion bonded epoxy.
Shaft: Stainless steel 316.
Impeller: Cast stainless steel.
Seal: tandem double mechanical, in an oil reservoir.
Hardware: exposed shall be stainless steel 316.
Bearings: bronze.
Maximum efficiency, minimum, percent: 65.
3 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 35 Sludge dewatering piston pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to dewatering sludge piston pumps.
1 Operation
Continuous duty, reciprocating, dual piston, single
discharge.
Sludge cake, 20-30% solid concentrations.
2 Liquids Digested dewatered municipal wastewater sludge.
Inorganic solids with moderate abrasive characters.
3 Type
Pistons: Steel or stainless steel face and core.
Piston head: Buna-N (Nitrile) rubber bonded to steel
core.
Rods: High strength steel, hard chrome plated; or
chrome steel.
4 Drive TBA
5 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 36 Positive displacement rotary lobe pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to positive displacement rotary lobe pumps.
1 Operation Permeate/Backwash.
2 Mounting On concrete pad in weather exposed location.
Baseplate shall be galvanized.
3 Materials
Casing: Stainless steel, Type 316.
Shaft: stainless steel 316.
Shaft Sleeve: Stainless steel, Type 316.
Pump: Minimum of two tri-lobe rotors driven through
positive timing gears, bearing assembly direct.
Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316.
Feed Pump: Inverter-duty, NEMA 4X control panel
with VFD, 480 Vac.
4 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 37 Progressive cavity pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to progressive cavity pumps for sludge feed service.
1 Operation
Digested moderately abrasive sludge, organic solids
and small inorganic particles, 6-9 pH, 60-105 degrees
F.
1035
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 32 2 Materials
Pump body: Cast iron.
Shaft: 416 chrome steel or AISI 4120 chromium nitride
coating.
Rotor and Stator: Two-stage convoluted rotor,
convoluted stator.
Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316.
Rotor Drive Configuration:
Gear joints: Alloy steel, grease lubricated crowned,
with ridge spline design.
Pivot joints: alloy steel, cartridge design cross journal connected by connecting rod.
Pin joints: High temperature grease lubricated,
positively sealed and lubricated.
Shaft seals and bearings:
bearings shall be 100,000 hour minimum, grease
lubricated.
3 Drive
Closed coupled block: direct coupled motor and gear
reducer or gear motor
Bearing assembly -V-belt: V-belt drive.
4 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 38 Vertical turbine pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to vertical turbine pumps. 1 Operation Recycled water, 6-8 pH, 50-75 degrees F.
2 Materials
Pump body: Epoxy-coated cast iron.
Shaft: 316 stainless steel.
Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316.
Rotor Drive Configuration:
Gear joints: Alloy steel, grease lubricated crowned,
with ridge spline design.
Pivot joints: alloy steel, cartridge design cross journal connected by connecting rod.
Pin joints: High temperature grease lubricated,
positively sealed and lubricated.
Shaft seals and bearings:
bearings shall be 100,000 hour minimum, grease
lubricated.
3 Drive Vertical, solid/hollow shaft, high efficiency & thrust, variable speed.
4 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 39 Axial & mixed flow pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to centrifugal axial and mixed flow pumps.
1 Operation
Suction speed shall be calculated IAW ANSO/HI 1.3.
Suction specific speed shall not exceed 12,500.
Return activated sludge, up to 15,000 mg/l suspended
sludge, 6.5-8.5 pH, 65-85 degrees F.
2 Liquids Unscreened municipal wastewater solids. Unscreened industrial wastewater solids. 3 Type Rigid sphere, 3" min passing through the pump from inlet to discharge.
4 Drive Electric motors only.
5 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
1036
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 33 Table 40 End-suction centrifugal pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to horizontal, end- suction centrifugal pumps.
1 Operation Utility water - potable, recycled.
Boiler, heat loops, brine solutions.
2 Materials
Casing - Cast iron.
Suction and discharge flanges - provide by pressure
class.
Volute lining - Fusion bonded epoxy.
Impeller - Silicon bronze.
Shaft - Stainless steel type 316.
Seals - mechanical.
Bearings - minimum 100,000 hours, grease lubricated.
3 Manufacturers See Pump Schedule.
Table 41 Pump schedule
Item Pump Type Preferred
Manufacturers Notes
Process Stream
Influent Pumping-Dry Pit Vertical, non-clog
centrifugal.
Flygt non-clog,
Vaughan
Influent Pumping-Wet Well Submersible. Flygt, Vaughan, ABSSulzer Primary Sludge
Progressive cavity. Seepex, Moyno
Centrifugal. WEMCO Hidrostal nonclog impeller, Vaughan Scum Submersible chopper
centrifugal.
Flygt non-clog,
Vaughan Recirculation,
ABS-Sultzer
WEMCO Hidrostal.
Secondary Scum Submersible chopper
centrifugal.
Flygt non-clog, Vaughan,
ABS-Sulzer
Centrifugal. Allis Chalmers, Vaughan
Vertical Turbine Solid
Handling. Fairbanks Morse
Low head propeller
(axial/mixed flow)
RAS/WAS Sump Submersible sump. ABS-Sulzer, Flygt
Waste Activated Sludge
(WAS)
Centrifugal screw pumps.
Centrifugal. Worthington / Fairbanks
Morse.
Thickened Waste
Activated Sludge (TWAS) Progressive Cavity. Allweiler, Seepex, Moyno.
Digester Feed Blended
Primary/TWAS Progressive Cavity.
Digester Mixing Chopper centrifugal. WEMCO Hidrostal,
Vaughan.
Digester Secondary Heat
Loop
ANSI Horizontal end
suction. Aurora.
Digester Sludge Heating
Recirculation
Chopper or screw
centrifugal.
WEMCO Hidrostal,
Vaughan.
1037
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 34 Item Pump Type Preferred
Manufacturers Notes
Digested Sludge Transfer Progressive cavity.
Allweiler (NEMO, Seepex
are both good
alternatives), Moyno.
Dewatering Feed Progressive cavity.
Rotary Lobe.
Allweiler.
Vogelsang.
Dewatered Sludge Dewater sludge piston. Schwing Bioset, Putzmiester.
Aeration Basin Submersible. ABS-Sulzer
Return Water Submersible. Flygt, Vaughan, ABSSulzer
Primary Heat Loop ANSI Horizontal end
suction.
Utility Water ANSI Horizontal end
suction.
Boiler Recirculation ANSI Horizontal end
suction.
Recycled Water Vertical Turbine.
6.1.3 Chemical Storage and Feed Facilities
Table 42 Chemical storage and feed facilities, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to Chemical Storage and Feed Facilities.
1 Design Approach
Select proper material for chemical compatibility.
Define specific safety requirements for chemical
handling.
2 Access Identify all requirements for maintenance and
operations.
Table 43 Chemical metering pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to Chemical Metering Pumps. 1 Containment
All pumps shall be contained to prevent chemical
spills.
Chemicals to be
located in the same
containment area shall
not pose potential
hazards.
Pump platforms shall be at least as high as
containment wall.
Use reinforced concrete base or applicable as
provided by manufacturer.
2 Suction Set tank height so metering pump suction line is full when only a few inches of liquid remain in tank.
3 Duty / Standby
For 1 to 4 duty pumps per injection point, include 1
standby pump.
Standby pump should utilize a common discharge
header.
4 Type
Peristaltic Pump Types (Ferric Chloride, Hypochlorite,
Bisulfite, Peroxide, Caustic, Polymer, Other Acids).
Equipped with compression rollers that are retractable
for tube loading. One roller shall be fully engaged with the tubing at all times to prevent backflow or
siphoning.
1038
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 35 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Use no check valves or diaphragms and shall require
no dynamic seals in contact with the pumpage.
Dry self-priming, capable of being run dry without
damaging effects to pump or tube, with a maximum
suction lift of 15 feet wc.
Chemical metering pumps shall have Ethernet
interface with control capability and support for CIP
communications with Control Logix.
Tubing
Provide a tubing element with molded fittings, which
shall be self-locating when fitted into the pump head.
Replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head.
Select material and size for the chemical being
metered.
Supply four tube elements of the specified size per
pump.
5 Manufacturers
Watson Marlow.
Flex-Pro by Blue-White Ind.
Or equal.
6 Accessories
Quick disconnect flush connection, Pressure Relief
Valve, Pressure Indicator/Pressure Switch High,
Calibration Column, Leak Detection.
SCADA
Indicators
SCADA Guidelines (see Appendices), Leak Detection.
Provide per OSHA requirements.
Table 44 Chemical storage facilities
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to Chemical Storage Facilities. 1 Days of Storage
7 days minimum. 15 days max preferred.
Consider degradation characteristics for chemicals
such as Hypochlorite in establishing solution strength
and storage requirements.
2 Accessories Ultrasonic or radar level sensor.
3 SCADA
Indicators SCADA Guidelines (see Appendices).
4 SCADA Alarms
High Level--90 percent.
Low Level--15 percent.
Low-Low Level--10 percent.
5 Awning
Provide awning for chemical storage and feed
facilities.
Consider future solar panels in awning design.
6 Access Allow proper truck or forklift entry and exit. 7 Loading Area Utilize common loading facilities with secondary containment.
8 Screening/Shade Consider screening and shade to maintain chemical integrity. This is significant for Hypochlorite solution.
9 Coating/Painting
Consider chemical compatibility with specified coating
and paint.
Consider staining property of the chemical when
specifying coating and paint
10 Ladder with
Gage
Tanks exceeding 10 feet in height shall be provided
with an exterior ladder equipped with a safety cage
meeting current OSHA requirements. The ladder shall
be Fabricated of fiberglass reinforced plastic shapes.
A clear width of at least 18 inches, with rungs at least ¾ inch diameter and spaced not more than 12 inch
1039
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 36 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
apart, and a clearance of at least 7 inches between
the back of the ladder and the tank wall.
11 Safety Handrails
and Kickplates
Safety Handrails and Kickplates meeting current
OSHA requirements shall be provided around the top
of each tank.
The handrail shall be attached to the ladder side rails and anchored to the tank head. A self-closing safety
gate shall be provided at the ladder access opening.
12 Safety Shower/
Eye Wash
Provide per OSHA requirements.
6.1.4 Primary Clarifier
Table 45 Primary clarifier, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Primary Clarifier This document applies to Primary Clarifiers. 1 Primary Sludge
Grinders
Inline sludge shredders and grinders
2 Primary Sludge
Pumps
Progressive Cavity
3 Primary Scum
Pumps
Recessed Impeller or Open Vane
4 Primary Center
Drive
Shaft Drive or Cage Drive
6.1.5 Secondary Treatment System
Table 46 Secondary treatment system, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Secondary
Treatment
This document applies to Secondary Treatment
Systems.
1 Fine Screens with
Washer-Compactor
2000 Micron Opening, Center-feed
2 Mixing Channel To Ensure Proper Blending of PE and RAS Prior to Splitting to Aeration Basins
3 Mixing Chimney One per Aeration Basin to Ensure Proper Blending of pre-blended PE & RAS with MLR
4 Mixing System
(Anoxic and Swing
Zones)
Large Bubble Mixing System Powered by
Compressors
5 Aeration Blowers Turbo or Hybrid Blower System with 50% Turndown 6 Butterfly Control
Valves and
Actuators
One per Aerated and Swing Zone with <0.25%
Actuator Resolution
7 Diffusers (Aerobic
zones)
Discs or Tubes; to Match Entire Range of Blower
Airflow
8 Mixed Liquor Pumps Centrifugal/Mixed Flow Pump
9 MLR Pumps (Inside
Each AB)
Axial/Mixed Flow Pump
10 Membrane
Cassettes(1)
Hollow Fiber/Flat Sheet
11 Permeate/Backpulse
Pumps(1)
Reversible Positive Displacement/Lobe Pump
1040
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 37 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
12 Scour Blowers(1) Turbo or Hybrid Blower
13 WAS Pumps Centrifugal Pump
(1) Provided as part of MBR vendor scope of supply.
6.1.6 Chlorine Contact Tank
Table 47 Chlorine contact tank, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Chlorine Contact
Tank (CCT)
This document applies to Chlorine Contact Tanks.
1 Chlorine Dissolution
System
Connect to Existing System
2 Chlorine Solution
Pumps
Dosing
3 CCT Effluent Pumps Centrifugal
6.1.7 Solids Handling
Table 48 Solids handling, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Solids Handling This document applies to Solids Handling Facilities. 1 Rotary Drum/Screw
Thickeners
Compact and entirely enclosed. Thickened sludge
4-8%
2 Digester Recycle
Pumps
Progressive Cavity
3 Heat Exchangers Spiral
6.1.8 Reverse-Osmosis Facilities
Table 49 Reverse-osmosis facilities, general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Reverse Osmosis
(RO) Facilities
This document applies to Reverse Osmosis
Facilities.
1 RO Units >93% Recovery
6.2 Civil
6.2.1 Civil Narrative
The site is located at 2242 Charles Street in an unimproved portion of the parcel. The area of improvement is relatively flat and will require grading and drainage improvements to accommodate the new structures. According to the Riverside County flood map effective 08/28/2008, the site is characterized as an area of minimal flood hazard and does not lie within a floodplain characterized by a 100-year flood. Although flooding is not anticipated, proper grading and drainage of the site are required to minimize foundation settlement and overall building performance.
The proposed structures will be surrounded by hardscape and/or native landscape and shall be designed per the California Building Code. Therefore, site improvements shall be sloped away at a minimum of 2% for impervious areas or a minimum of 5% for pervious areas away from building foundations for a minimum of 10 feet in both scenarios. In addition to the grading considerations, these improvements are expected to exceed the 5,000 square feet impervious improvements threshold and will initiate a Water Quality Management Plan. On-site permanent Best 1041
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 38 Management Practices (BMPs) are required to capture and treat the anticipated runoff calculated using the rational method. Geotechnical investigations will identify if infiltration is feasible.
All utility services required for the proposed improvements are expected to be provided through underground services. It is anticipated that existing potable water, wastewater, power, and gas services will be extended to the proposed structures, and additional permitting or approvals will not be required.
6.2.2 General Civil Requirements
The following table contains the Engineering Design Guidelines for civil criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
Table 50 General civil requirements
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document applies to Civil Design at the
treatment plants and collection/distribution
systems.
1 Site Layout Allow for future logical expansion, safety, maintenance, and process flow.
2 Preliminary Site Plan
Survey to be referenced to the Plant
Coordinate System and to other separate
surveys for pipelines, plant sites, and related
facilities.
Use survey for grading and drainage designs.
Perform geotechnical investigations to
determine soil design parameters and
existing conditions, corrosivity, boulders,
cobbles, etc.
Provide corrosion control design testing and
recommendations in a report.
Provide landscape buffer space along public
roads for noise abatement and screening of
facilities from public view.
Incorporate site specific requirements for
special conditions.
Accommodate visitor, personnel, and truck
traffic.
Provide access to the perimeter of all
facilities.
Provide ample space for those facilities
requiring secondary containment.
Include all transformers, substations and
water supply facilities.
Provide space for emergency generators
where required.
Identify work area, storage area and
allowable site access.
3 Facility Arrangement
Maintain separation of operations and
administration buildings from process areas.
Arrange process components to minimize
unusual equipment arrangements.
Provide adequate space for piping required
between process units for future expansion.
Provide space for cranes and maintenance
vehicles without impairing normal operation.
Valves should be in such a way as to
maximize ease of operation
1042
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 39 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Keep the number of confined spaces to a
minimum.
4 Access Roads
Use minimum width of 24 feet for Two-way
traffic.
Include Striping.
Provide ample space and route for chemical
deliveries.
Design buildings to be accessible to Fire
Department apparatus by roads with a
minimum unobstructed width of 20 feet, and
vertical clearance of 15 feet. Extend roads to
within 150 feet of all building walls and
entrances.
Discuss road design criteria and layout with
local Fire Department.
Provide directional and traffic signs and
markings for all one-way roads and direct
traffic to key buildings.
All building accesses to comply with ADA
requirements.
5 Parking Area Design
Parking for employees and visitors to be
located near operations and administration
buildings.
Early during design, confirm the need for
truck parking and types of trucks.
6 Horizontal and Vertical
Control
Establish basis before surveying.
7 Coordinates
Locate structures with a minimum of two
coordinates on the outside face of the wall or
on column lines. Show on structural
foundation plan.
Locate circular structures by a coordinate for
the center point and by the radius.
Locate centerline of roads with coordinates
on points of intersection and with adequate
curve information.
Provide profiles for roads where control of
grade is critical and/or vertical curves are
required. Show stations, existing grade,
vertical curves, horizontal curves and final
grade.
Provide coordinates and/or dimensions for
grading control points, top or bottom of slope
to provide sufficient staking to control
contractor's tolerances for grading.
Provide coordinates or distances from
existing structures for appurtenances to fix
their location. Locate coordinates on
appurtenance's centerline.
Provide coordinates or distances from
existing structures for yard fixtures.
8 Grading
Comply with latest edition of the California
Building Code, Appendix J. Any conflict with
geotechnical report shall be signed and
provided in a written report.
Entire site to allow future construction to
meet minimum design slopes. Flowlines in
landscape areas = 1%; Paved areas = 1%;
Concrete gutters = 0.5%.
1043
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 40 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Minimize use of cross gutters or ribbon
gutters.
Maximum road grades for heavy truck traffic
on a routine basis = 7%; short reaches of
10% to 12% allowed under special
circumstances.
Where grass is mowed, maximum slope =
5:1 horizontal to vertical.
Provide access ramps per ADA
requirements.
Finished grade around structures, slabs and
buildings shall be at least 6-inches below
floor or slab elevation.
Comply with all state and federal safety
codes.
Show contours with control points
established to provide for intersecting planes
on the Plans.
9 Drainage Systems
Drainage piping shall be at least 6-inch
nominal size.
Incorporate drainage design during initial
design phases.
Direct sheet flow and flowlines away from
walkways, buildings, cut and fill slopes, and
yard activities. Provide culverts where
collected drainage must cross walkways.
Design inlet structures where it will not hinder
facility operation.
Provide a design to eliminate soil or debris
from entering storm drain system for large
areas.
Storm drains and catch basin laterals are a
minimum of 18-inch diameter. Inlet openings
are a minimum 2 feet in length.
Daylight storm drains to ditches or connect to
an off-site drain system. Avoid on-site
detention basins where soils are poor. Do
not retain storm water more than a few days.
Design to be maintenance free, if possible.
Calculate drainage runoff using a minimum of
a 100-year storm. For storm calculations,
use 24-hour duration. For conveyance, use
6-hour intensity. Where intense rainfall could
result in runoff leaving property, use 2-hour
intensity.
Use rainfall intensity/frequency graphs from
the County of Riverside.
10 Yard Piping
Design sanitary sewer, interceptors, mains,
and interplant mains of a material that is
resistant to hydrogen sulfide corrosion.
Apply PVC liner or appropriate coating plate
linings to structures.
Use CPVC, if exposed to
sunlight.
Design steel pipe in accordance with
American Water Works Association Manual
M11.
Design ductile iron pipe in accordance with
Chapter 7, Sewers, Siphons and Force
Mains.
1044
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 41 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
For pressure distribution pipes, use
restrained joints. For non-restrained joints,
use harness assemblies across joints. Must
withstand the maximum pressure anticipated
for the system.
Design to have access for maintenance and
inspection and have manholes to grade.
Provide flanged or restrained/screwed end
plug cleanouts for all building drains and
sewers and all force mains.
Try not to bury valves. Locate all valves in
tunnels or buildings or construct vaults
around necessary yard valves.
Gravity pipelines to be a minimum 6-inch in
diameter and have manhole to grade. Locate
manholes at all changes in direction.
Maximum distance = 300 feet between
manholes.
Design smaller pressure lines with pressure
cleanouts at grade.
Provide air and vacuum relief valves at high
points on pressure pipes. Provide drains or
blowoffs at low points.
Lay piping in corridors and provide space for
future piping as well as access for pipe
repairs.
Provide pipe capacity calculations in
conjunction with the plant hydraulic profile.
Design all pipe for positive embankment
conditions. 95% max dry density compaction
of pipe zone bedding and backfill.
Combine the drain system for return to the
treatment system.
Minimize abandoned unused piping,
removing as much existing piping as
possible. If left in place, fill abandoned pipe
with grout plug and seal ends.
11 Piping at Structures
Encase piping in concrete whenever under a
structure and to a distance structure
determined by a 45° angle from the outside
of the footing to the pipe.
Outside structure or encasement, provide
flexible joints on pipes. Where pressure lines
are involved, include flexible joints with a
mechanical restraint. Where gravity lines are
involved, flexible joints may be normal pushon joints. Use the first flexible joint 2 feet from the structure. Use two (2) two-foot long
joints at a junction with a structure.
12 Water Piping
Design as a loop. Provide three (3) isolation
valves at all tee fittings (one on each tee
outlet).
1045
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 42 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Minimum horizontal separation requirements
for the parallel construction of potable water
pipelines:
• 10-feet: Sewer, Secondary Treated
Recycled Water and hazardous fluids
• 4-feet: Disinfected Tertiary Recycled Water
and Storm Drainage.
Maintain 1-foot vertical
separation also.
Crossings shall be constructed no less than
45-degrees and no joints are allowed within
8-feet horizontal distance.
Whenever a pipeline crossing must occur
where required clearances cannot be met,
special construction that minimizes the
potential for contamination will be required as
specified by CDPH.
Provide an air-gap for potable water supply to
the site. Where potable water is used for
landscape irrigation or process usage,
provide a reduced pressure principle
backflow assembly system, complete with
test cock and isolation valves.
Develop galvanic protection plan for pipelines
placed directly in soil. Plan shall explain
system used, detailing type, required
maintenance, and construction requirements.
Contractor shall CCTV RW lines following
completion of construction
13 Fire Protection
Comply with National Fire Protection
Association and local fire codes.
Provided by a potable water supply.
Form a piping loop around the plant
perimeter.
Submit fire hydrant spacing for review by
local fire departments.
Place fire hydrants near cross streets and
roads with fire truck access and where they
are readily visible.
Provide break-off check valves for fire
hydrants that are vulnerable to vehicular
damage.
14 Security
Security fencing to be 8-foot-high chain link
fence, with 3 strands of barbed wire slanting
outward around property line.
Construct posts per APWA-AGC Standard
Plan 600-0. Design fabric and posts to PVCcoated galvanized fabric and Class 1A steel per standard specification for public works
construction 206-6 and Districts Master
Specification.
Identify all security requirements for the
proposed project including fencing, access,
lighting, CCTV, and alarms.
Utilize the non-jump type to prevent
vandalism.
15 Paving
Use latest Green Book requirements.
Comply with California Department of
Transportation Highway Design Manual
Chapter 600.
1046
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 43 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Determine R value for subgrade soils under
pavement using a State of California
Registered Geo-technical Engineer.
Design access roads with a maximum traffic
index of 7.0. For parking areas use AR-8000
asphalt.
Concrete pavement may be used in lieu of
asphalt pavement. Use concrete paving
where truck parking is anticipated and where
asphalt paving is incompatible with the
materials handling requirements for the area.
Construct pedestrian walkways between
structures and buildings of concrete with a
minimum width of 4 feet and minimum
thickness of 4 inches.
16 Spill Prevention, Control
and Countermeasure Plan
Identify all manholes on main lines and
drains on laterals that may overflow.
Identify all storm drains that may be
vulnerable to an overflow.
Identify all potential emergency diversions
that may be made to prevent an overflow.
Identify storm drains that may be suitable for
containment of an overflow, where the storm
drain may be plugged in time to prevent
discharge to surface waters.
Specify which storm drains should be
covered with mat and sandbags and which
should be used for containment if necessary.
Specify all equipment at hand during all
bypass operations.
Specify when emergency bypass equipment
shall be ready.
Specify training of contractor staff in District
procedures and IEUA specified procedures.
Include in Contract Documents the spill
response plan and required configurations.
Indicate on drawings the installed locations of
storm sewer mats, sandbags and pipe plugs
for containment.
17 Manhole Covers in
Streets
Use Traffic Rated (H-20) manhole covers.
Hatches/Manholes covers
Always try to use a circular section. If
rectangular is the only configuration, use
double hatch (Belco)
Guard Posts Always add around equipment if there is any chance of traffic exposure.
6.3 Structural
6.3.1 Structural Narrative
The structural scope for the expansion of the City’s WWTP involves the addition of new components and the expansion/alteration of existing components within the existing WWTP. The identified new components include:
Pre-Engineered Metal Building (PEMB) may house various equipment, such as MBRs, RO systems, pumps, blower, tanks, office building, and their corresponding concrete pads/pedestals and building foundations. 1047
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 44 Cast in-place concrete for all required equipment.
Concrete pads for all required equipment.
Additionally, alterations to existing components are proposed, including:
Conversion of the existing secondary digester into a primary digester.
6.3.2 Design Loads
Load combinations for analysis and design will be in accordance with ASCE 7-16, Chapter 2, as referenced in CBC 2022.
The loads for analysis and design will be in accordance with CBC 2022, Chapter 35.
As outlined in the CBC 2022, the environmental loads will be determined per ASCE 7. The wind loads will be calculated per Chapter 27 using the Directional Procedure, and the Seismic loads per Chapter 12 using the Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure.
The design loads for the Project are as follows:
Risk Category: IV
Wind Design Data
o Basic Wind Speed, V: 96 mph
o Exposure Category: C
Earthquake Design Data
o Site Soil Class: D-Default
o Seismic Design Category: E
o SDS: 1.57 g & SD1: 0.932 g
o SS: 1.962 g & S1: 0.822 g
o Seismic Importance factor, Ie: 1.5
6.3.3 General Structural Requirements
The following table contains the Engineering Design Guidelines for structural criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
Table 51 General structural requirements
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to Structural Design.
1 General Code
Requirements
Comply with the latest editions of the CBC, ACI,
AISC, ASCE, AWS, AWWA, AASHTO and CMAA.
Detailed code requirements shall be per the latest
edition of the following codes:
General Design: per CBC Chapter 16 and
ASCE 7
Concrete: per CBC Chapter 19, ACI 318,
ACI 350, and ACI 350.3
Masonry: per CBC Chapter 21, and ACI
530/ASCE 5/TMS 402
Steel: per CBC Chapter 22 and AISC 360,
AISC 341, AISC 358
1048
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 45 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Wood: per CBC Chapter 23 and NDS2015
2 Geotechnical
Investigations
Required prior to structural design.
Establish location of water table and identify types
of soil layers.
For structures located below grade and
foundations supported by piles, soil-structure
interaction analysis under seismic loading may
need to be performed, unless it can be
demonstrated by other methods that the structure
is not subject to damage that renders the essential
facilities inoperable after an earthquake.
Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR) may be
warranted for some critical structures.
3 Dead Loads
An allowance for routed mechanical, piping,
heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC)
and electrical equipment of 20 pounds per square
foot will be included.
4 Live Loads
Design floor area for the loads from specific
equipment used or the 125 psf uniform load and
2,000 concentrated load minimums whichever is
greater.
Design process equipment and pump rooms for
minimum live load of 200 psf or maximum fork lift
wheel loads, whichever is higher.
Electrical and control rooms shall be designed
minimum live load of 300 psf.
Do not use CBC live load reduction.
Use AASHTO HS 20-44 loading where access is
provided for trucks.
5 Wind Loads
Basic Wind Speed (3 second Gust) = 110 mph
(with consideration for special wind regions).
Exposure Category = "D"
Risk Category shall be per CBC Table 1604.5.
6 Seismic Loads
All structures shall be designed according to the
ASCE and CBC.
Analysis and modeling criteria for seismic design of
buildings shall be in accordance with ASCE 7-10
Section 12.6.
7 Lateral Earth and
Liquid Loads
Consider all operating conditions within design
criteria.
8 Earth Pressure
Loads - Below Grade
Structures
Design for active soil pressure for all yielding walls.
Design for at-rest soil pressure for all non-yielding
walls.
Surcharge soil pressure including AASHTO vehicle
wheel loads if applicable (minimum surcharge
equal to an additional 2 feet of soil).
Design for passive soil pressure.
Design for soil dynamic loads due to earthquake.
9 Crane & Monorail
Loads
Select design loads based on the heaviest item to
be removed, with a safety factor. Use safety factor
of at least one third, and higher if weights are not
all available.
Design of crane girder, monorail beam and beam
hangers and supports in accordance with CMAA.
1049
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 46 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Allow for future addition of cranes in areas of
heavy equipment in structural design.
Impact and lateral loads shall be in accordance
with CBC. Vertical deflection shall not exceed
L/800 and horizontal deflection shall not exceed
L/400.
10 Crane Girders
Use adjustable bolted connections for fastening
crane rail to girder. Welded connections are not
permitted.
Continuous crane girders are not permitted.
Simply supported crane girders shall have end
connections capable of rotation under vertical
loads.
11 Thermal Loads
Consider in the design. Such forces will include,
but not limited to those caused by piping
expansion or contraction.
12 Erection Loads Consider in the design.
13 Load Combinations,
Drift and Deflection
Limitations
In accordance with ASCE and CBC.
14 Uplift Loads
Design structures for a minimum factor of safety
against uplift and sliding of 1.25 when the structure
is empty and there are maximum ground water
levels.
Uplift forces with empty structure and maximum
ground water levels shall be one of the load cases
evaluated for designing the structure's base slab.
15 Seismic Upgrade to
Existing Structure
Eliminate missing links in lateral force resisting
systems, correct gross deficiencies in seismic
systems and strengthen non-ductile "weak links" in
such systems.
Consistently upgrade entire structure for code
prescribed requirements.
Weigh the exact performance required and the
cost of various levels of retrofit for specific
structures on a case-by-case basis.
When criteria for strengthening existing essential
and other structures and elements for which such
relaxation is proposed is to be presented together
with a description of the justification.
16 Materials - Steel and
Miscellaneous
Structural Steel: ASTM A36.
Structural Shapes (W Shapes): ASTM A992.
Structural Steel Pipe: A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
Carbon Steel Bolts (for minor structural
connections not exposed to corrosive
environment): ASTM A307.
Connection Bolts (subject to vibration, cyclic, or
fatigue loading): ASTM A325 SC, galvanized per
ASTM B695.
Connection Bolts (not subject to vibration, cyclic, or
fatigue loading): ASTM A325 N, galvanized per
ASTM B695.
Anchor Bolts, studs, inserts, and fasteners
(exposed to water, groundwater, sewage, sewer
gas, or areas above sewage) sleeved and
unsleeved: Type 316 stainless steel.
1050
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 47 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Anchor Bolts, studs, inserts, and fasteners (not
exposed to water, groundwater, sewage, sewer
gas, or areas above sewage) sleeved and
unsleeved: ASTM F1554, galvanized per ASTM
B695.
Concrete anchors and adhesive capsule anchors:
Type 316 stainless steel.
Anchor bolts and concrete anchors (in contact with
aluminum): Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
Welding Electrodes: E70XX Low hydrogen type or
as approved.
Perform all welding to approved and certified AWS
procedures.
17 Materials - Concrete
Cement: ASTM C150 Type II or Type V.
Reinforcement: ASTM A615 Grade 60.
Cast in place concrete: 4000-psi minimum, 28 day
compressive strength.
Lean concrete for mud mats: 2500-psi minimum,
28 day compressive strength.
Concrete for duct banks: 2500-psi minimum, 28
day compressive strength.
Design the expansion, contraction, and
construction joints to adequately tolerate
differential movements due to settlement,
temperature, and shrinkage effects.
Provide all types of joints in structures with
waterstop and UV resistant system where water
tightness is required.
18 Materials - Aluminum
All aluminum: 6061-T6 and ASTM B221 and ASTM
B308.
Bolts and components (connecting aluminum):
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
Aluminum guardrails and handrails (rails, posts,
and fitting-assembly spacers): 6063 or T6 extruded
aluminum pipe of 1-1/2-inch outer diameter and
0.145 inch wall thickness.
Aluminum guardrails and handrails (other parts not
listed above): 6063 extruded aluminum or 214-F
aluminum casting.
Aluminum ladders: 6063-T6 or 6061-T6.
Design the finished diameter of holes for
unfinished bolts to be not more than 1/16 inch
larger than the nominal bolt diameter.
Perform all welding to approved and certified AWS
procedures.
19 Materials - Masonry
Concrete block; concrete masonry unit: Standard
medium weight, (unless specified to use
lightweight: maximum 105 pcf), ASTM C90, Grade
NI.
Brick: ASTM C62, Grade MW.
Mortar minimum compressive strength: 1,800 psi
ASTM C270 Type S.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type II.
Grout minimum compressive strength: 2,000 psi
ASTM C476
Reinforcement Yield Strength: 60,000 psi ASTM
A615.
1051
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 48 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
CMU is not acceptable for below grade facilities
and structures.
20 Facilities Essential facilities are those which are required to maintain the flow of wastewater through the plants.
21 Water Holding
Structures
Do not back fill until the basin passes a leak test.
During leak testing, the liquid level in the tank shall be at maximum operating levels.
Protection of
Concrete in
Corrosive Areas
Use imbedded HDPE liner for protection of new
cast in place concrete in corrosive areas such as
preliminary treatment, headworks, primary
clarifiers, digesters, etc. The HDPE liner shall be
by AGRU Sure-Grip as manufactured by Agru
America, or equal.
Concrete Structure
Finish
Concrete structure finish requirements shall
include “sack and patch” on of all exposed and
submerged structures.
22 Crack Control
In accordance with ACI 350, shall apply to all water
holding structures.
Buildings with high humidity.
All structures exposed to repeated wash down or
chemical or process spills.
All structures below groundwater.
All structures built in or placed in the water.
Structures below grade and above groundwater
where dry interior is critical, including: basements
pump stations, electrical vaults and valve houses.
Z factor shall be less than 95 kps per inch for
service load cases for all structures exposed to raw
wastewater, primary or secondary flows and
sludge. In all other cases Z shall not exceed 115
kips per inch.
23 Concrete Repair and
Replacement
Inspection/assessment procedures and repair
and/or replacement recommendations shall be in
accordance with American Concrete Institute
Standards.
24 Foundations
Where conflict exists between Geotechnical
reports and information, the most stringent
requirement shall govern.
Explore alternatives to traditional pile driving for
foundation designs.
Evaluate designs based on the nature of the soils
and geological substrate and the proximity to
sensitive noise receptors including human activities
and sensitive wildlife species.
Alternatives include avoiding the need for piles,
use of cast-in-place piling constructed in bored
holes and low noise type pile drivers and
extractors.
If pile driving is recommended, an acoustic
engineer shall evaluate mitigation measures.
25 Vibrating Equipment
The ratio of the natural frequency of the structure
to the exciting frequency of the equipment shall be
greater than 1.5.
26 Equipment
Anchorage
Anchor all equipment, tanks, piping, etc. in
accordance with CBC requirements to resist wind
or seismic loads.
Anchorage of equipment, piping etc. that is
submerged in water or wastewater shall be
1052
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 49 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
designed for seismic induced water sloshed loads
in addition to the other loadings.
27 Floor Drainage
Ensure the drainage plan does not prevent proper
pipe or conduit routing and does not result in
impractical footing requirements.
Where practical, the floors of electrical rooms shall
be sloped 1/4-inch per foot or more to flush door
sills.
Other rooms that have smoothly coated floors and
are not subject to washdown shall be sloped at
least 1/4-inch per foot to floor drains.
Except for floors in office spaces, all other room
floors shall be sloped at 3/8-inch per foot or more
to floor drains.
The provision of a side slope to a drainage trench
along the side of a room can allow more
aggressive slopes and is sometimes preferred.
Drainage trenches may be sloped with at least 1/4-
inch per foot slope. Trenches should be 12 inches
wide.
28 Potential Loads from
Solar Panels and
other power
generation
equipment
Include loads from potential future solar panels for
relevant structures as well as loads from any other
power generation equipment.
6.4 Architectural
The following table contains the Engineering Design Guidelines for architectural criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
Table 52 General architectural requirements
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to Architectural Design.
1 Building Insulation
Comply with fire-resistance and flammability
ratings.
Comply with code interpretations by governing
authorities.
2 Sound Attenuation
Mineral Fiber Blanket
Insulation
Provide insulations formed from inorganic
mineral fibers complying
with ASTM C 665 and ASTM C 764.
3 Sound Attenuation
Fire Blanket
Insulation
Provide insulation containing non-asbestos, noncombustible compounds of spun mineral fiber felt formed into flexible and resilient blankets:
1) Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C 518: 0.27
Btu/in./hr/sf/degrees F.
2) Density, Manufacturer's Certified Test: 2.5 pcf.
3) Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: 25 maximum.
4) Smoke Developed, ASTM E 84: 50 maximum.
5) Fuel Contributed, ASTM E 84: 50 maximum.
Thickness: 3-inches.
Width: 16-inches.
Thermafiber SAFB by USG Interiors, or equal.
1053
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 50 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
4 Fire Safing Insulation
Semi-rigid non-asbestos compounds of spun
mineral fiber felt, meeting FS HH-I-521F, Type I,
Class A and FS HH-I-558B, Form A, Classes 1
and 2. Nominal density of 4 pounds per cubic
foot and a thermal conductivity (k) of 0.24:
a. Flame Spread Rating, ASTM E 84: 15
maximum.
b. Fuel Contributed, ASTM E 84: 1 maximum.
c. Smoke Development, ASTM E 84: 0
maximum.
d. Fire Resistance Rating, ASTM E 119: 3 hours
minimum.
Thermafiber Fire-Safing Insulation by USG
Interiors, or equal.
5 Rigid Interior Wall
Insulation
Provide insulations formed from extruded
polystyrene foam, tight closed cell structure with
no voids between the cells, high compressive
strength, resistance to water penetration, and
formed into rigid sheet complying with ASTM D
2842, ASTM C 518, ASTM C 177, and ASTM C
578, Type X:
1) Thermal Resistance Aged R-Valve per inch at
75 degrees F mean temp, ASTM C 518: 5.0.
2) Compressive Strength (lb/in) min., ASTM D
1621: 15.
3) Flexural Strength (lb/in) min., ASTM C 203:
40. 4) Water Absorption (% by volume) max., ASTM
C 272: 0.1.
5) Water Vapor Permeance (perm), ASTM E 96:
1.1. 6) Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: 5.
7) Smoke Developed, ASTM E 84: 165.
Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
Width: 23-7/8 inches.
Styrofoam Z-mate Interior Rigid Wall Insulation
by Dow Chemical, or equal.
6 Roof Insulation
Rigid foam insulation, ANSI/ASTM C-1289 Type
II, polyiscocyanurate board with fiberous glass
facer:
a. Compressive Strength: 20 psi, nominal
b. Board Density: 2.0 lbs. Per cubic foot, nominal
c. Thickness and R-value: 2-inch, R 12.0
d. Provide minimum slope to drain of 1/4-inch per
foot.
e. Provide Pre-cut factory-formed corners,
crickets, tapered edge strips, hipsand valleys.
ISO Insulation System by: GAF EverGuard
Roofing Systems, or equal.
7 Adhesive For
Bonding Insulation
The type recommended by the insulation
manufacturer and complying with fire-resistance
requirements.
8 Mechanical Anchors
Type and size shown or, if not shown, as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer for
the type of application shown and condition of
substrate.
1054
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 51 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
9 Impaling Clips
Provide galvanized steel impaling clips
complying with requirements of governing code
authorities and as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer for full system
responsibility.
10 Adhesive Tapes Complete selection of insulation manufacturer's recommended taping materials.
11 Fire-Stop Sealants
And Other Fire-Stop
System Components
Complete selection of fire stop manufacturer's
recommended vinyl-type non-asbestos fire stop
systems. Provide complete systems complying
with UL 1479 and ASTM E814 with a two- or
three-hour fire rating. Provide equal fire
protection as provided by fire-rating of
construction penetrated. Fire stop systems shall
also be gas and watertight.
Fire Stop Systems by Dow Corning Corporation,
or equal.
12 Single-Ply Roofing
Comply with the Factory Mutual Publication 1-29
Technical Advisory Bulletin for wind resistance.
Provide uniform ballast weight distribution over
entire roof surface. Comply with FM wind uplift
criteria at corners and perimeters. Provide
combined ballast and single ply roofing
manufacturer’s recommended screw and plate
fasteners located in accordance with FM 1-29
TAB 1. Comply with applicable insurance rating
bureau requirements as required by the
California Building Code, latest edition and
International Building Code, latest edition, unless
more restrictive requirements are specified or
required.
a. Out-of-Plane: 1/8-inch maximum in 10 foot-0
inches and 1/16-inch maximum in any 12-inches
measured along the plane.
b. Maximum Offset in Plane Alignment: 1/16-
inch.
c. Variation From Slope: 1/8-inch maximum in 10
foot - 0 inches. A smooth type, polyester scrim
reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin based
membrane for use as a single ply roofing
membrane and flashing material
Membrane by GAF Materials Corporation, Or
equal.
13 Single-Ply Roofing
Ballast
Smooth, rounded, river washed stone from 3/4-
inch to 1-1/2-inch in diameter applied at a rate of
1,000 pounds per square, spread evenly over the
surface without adhesive.
Provide granite or other stone capable of
withstanding exposure without deterioration.
14 Polyvinyl Chloride
(PVC) Roofing
Comply with Factory Mutual Publication Class 1-
90 (Wind Uplift Attachment Criteria). Class A fire
rated assembly in accordance with UL-790 or
ASTM E 108. Roof system shall comply with all
applicable building codes and California Building
Code Title 24, Section 118.
1. PVC roofing: Fabric reinforced PVC sheet,
ASTM D4434 for Type II PVC membranes.
Fiberglass reinforcing material, 80 mils minimum
polymer thickness, 40 mils thickness above
1055
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 52 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
scrim, 110 lbf/in minimum breaking strength,
white color
2. Membrane Manufacturer’s membrane shall be
of consistent base formulation for a minimum of
50 years. Manufacturer and membrane shall be
listed in Cool Roof Rating Council product listing
and roofing membranes shall be tested by
CRRC-1.
3. Warranty: Manufacturer’s 30-year system
warranty (20 year material and labor with 10 year
extension on material), Contractor’s two (2) year
warranty. Early Bird warranties are not
acceptable.
4. Components including roofing insulation,
fasteners, and walkways for roofing system from
same manufacturer as membrane roofing.
5. Sika Sarnafil (Membrane: Sarnafil S327
EnergySmart 60-mil), Carlisle Syntec
(Membrane: 60-Mil Sure-Flex PVC KEE), Johns
Manville (60-Mil PVC KEE by Cooley Group), or
equal.
6. Pre-Installation meeting between IEUA,
Design Engineer, Applicator/Contractor, Roofing
Manufacturer’s Representative, and related
Subcontractors shall be held at least two(2)
weeks prior to installation.
15 PVC Roofing
Auxiliary Materials
1. Sheet Flashing: standard reinforced PVC
sheet flashing of same thickness and color as
PVC sheet.
2. Flashing Membrane Adhesive: solvent-based
reactivating-type adhesive used to attach PVC
flashing membrane to vertical (flashing)
substrate.
3. Membrane Attachment Bar: one(1) inch wide,
pre-punched aluminum bar used to attach PVC
field membrane at all perimeter and base-angle
transitions.
4. Membrane bonding adhesive: Manufacturer’s
standard, water based, Low VOC bonding
adhesive
5. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer’s
standard predrilled stainless steel or aluminum,
with anchors
6. Fasteners: factory-coated steel fasteners and
metal plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Global 4470 and acceptable to
roof manufacturer.
7. Cover Board: by Georgia-Pacific DensDeck,
or approved equal. ASTM C 1177, glass-mat
faced, water resistant gypsum. Smoke developed
and flame spread (ASTM E-84): 0, Mold
resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, Compressive
strength (ASTM C 473): 900psi, Board size:
½”x4’x8’.
8. Cover Board Adhesive: urethane based, lowrise foam adhesive shall be used to attach cover board to top layer of insulation.
9. Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board
insulation, ASTM C 1289-11, Type II, Class 2,
1056
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 53 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Grade 2 (20 psi). Zero Ozone Depletion Potential
from blowing agent (HCFC-free), Long-Term
Thermal Resistance R-Value based on ASTM
1303-11 and/or C AN/ULC S770-09.Facer type:
coated glass face, board size: 2.6”x4’X8’ (R15.0), Total Thermal Resistance Value: R-30.0 min.
10: Tapered Insulation: provide factory tapered
insulation boards
11: Insulation and Cover Board Fasteners:
corrosion-resistant, minimum #15 fastener with
attachment plate to attach insulation to structural
metal deck.
12: Flexible Walkways: factory-formed, nonporous, heavy0-duty, slip-resisting, surfacetextured walkways pads or rolls 16 Membrane Protection
Concrete Pavers
Interlocking Ballast Pavers by Westile, an
Oldcastle Company, Or equal.
17 Vapor Barrier Rufco 4000B by Raven Industries, Incorporated, Or equal.
18 TPO Preformed Vent
Boots
0.075" thick molded TPO membrane, heat
welded directly to roofing membrane, supplied
with stainless steel clamping rings, (1" to 6"
diameter pipes)diameter pipes).
GAF EverGuard TPO Preformed Vent Boots by
GAF Materials Corporation.
19 TPO Preformed
Corners
Universal style accommodates both inside and
outside corners of base and curb flashing, 0.065"
thick molded TPO membrane, heat welded
directly to roofing membrane, 4" X 4" with 4"
flange.
GAF EverGuard TPO Preformed Corners by
GAF Materials Corporation.
20 TPO Drain Inserts
Rigid molded TPO membrane flashing complete
with clamping ring and strainer basket,
membrane heat welds directly to drain insert
flange, sealant ring at base of insert tube.
GAF EverGuard TPO Preformed Corners by
GAF Materials Corporation.
21 TPO Coated Metal
25 gauge steel with 0.020" thick TPO based film
required for fabricated metal gravel stops and
drip edge profiles, metal base and curb flashings
and sealant pans.
GAF EverGuard TPO Coated Metal by GAF
Materials Corporation.
22 Lip Termination Bar
Extruded aluminum termination bar with angled
lip caulk receiver and lower leg bulb stiffener.
Pre-punched slotted holes at 6" on center, 3/4" x
10’ with 0.090" cross section.
GAF EverGuard Liptermination Bar by GAF
Materials Corporation, Or equal.
23 Miscellaneous
Materials
1. Bonding Adhesive: As recommended by the
roofing manufacturer.
2. Splicing Cement: As recommended by the
roofing manufacturer.
3. Lap Sealant: As recommended by the roofing
manufacturer.
1057
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 54 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
4. Deck Primer: As recommended by roofing
manufacturer.
5. Caulking and Sealants: As recommended by
the roofing manufacturer.
6. Protection Board: As recommended by the
roofing manufacturer for use beneath membrane
protection pavers.
7. Mechanical Fasteners and Plates: Stainless
steel and plates as recommended by the roofing
manufacturer.
24 Single-Ply Roofing
Manufacturer
1. Fully adhered single-ply TPO TSR roofing
system, by GAF EverGuard by GAF Materials
Corporation. (Uses: concrete decks).
2. Mechanically attached single-ply TPO TSR
roofing system by GAF EverGuard.
by GAF Materials Corporation. (Uses: metal
decks), Or equal.
25 Flashing And Trim
Flashing and trim shall be permanently
watertight, and not deteriorate in excess of
manufacturer's published limitations.
Flashing and trim to be fabricated and installed to
meet the requirements of FM 1-90 and applicable
requirements of the California Building Code,
latest edition and the International Building Code,
latest edition.
Comply with fabrication details recommended by
SMACNA.
26 Stainless Steel
Flashing and Trim
Provide sheet stainless steel, Type 304
complying with ASTM A 176, with No. 2D dead
soft, fully annealed finish, unless otherwise
specified.
27 Cast-In-Place
Roofing Reglets and
Counterflashing
Provide stainless steel, Type 304, (.020-inch)
built-in-place reglets with wind lock clips.
Type CO Reglet for cast-in-place application by
Fry Reglet Corporation, Or equal.
28 Fiberglass
Reinforced Plastic
(FRP) Doors and
Frames
General:
a. Fiberglass Mat: Minimum 1.5 ounces per
square foot.
b. Resins: Manufacturer’s formulation for
fabricating units to meet specified requirements.
Manufactured Units:
1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors:
a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
b. Thermal Insulating Value: ‘R’ Factor 11.
c. Construction:
1) Core: End-grain balsa wood, resinimpregnated.
2) Door Plates: Molded in one continuous piece,
resin reinforced with hand-laid glass fiber mat,
nominal 1/8-inch thick, minimum 15 mil gelcoated
surface.
3) Door Edges: Minimum three (3) layers resinreinforced glass fiber mat, nominal 3/8-inch thick, machine tooled.
d. Finish: Smooth gloss surface, minimum Value
88 in accordance with ASTM D 523.
1058
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 55 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
2. Fire-rated Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
Doors: UL approved, and as follows:
a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
b. Thermal Insulating Value: ‘R’ Factor 11.
c. Construction:
1) Core: Fire-resistant mineral core.
2) Door Plates: Molded in one continuous piece
resin, reinforced with hand-laid glass fiber mat
nominal 1/8-inch thick, minimum 25 mil gelcoated
surface.
3) Door Edges: Minimum two (2) layers resinreinforced glass fiber mat, nominal 1/4-inch thick, machine tooled.
d. Finish: Smooth gloss surface, minimum Value
88 in accordance with ASTM D 523.
3. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Frames:
a. Construction: One-piece pultruded fiberglass
reinforced plastic, minimum 1/4-inch wall
thickness, jamb-to-head joints mitered and
reinforced with (FRP) clips and stainless steel
fasteners conforming to SDI requirements for
performance equivalent to 16 gage steel frames.
b. Frame Profile: 5-3/4 inches deep, 2 inches
wide face; double rabbeted with 5/8-inch high
stop.
c. Finish: Satin finish, with true and consistent
color throughout frame thickness.
4. Fire-rated Frames: UL approved, and as
follows:
a. Construction: Type 304 stainless steel, or steel
gel-coated to match doors.
5. Lites and Louvers:
a. Lites:
1) Stops: Pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic
construction.
2) Fasteners: Stainless steel screws as
recommended by manufacturer.
3) Fire-rated: Stainless steel, Type 304 UL rated
frames.
b. Louvers:
1) Construction: Molded solid vanes; pultruded
fiberglass reinforced construction.
2) Finish: Satin finish, with true and consistent
color throughout frame thickness.
6. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
Removable Transoms:
a. Construction: Transoms shall match door
frame construction and color.
Fiberglass doors and frames by FIB-R-DOR
Division of Advance Fiberglass, Inc., Or equal.
29 Non-Rated Wall
Access Doors
Stainless Steel KRP-DSC-214M by Karp
Associates, Or equal.
30 Overhead Rolling
Doors (High Speed
Roll-Up Door)
Speed-Master Series-Model 1500 by Hörmann
Flexon LLC. Phone: 1-800-365-3667, website:
www. HORMANN-FLEXON.com, Or equal.B.
31 Painting A. Shop clean and prime all ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and
1059
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 56 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
unexposed, except lubricated surfaces, with door
manufacturer's standard rust
inhibitive primer drying to a flat sheen.
32 Aluminum Storefront
Windows and
Framing
Trifab VG 451T (Thermal) Storefront System by
Kawneer Company, Incorporated, Or equal.
33 Exposed Aluminum
Polyvinylidene
Fluoride Based
Coating
Duranar Metallic XL Specialty Color 4-Coat
System by PPG Industries Coatings and Resins
Division, or equal.
34 Skylights Model DDCAP1 3636, by Wasco Products
Incorporated, Or equal.
35 Fall Protection Safety
Screens
Provide 1-inch square mesh consisting of 12
gage galvanized steel wire. Fasten mesh to the
extruded aluminum retainer assembly.
36 Aluminum Finishes
A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes
Manual” recommendations for application and
designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to
the system for designations of aluminum finishes
established by the Aluminum Association.
C. Class I or Class II, Clear-Anodized Finish: AAC22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural,
clear film thicker than 0.7 mil complying with
AAMA 607.1. Class II Architectural 0.7 mil.
37 Finish Hardware -
Hinges
Provide all doors with mortise hinges, unless
specifically scheduled otherwise.
FBB 199 and FBB 191 by Stanley Commercial
Hardware, Or approved equal.
38 Finish HardwareMortise Locks Sets
Extra Heavy Duty Mortise Lockset L9000 Series
with Lever Handles by Schlage Part of
Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation, Or equal.
39 Finish HardwarePanic Exit Devices
Von Duprin Part of Worldwide, Or equal.
40 Finish HardwareCylinders And Keying
System
Cylinders and Keying by Schlage Part of
Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. No
equals allowed.
41 Finish Hardware- Fire
Department Key Lock
Box
Knox Company, Model 3200R Knox-Box, Or
equal.
42 Finish HardwareDoor Closers
4040 XP Heavy Duty Closer by LCN Part of
Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation, Or
approved equal.
43 Finish HardwareFloor Stops
FB13/14R, FB17 by Glynn-Johnson Part of
Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation, Or
approved equal.
44 Finish HardwareStripping And Seals
No. 4301CRL by Pemko Manufacturing
Company, Or equal.
45 Finish HardwareThresholds
172A, 176A by Pemko Manufacturing Company,
Or equal.
46 Finish HardwareAstragals
No. 357SS by Pemko Manufacturing Company,
Or equal.
47 Finish HardwareSealants
Provide butyl rubber sealant complying with FS
TT-S-001657 for use with thresholds.
48 Finish HardwareFlush Bolts
GJ FB6 Extension Flush Bolts by Glynn-Johnson
Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand, Or equal.
1060
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 57 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
49 Finish HardwareCoordinators
COR 1, 2 and 3 Series with FB Series by GlynnJohnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand, Or equal.
50 Glass And GlazingClear Wire Glass
(Interior
Door/Transom Lites
Polished Plate Wire Glass by PPG Industries,
Incorporated, Or equal.
51 Glass And GlazingInsulating Glass
Caribia Tinted Tempered Commercial Insulating
Glass Units by PPG Industries, Inc., Or equal.
52 Glass And GlazingClear Tempered
Insulating Glass
Clear Tempered Commercial Insulating Glass
Units by PPG Industries, Inc., Or equal.
53 Glass And GlazingClear Tempered
Monolithic Glass
(Interior
Door/Transom Lites
Clear Tempered Monolithic Commercial Glass
Units by PPG Industries, Inc., Or equal.
54 Glass And GlazingTinted Tempered
Monolithic Glass
(Exterior
Door/Transom Lites
Caribia Tinted Tempered Monolithic Commercial
Glass Units by PPG Industries, Inc., Or equal.
55 Glazing Sealants And
Tapes- Structural
Silicone Sealant
Dow Corning 995 Silicone Structural Adhesive by
Dow Corning Corporation, Or equal.
56 Glazing Sealants And
Tapes- Exterior OnePart Silicone Rubber
Sealant
Spectrum I by Tremco, Incorporated. Or equal.
57 Glazing Sealants And
Tapes- Preformed
Butyl Rubber Glazing
Sealant
Polyshim II Glazing Tape by Tremco,
Incorporated. Or equal.
58 Glazing Sealants And
Tapes- Dense
Compression Wedge
Gaskets
Dense Silicone Wedge Gaskets SCR-900 by
Tremco, Incorporated. Or equal.
59 Miscellaneous
Glazing Materials
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 durometer
hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants
used as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer
hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants
used as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
C. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed-cell or
waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber
or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with
sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5-10
pounds per square inch compression strength for
25 percent deflection.
60 Translucent
Fiberglass Sandwich
Panels
Translucent fiberglass sandwich panels by
Kalwall Corporation, www.kalwall.com. Or equal,
61 Gypsum Wallboard United States Gypsum Company, Dietrich Metal Framing, Or equal.
1061
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 58 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
62 Gypsum Wallboard -
Wall/Partition Support
Materials
400 USTE 20 DW EQ UltraSTEEL framing with
complementary accessories by Dietrich Metal
Framing. Or equal.
63 Gypsum Wallboard -
Furring Members
Z-furring (ZF-Series) by Dietrich Metal Framing
64 Acoustical CeilingsAcoustical Panels
Sanserra 573 Tegular by Armstrong. Or equal.
65 Ceiling Suspension
Materials- Exposed
Suspension System
Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee Systems by
Armstrong. Or equal.
66 Acoustical PanelsPerforated Metal
Acoustical Panels
Eckoustic Functional Panels by Eckel Industries,
Incorporated. Or equal.
67 Resilient Tile- Rubber
Tile
Noraplan Stone al by Nora Flooring Incorporated.
68 Painting Tnemec Company, Incorporated, Devoe High
Performance Coatings, Or equal.
69 Louvers And Vents
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 5005 with
temper as required for forming, or as otherwise
recommended by the metal producer to provide
the required finish.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy
6063-T52.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Use Type 316 stainless
steel expansion bolt devices or drill and epoxy
Type 316 stainless steel anchors.
D. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (coldapplied asphalt mastic).
E. Blank-Off Panels: Provide 16 gage aluminum
sheet with A42 Dark Bronze anodized finish.
Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners, 12
inches on centers.
70 Fixed Louvers No. A6155 by Construction Specialties, Incorporated. Or equal.
71 Finishes- Exposed
Aluminum
Polyvinylidene
Fluoride Based
Coating
Kynar 500 TRI-X by DeSoto Incorporated.
Duranar XL by PPG Industries, Incorporated. Or
equal.
72 Louver Screens
A. Provide removable screens for all louvers.
B. Fabricate screen frames of the same metal
and finish as the louver units to which secured.
Provide frames consisting of extra heavy duty
extruded 0.090-inch aluminum for permanently
securing screen mesh. Frames shall be
rewirable.
C. Use insect screen of 18 by 14 mesh, 0.0123-
inch diameter stainless steel intercrimp wire.
D. Locate screens on inside face of louvers.
Secure screens to louver frames with machine
screws, spaced at each corner and at 12 inches
on centers.
E. Provide minimum No. 8 stainless steel metal
screws unless larger screws are required by
screen size.
F. Provide cross bar screen reinforcement of
same material and finish as louver which
1062
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 59 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
subdivides screens into maximum area of 50
square feet.
73 Sill Extension Gage and Finish: Same as louver.
74 Self-Luminous Exit
Signs
Everglo Signs by Self Powered Lighting
Incorporated. Isolite Model 2040-01 Signs by
Safety Light Corporation. Or equal.
75 Fire Extinguisher
Location Signs,
Interior Room
Identification Signs,
And Chemical Area
Safety Signs
A. Material: Subsurface silkscreened graphics on
a transparent acrylic sheet, 0.08-inches thick with
Helvetica Medium alphabet and matching arrows
type face. Provide 2-inch high upper case letters
and 1-inch high lower case letters.
B. Fire Extinguisher Identification Sign: Provide
15-inch by 15-inch with square corners,
unframed. Provide one for each surface mounted
fire extinguisher. Background color red with white
lettering. Sign shall incorporate a directional
arrow
76 Room Identification
Signs
Provide 15-inch by 15-inch with square corners,
unframed. Colored background with white
lettering. Provide one sign for each of the
followings rooms in the Centrifuge Building:
Locate on wall adjacent to entry door into room.
1. Unisex Restroom.
2. Control Room.
3. Electrical Room (two signs).
4. Truck Loading Observation Room (at stairway
#3).
77 Chemical And
Process Area Safety
Signs
Safety signs shall be formed from rigid
polystyrene or polyethylene plastic. Letters shall
be 2-inch high upper case letters and 1-inch high
lower case letters.
78 Architectural Finishes
Architectural finishes of concrete prior to painting
shall be uniform profile by blasting and or other
methods.
Consider the use of Wunderfixx (or equal), a
concrete smoothing compound for exterior
concrete walls.
79 Paint Color of
Architectural
Features
Paint color of architectural features (facias,
doors, exterior features systems, roof drains,
awnings) shall conform to IEUA color standard2
1063
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 60 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Contractor is responsible to color matching
and/or field coating to match, other
manufacturers’ standards are not acceptable.
6.5 HVAC
The following tables contain the Engineering Design Guidelines for HVAC criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
Table 53 HVAC general
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope
This document applies to all heating,
ventilation, and air conditioning equipment and
design.
1 System Configuration
Options
-Unitary equipment
-Centralized heating and cooling system
-Composite (combined) system
AC systems shall be consolidated where
possible.
Redundancy is required in electrical rooms,
server rooms, control rooms, and in other
critical locations.
2 Unitary Equipment
Application
Use for small and remote buildings or system
that require stand-alone or redundant cooling
equipment.
Do not use where maintenance is difficult or
access is limited.
Outdoor equipment, such as air-cooled
condenser coils, corrode quickly if exposed to
vapor/condensate of a sewage treatment
process.
Not suitable for 100% outside air systems.
3 Central System
Application
Use for localized heating and cooling of groups
of buildings.
Use hot water heating boilers and steam
boilers.
4 Composite System
Application
Use if a central system can handle a group of
buildings, but unitary system(s) are needed for
remote or distant buildings.
5 Weather Conditions
Summer conditions: select 0.5% design drybulb and coincident wet-bulb temperatures.
Winter conditions: select 0.6% design
temperatures.
Use latest ASHRAE climatic data for the region.
6 Equipment Access
Minimum 30-inches around all equipment.
When located on roof, proper accessibility and
maintenance clearances are required. This
includes stairs/ladders, platform, catwalk,
handrails, etc.
7 Equipment Location
Where possible, minimize long duct runs.
Unless necessary, do not mount equipment on
roofs (adds expense of access
ladders/catwalks and cranes are required to
install/remove equipment).
1064
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 61 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
8 Intake/Exhaust
Locations
Locate intakes considering prevailing wind
direction and potential sources of odorous,
toxic, or corrosive gases, and environmental
conditions.
Do not route exhausts where they can feed air
intakes.
Do not route exhausts toward the entry points
of confined spaces.
9 Ventilation Ventilation is required for all buildings, equipment rooms, galleries, and storage areas.
10 Odorous, Hazardous,
and Special
Environments
FRP fans, housings, and assemblies are
required in corrosive environments (i.e.,
hydrogen sulfide).
Minimize potential for fire and explosion.
Maintain concentrations of hazardous gases to
levels below those considered dangerous to
personnel.
Computer / Control Rooms: -Do not use more
than 10% outside air for cooling.-Provide
special equipment with dehumidification
capabilities and three-stage air filtration
system.-Maintain positive pressure.
Locate exhaust points as close as possible to
potential sources of odors or hazardous gases.
In chemical gas areas, locate supply points
near the ceiling and exhaust points near the
floor.
Provide dust removal systems for areas that
produce dust (e.g., air filter, electrostatic
precipitators).
Provide oxygen sensors where pure oxygen is
used for aeration.
11 Insulation
Insulate ductwork for mechanically cooled
spaces to prevent condensation.
Use piping and equipment insulation where the
following items are needed:
-Heat loss/energy conservation.
-Personnel protection.
-Condensation control.
-Jacketed insulation on exterior refrigerant
lines.
12 Vibration / Noise
Control
Provide vibration control on all floor-mounted or
large ceiling-hung air moving equipment.
Incorporate seismic bracing and restraints into
large HVAC vibration isolation equipment and
all suspended equipment.
Use duct silencers in conjunction with exhaust
fans at areas containing equipment which
generates substantial noise.
Control noise to meet local codes and
regulations.
In administration areas, insulate the interior of
fans, air-handling units, and critical ducts.
13 Fans and Air
Handling Units
Use centrifugal, wall-mounted fans to exhaust
the air.
The unit housing and coils shall be constructed
on non-corrosive materials.
1065
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 62 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
14 Materials
Components:
-non-ferrous
-bronze anodized aluminum
-FRP
-stainless steel
-galvanized steel (only in locations not exposed
to water, ground water, or sewer gas)
FRP shall have a flame spread of < 25 and
smoke propagation < 400.
Consider fire-resistant FFRP ductwork in all
hazardous and highly corrosive areas.
15 Energy Efficiency
Design on steady-state heat transfer conditions
with buildings and processes us use 24 hours
per day.
Do not count thermal storage in the building
mass to reduce the design loads.
Base calculation on ASHRAE Fundamentals.
16 Boilers
Types: hot water heating and steam.
Fuels: natural gas, sludge digester gas, or both.
Do not use electric heating coils, unless at
remote site without gas supply or small heating
demands.
Follow applicable codes and SCAQMD
regulations.
Include provisions for thermal expansion.
Provide heat for these central systems by
natural gas fired high efficiency low
temperature hot water boilers operating at over
90 percent low heating value (LHV) fuel to hot
water efficiency.
Provide modulating control on 100 percent
outside air systems.
17 Ductwork
Insulation:
-Double wall for outside.
-Single wall for inside.
Material:
-Typical: galvanized steel
-Buried: HDPE
-Aeration areas: 316 SS
-Foul air: FRP
18 Refrigerant Shall not be on EPA Phase-out List 2 years after announcement.
19 Coils
Type: Copper Tubing with Aluminum Fins.
Coating: Use coated coil, unless otherwise
noted.
Cleaning: Provide utility water tap with quick
disconnect and hose.
20 Manufacturers See Section 3.2 (AC Units)
21 Dampers
Use dampers on every header.
Use motorized dampers for 1+1 unit
arrangement.
Use backdraft dampers if two units are feeding
into same line
22 Condensate Line
Material
Copper.
1066
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 63 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
23 Alarms/Controls
Provide SCADA alarms for critical HVAC items.
Provide room temperature monitoring at
SCADA for critical areas.
24 Slope and Drain Provide slope with drain capture. 1% slope with flow and 2 % slope against flow.
25 Floor Drain for
Equipment
Use Josam E2 Series or equal for significant
drain flows.
27 EMS Controls JCI, Carrier IVU or Tridium.
28 Minimum SEER 2 more than California minimum.
29 Thermostat Debonair if available.
30 Access to AC Control
Panel
Use hinged door rather than screws.
31 Controls
Critical HVAC systems (e.g., in electrical
rooms, SCADA rooms, server rooms, etc.)
require remote monitoring and/or alarming
Table 54 Air conditioning units
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to air conditioning units. 1 Warranty All AC Units require 1-year manufacturer's
warranty.
2 Acceptable
Manufacturers
-Carrier.
-Trane.
-Liebert.
-Mitsubishi (split systems)
3 Cabinet and Frame
Materials:
-Base frame: phosphatized, zinc coated 18
gage steel.
-Doors and Access panels: 18 gage steel.
-Cabinet Insulation: Fireproof material or foil
faced glass fiber.
-Exterior finish: Textured vinyl enamel to match
computer equipment.
-Roof mounted: 12 gage zinc coated steel with
weatherproof seal.
Thermally and acoustically line cabinet interior
equal to one inch thick of 1.5 lb./cf. density
duct liner material, meeting requirements of
NFPA 90A.
Panels shall be gasketed, with quick release
hinged with latches and handles.
4 Condensate Pan
Provide an insulated condensate pan under
the evaporator coil. Provide copper
condensate drainpipe complete with union,
trap and open tee at discharge of trap, connect
drain to condensate sump pump as specified
hereinafter.
5 Compressors
Type:
-Hermetic.
-Semi-hermetic.
Provide crankcase heaters, discharge muffler,
and related components for proper operation.
Use dual compressors for units larger than 5
tons.
Check availability.
Compressor shall be serviceable without
dismantling other components.
1067
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 64 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
6 Condensers
Provide air cooled units with matched air
cooled condenser consisting of corrosion
resistant cabinet, incorporating copper tube
aluminum fin condenser coils arranged for
minimum of two circuits and multiple direct
drive condenser fans with inherently protected
motors. Operating controls shall permit fan
cycling for head pressure control.
7 Filters
Provide removable, disposable pleated
cartridge type filters with efficiency of 60
percent by NBS atmospheric dust spot
method. Mount filters in top of cabinet in a
track or holding device designed to preclude
air bypass.
8 Evaporator Coils
Type: Horizontally split face coils.
Material: Seamless copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins.
9 Evaporator Fans and
Motors
Fans shall be arranged to draw air through the
cooling coils.
Type: multi-blade up flow propeller.
Fans shall be provided with vibration isolation
from the unit casing.
Each fan shall be independently driven by
heavy duty drip proof permanently or grease
lubricated ball bearing motor with built-in
current and overload protection.
Motors shall be installed on an adjustable
base.
10 Controls
All temperature sensors shall be mounted
within the unit in the return air stream.
Temperature control shall be set to maintain 75
degrees F DB.
High pressure fan control or economizer to be
installed for low ambient temperature
conditions.
The control and readout panel shall indicate
the following: cooling operating stages, loss of
air flow, dirty filters, high and low.
11 Condenser and
Evaporator Coils
3/8-inch OD seamless copper tube
mechanically bonded to aluminum fins.
12 Air Filters
Indoor: Continuous filament, pleated, 2-inch
thick, viscosine coated removable media with
filter cell.
Outside: Camfil Farr, with rainguard and PVC
coated bird screen.
Flow rate: 200 cubic feet per minute with less
than 0.25 water column drop.
Locate in dry areas.
13 MCC Rooms AC Package unit pad mounted with supply and return ductwork.
14 Cabinet AC Ice Qube or Mclean stainless steel for outdoor use.
Table 55 Heat pumps
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to heat pump units.
1068
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 65 1 Approved
Manufacturers
Carrier.
2 Ambient Conditions Capable of operating at rated capacities at 120 degrees F.
3 Materials
-Casing: 18 gage zinc coated steel.
-Exterior surface: phosphatized, painted with
epoxy primer, and finished with baked enamel.
-Motor / Fan mounts: heavy zinc coating.
-Coil frame: Minimum 12 gage zone coated
steel.
4 Condenser Fan and
Drive
Type: axial flow propeller fan.
Material: Zinc plated or aluminum.
5 Refrigerant
Compressor
Type: hermetic reciprocating or scroll
compressor.
6 Condensing Coil Seamless copper tubing and heavy-duty aluminum fins.
7 Application Office Space only.
Table 56 Exhaust fans
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to exhaust fans.
1 Materials
-Fans: Fiberglass reinforced plastic, fire
retardant.
-Housing: Fiberglass reinforced vinyl-ester.
-Metal components: coated with corrosion
proof UV inhibited gel.
-Fan shaft seal: Teflon seal between shaft and
housing.
2 Manufacturers
-Hartzell Fan, Inc.
-Swarthout, Inc.
-Greenheck.
3 Type Extruded flanged mounted louver with an
integral draft damper.
4 Housing
Provide corrosion resistant solid fiberglass
reinforced plastic design with construction
classification suitable for pressure range.
5 Shaft bearings
Heavy-duty, grease lubricated, sealed, selfaligning, frictionless ball bearings, L-10 minimum life ratings of 50,000 hours.
6 Hood and Bird Screen FRP hood complete with guard securely anchored to hood inlets.
Table 57 Ductwork and accessories
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
0 Scope This document applies to HVAC ductwork and
accessories.
1 Materials Select corrosive resistant material compatible with environment.
2 Hanging Ductwork
Do not use straps for hanging ductwork,
instead use angled rods constructed from the
same material as the duct.
Hanger rods:
Duct half perimeter up to 72 inch: 3/8 inch at 8
feet spacing.
Duct half perimeter greater than 72 inch: 1/2
inch at 6 feet spacing.
1069
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 66 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
3 Sleeves
20 gage galvanized steel sleeve, caulked
airtight with fire resistant sealant required when
duct passes through masonry wall, partitions,
or floors.
4 Weatherproof Duct 16 gage galvanized steel.
5 Air Volume Extractors
Manufacturers:
-Hart and Cooley.
-Titus.
Material: Aluminum.
Blades: Gang-operated curved adjustable
blades controlled through a manual adjusting
lever.
6 Splitter Dampers
Manufacturers:
-Hart and Cooley.
-Titus.
Material: Aluminum.
Adjustment: Manual adjusting lever with
locking device.
7 Volume Dampers
Manufacturers:
-Honeywell.
-Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Material: Match Duct.
Blades: opposed blades, key operated with
vinyl edge seals.
Provide outside handle, quadrant, approved
position indicator, locking device and linkage
for manual operation or motorized operation.
Performance:-Damper Leakage: Not more than
16 cfm per square foot at 4-inch W.G.-
Certification: Manufacturer shall provide
certified test data.
8 Belt Guards
Expanded hinged steel or hinged sheet steel
for weather protection where required.
Fabricate guards to receive 2-inch larger
pulleys without alteration to the guard.
9 Flexible Connections:
(For air handling units)
Material:
-3/16-inch thick, 6-inch wide fabric reinforced
neoprene.
-0.080 gauge, 3-inch wide aluminum strip.
10 Turning Vanes
Same material as ducts. Vanes shall be 2-inch
blades for ducts up to 18 inches in either
dimension and shall be 4-1/2 inch blades for
larger ducts.
Vanes: Double thickness for supply and
exhaust/return ductwork. Finished with an airdried phenolic corrosion resistant coating prior to installation.
11 Screens 1/2-inch mesh, stainless steel metal screen
with stainless steel frame.
12 Registers, Grilles, and
Diffusers
Manufacturers:
-Carnes
-Hart and Cooley
-Titus
13 Supply Registers
Type: Individually adjustable
Frame and Blades: Aluminum in aluminum and
galvanized steel ducts. SS in SS or FRP
ducts.
1070
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 67 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
14 Smoke Dampers Comply with fire and mechanical Codes. 15 Supply Diffusers
Type: Square, step-down outlet with round
neck.
Frame and Core: Aluminum in aluminum and
galvanized steel ducts.
Provide combination volume control and
equalizing deflector construction of same
material as frame above.
Table 58 Ventilation schedule
Area Ventilation Requirements
Room
Condition
HeatCool, °F
Duct
Materials
Administration/ Operation Building
-Offices 15 to 20 cfm/person (4) 70/78 Aluminum,
G.S.
-Meeting & Conference Rooms 15 to 20 cfm/person (4) 70/78 Aluminum, G.S.
-Toilet/Locker Rooms 100% exhaust 70/78 Aluminum
-Control/Computer Rooms 10% Outside air 72/72 Aluminum, G.S.
-Stairwells (enclosed) 100% Outside air (5) 50/85 Aluminum, G.S.
-Laboratories 100% exhaust (5) 70/75 FRP/SS
Maintenance Building
-General 40/90 Aluminum,
G.S.
-Shops and Offices 68/75 G.S.
Control Rooms/Centers
-Attended
6 Air changes/hr. 68/75 Aluminum,
G.S.
10% Outside air.
-Unattended or combined-with MCC
6 Air changes/hr. 55/85
(max.)
Aluminum,
G.S.
10% Outside air.
Motor Control Center Rooms/ Buildings
6 Air changes/hr. 55/90 Aluminum,
G.S.
10% Outside air.
HVAC Equipment Rooms 6 Air changes/hr. No
requirement
G.S.
Storage Rooms No
requirement
G.S.
Thickening Control Building 12 continuous air changes/ hour 100% outside air.
55/85 FRP
Digester Area
-Gas Compressor Room (explosive, toxic) 12 continuous air changes/ hour 100% outside air, 30
changes/hour intermittent (1)
55/85 Anodized
Aluminum,
Type 316
SS, or
RFP
Dewatering Building 12 continuous air changes/ hour
100% outside air
55/90 FRP
1071
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 68 Area Ventilation Requirements
Room
Condition
HeatCool, °F
Duct
Materials
Dewatered Biosolids Storage Building 12 continuous air changes/ hour 100% outside air
No
requirement
Anodized
Aluminum,
Type 316
SS, or
FRP
Chemical Areas
-Chlorine (toxic, corrosive) 10-20 air changes/hour 100% outside air (3) ( 1)
60/90 FRP(3)
-Chemical Storage Rooms 10-20 air changes/hour 100%
outside air (1)
60/90
Peroxide Storage & Handling Areas 10-20 air changes/hour 100% outside air (1)
60/90 FRP
Chemical Handling 6 air changes/ hour 100%
outside air (1)
55/85 FRP
Tunnels/Underground Gallery Table 8.3, see NAPA 820 No
requirement
G.S.
-w/o gas piping 6 air changes/ hour 100%
outside air (1)
Aluminum,
G.S., FRP
-w/gas piping (potentially explosive) 12 continuous air changes/ hour 100% outside air
Aluminum,
G.S., FRP
Stairwells to Tunnels or Basement/Underground Structures Preliminary Treatment/ Headwork's Building 20-30 air changes/hour 100% outside air. Chemical scrubber
40-90 Aluminum,
G.S., FRP
-Wet wells (explosive, toxic, corrosive, high
humidity)
30 continuous ventilation air
changes/hour 100% outside air
No
requirement
Aluminum,
G.S., FRP
-Screening (explosive, toxic, corrosive, high
humidity)
20(8)-30(1) continuous ventilation
air changes/hour 100% outside
air
50/90 Aluminum,
G.S., FRP
-Grit removal (high humidity, corrosive) room
(above tank covers)
20(8)-30(1) continuous ventilation
air changes/hour 100% outside
air
50/90 Type 316
SS, or
FRP
Process Equipment Rooms 6
(8)-12(1) Ventilation air
changes/hour 100% outside air
50/85 FRP
Cogeneration Building 12 continuous air changes/ hour
100% outside air
40/90 Aluminum,
G.S.
-General (explosive) Ventilation air changes 100%
outside air
50/95 FRP for
process
areas
-Offices (physically separated) 15 to 20 cfm/person (4) 70/78 Aluminum, G.S.
-General (explosive and flammable) (20-foot
minimum envelope around equipment)
12 continuous air changes/ hour
100% outside air
N/A FRP for
process
areas
Process Area Offices 15 to 20 cfm/person (4) 70/78 Aluminum, G.S.
(1) Higher ventilation rate when people are present
(2) Review NFPA 820 for specific process.
(3) Special ventilation requirements for chemical spills (refer to applicable NFPA standards). (4) Review Title 24 and ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 for requirements (5) Follow Title 24, BOCA, ASHRAE, and local codes for requirements. (6) Refer to Title 24 for ventilation rate if refrigeration machines are housed indoors (7) More restrictive than WEF MOP No. 8, Table 7-6
1072
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 69 (8) Intermittent when people are not present
6.6 Electrical
6.6.1 Existing Electrical Installation
The existing electrical installation comprises an onsite utility transformer, a main Service Switchboard rated at 3000amp, and a main circuit breaker rated at 3000AF/2400AT.
The switchboard was installed in the year 2000 with three spaces for future feeders, as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5 Existing switchboard
6.6.2 Electrical Scope of Work
The electrical scope of work for this Project is to provide electrical design for providing power to all the electrical equipment related to the expansion of Banning’s Wastewater Treatment Plant, as shown on the Conceptual PFD (Attachment A).
Installing new feeders at the existing service switchboard Installing new MCCs
Installing new duct banks
Providing site lighting and building lighting
Providing power for new HVAC and ancillary loads
6.6.3 Preliminary of Electrical Installation Plan
The existing location of electrical equipment, the preliminary location of new electrical equipment, and the power plant are shown in Figure 6. All conceptual drawings are subject to change by the DBE. 1073
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 70 Figure 6 Layout of new electrical equipment
6.6.4 Estimated Load Calculation
Existing Load:
The existing connected load at the site is about 970 Amp, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7 Existing connected load
However, if the demand load is less than this number, the meter reading or facility electrical bill should be checked.
New Load:
The estimated new loads list and calculated power demand are shown in Figure 8. This load is subject to change pending on the DBE’s design.
1074
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 71 Figure 8 Estimated new Load list and calculated power
The additional demand load is about 1397 HP, which is about 1650 Amp. The new loading of the Main Switchboard is shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9 New loading of the main switchboard
This is over the capacity of the existing main circuit breaker setting (2400A). However, the circuit breaker setting could be adjusted, and as mentioned above, it is expected that the running current of the existing load (Demand load) would be much less than what is shown in Figure 7, the existing connected load.
6.6.5 General Electrical Requirements
The following tables contain the Engineering Design Guidelines for Electrical criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
6.6.5.1 Electrical Supply and Distribution
Table 59 Power Supply to Site
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Load Estimate Determine anticipated loads.
1075
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 72 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
2 Supply Voltage 480 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire
3 Scope
Evaluate the total running load of the WWTP. Verify if
the existing transformer and switchboard have
enough capacity to run the new and existing loads. If
required, provide additional transformer and
switchboard capacity to run the new and existing
loads. Coordinate with SCE for replacing existing
Transformer if required.
Provide 20% spare
transformer nameplate
rated capacity, if
additional transformer
is needed.
Table 60 Arc Flash
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Arc Flash Study
Evaluate if Arc Flash Study is required by code.
If required by code, coordinate Short Circuit, Arc
Flash, and Harmonic Studies to be performed using
ETAP Software.
2 Arc Flash Labels
If Arc Flash Study is required by code, provide Arc
Flash Labels for all affected equipment based on Arc
Flash Study results.
6.6.5.2 Technical Requirements
Table 61 Lightning Protection & Grounding
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Lightning Protection DBE shall perform risk assessment in accordance with NFPA 780 to determine requirements.
2 Grounding
Ground grid shall consist of embedded concrete
rebar in the new building and pump station slabs,
connected to grounding rods.
Table 62 Switchgear
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Material/Enclosure Heavy gauge steel with NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R ratings as required.
2 Preferred
Manufacturers
Allen Bradley. No equal.
3 Communications Main circuit breakers will include relays which can communicate via Ethernet to SCADA.
4 Remote Operation Remote racking and un-racking of main incoming breakers to avoid arc flash incidents.
5 Circuit Breakers
Separately mounted construction; insulated
case circuit breakers.
Units shall include solid state trip units with
ground fault protection for all breakers larger
than 400 Amperes.
6 Bus Bars Tin- or silver-plated copper bus bars.
7 Access Front and rear access to each cubicle as required. 8 Power Monitoring
Power monitoring of voltage (over/under), phase
imbalance, ground, kilowatts, and kilowatt/hours.
Power monitor connected via communications
network.
Instantaneous Power shall be available for trending
in SCADA.
Total kilowatt/hours shall be available in SCADA.
9 Bus Bracing Bus bracing will be a minimum of 65kAIC or as 1076
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 73 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
determined by power study.
Table 63 Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Materials/Enclosure Heavy gauge steel with NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R ratings as required.
2 Preferred
Manufacturers
Preference shall be for equipment that is consistent
with the PLC vendor such that communications
between the intelligent motor starters and the PLC
can be seamlessly integrated.
Refer to SCADA Design
Deliverables
3 Ratings NEMA (not IEC) rated relays and starters.
4 Intelligent MCC
Provide intelligent MCC consisting of intelligent
motor starters and networked components for
simplified installation and improved diagnostics.
Intelligent motor starters include integrated current
or power monitoring, overload relays and
programmable protection functions and diagnostics
(trip history, trip status, time since last trip, etc.), which are all accessible via an integrated
communications interface.
5 Wiring
Communications and power wiring shall be
separated from one another.
Include conduit for
future plant expansion
(i.e., future Trident
Units and Influent/
Effluent Pumps)
Provide non-metallic duct where communication
cables are exposed to other wiring systems (i.e.,
Innerduct, Smurf tube, Schedule 40 PVC)
6 Communication
Starters shall include the ability to communicate
with the SCADA system via Ethernet, or field bus
nominated for instrument networking.
Consider Fiber Optic
Cable where
appropriate.
7 Reduced Voltage
Starters
Reduced voltage starters shall be solid-state type.
8 Power Monitoring
Power monitoring of each MCC voltage (over/under),
phase imbalance, ground, kilowatts, and
kilowatt/hours.
Power monitor connected via communications
network.
Instantaneous Power shall be available for trending in
SCADA.
Total kilowatt/hours shall be available in SCADA.
9 Bus Bars Tin- or silver-plated copper bus bars.
10 Bus Bracing Bus bracing will be a minimum of 65KAIC or as determined by the power study.
Table 64 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Location Install in MCC lineup (not standalone) Except GAC pumps. 2 Preferred
Manufacturers
Toshiba P9 Preference shall be
for equipment that is
consistent with the
PLC vendor such that
communications
between the
equipment can be
seamlessly
integrated.
3 Type Pulse-Width-Modulated (PWM).
1077
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 74 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
6-pulse VFDs for low voltage (600V) motors less
than 100 HP.
18-pulse VFDs for low voltage (600V) motors 100 HP
or higher.
4 Bus Bracing Minimum of 65kA for low voltage (LV) VFDs. 5 Control Power 120V internal or external control power transformers.
6 Communications Integral communication to central SCADA system via Ethernet/IP.
7 Protection
Functions
Temperature and vibration module for motor
protection.
8 Cable
Cable between VFD and the motor shall be VFD
cable which is specifically designed to reduce noise
and cross-talk in VFD applications.
9 Filters
Input filter requirements shall be specified as
necessary to reduce harmonics on the system to
the limits nominated in IEEE 519.
Output filter requirements shall be specified as
necessary to address noise, crosstalk, motor dV/dt
and insulation requirements (NEMA MG 1-31-
40.4.2), etc.
Additional output filters may need to be
considered for long motor cable lengths.
Table 65 Motors
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Cooling Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
2 Preferred
Manufacturers
US Motors
3 Service Factor 1.15
4 Efficiency Super or premium efficiency ratings.
5 Thermal Protection
(Motors > 500 HP)
PT100 RTDs, two per phase, separately brought out.
6 Thermal
Protection
(Conventional
Motors
≤ 500 HP, > 15 HP)
Embedded PTC 1000 Thermistors
7 Thermal
Protection
(Submersible >
30 HP or any VFD
motors)
Embedded PTC 1000 Thermistors
8 Vibration
monitoring
Vibration monitoring required on air blower motors or
other motors determined to be critical/high-cost assets. 9 Inverter Duty
VFD driven motors shall be designed to operate
within the speed range required without overheating
and shall have insulation suitable for inverter duty.
10 Jam Protection For motors driving loads prone to jamming provide electronic shear pin protection.
11 Starting Soft starter or VFD rated duty for all motors 60HP and larger.
1078
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 75 Table 66 Transformers
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Non-Linear Loads
"K" rated units for anticipated low voltage non-linear
loads (e.g., solid state ballasts, Uninterruptible Power Supplies [UPS], etc.).
Table 67 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 General Provide UPS at all PLC locations and network
switch locations
2 Communication Ethernet I/P.
It shall be able to communicate to SCADA the condition
and the condition of the system power input.
3 Maintenance
Bypass
UPSs shall be provided with maintenance bypass
switches for service during operation.
4 Power Conditioning The UPS shall also provide power conditioning for sensitive control equipment and instruments.
5 Backup Time 2 hours (min)
Table 68 Interior Lighting
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Type LED
2 Compliance/
Controls
Comply with California Title 24 energy conservation
regulations, including occupancy sensing and
daylight controls.
Applicable ADA requirements for emergency
exit lighting
Additional security requirements outlined below.
3 Corrosive Areas Sealed fixtures in process areas where corrosion may be a problem
4 Emergency Lighting Incorporate emergency battery backup lighting fixtures for life safety and ingress/egress during power outages. 5 Lighting Provide adequate lighting for routine O&M activities.
Table 69 Exterior Lighting
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Type LED
2 Controls/
Compliance
Comply with California Title 24 energy conservation
regulations.
Comply with International Dark Sky Association
requirements.
Generally, control shall be via photocell and time
clock with manual override.
Applicable ADA requirements for access and egress
lighting
Additional security requirements outlined below.
3 Requirement
Switch-on lights shall be provided under each canopy
to work on the major process equipment.
Exterior fixtures to provide a lighting level suitable for process area maintenance, safety and security.
1079
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 76 Table 70 Conduit
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 General Use Galvanized rigid steel (GRS)
2 Duct Bank
Non-metallic PVC.
Concrete encased with reinforcing steel.
Incorporate 20 percent spare conduits dedicated
for use with this phase of installation.
Allow conduit for future expansion
3 Future Expansion
Provide all required underground conduit for future
expansion (e.g., Trident Units, Influent/Effluent
Pumps)
Table 71 Conductors
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Material Copper.
Aluminium conductors not acceptable.
2 Conductor Type
(Power)
Low voltage (600 Volt), type THHN or XHHW
3 Signal Wiring
Twisted Shielded Pairs.
300 V will be acceptable except where 600 V is
required per NEC.
4 Network Cabling Cat 5E
Table 72 Harmonic Filter
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Requirement
Mitigate electrical harmonics generated from solid
state/non-linear devices such as UPS, computer
power supplies, solid state lighting ballasts, and
VFDs.
2 Harmonic Limits Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard 519 for general systems.
Table 73 Receptacles and Ancillary Equipment
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Location
Dual 120V receptacles shall be installed with suitable
spacing to provide access to power within 100 ft of
any location of any new above ground facility, and at
any major equipment locations or control panels.
3 phase, 480 V welding outlets shall be installed at
major equipment locations.
Location and type of receptacles within the
Office/SCADA/Lab shall be per the California
Building Code, Title 24, and NEC requirements.
2 Type
Receptacles in main plant area (exposed to
wash-down etc.) or outdoors shall be UL
listed weatherproof, industrial type.
3 Disconnect for
Chemical Dosing,
Metering and Sump
Pumps
A control and power quick-disconnect plug and
receptacle shall be provided for chemical dosing and
metering pumps and sump pumps.
Allows for ease of
replacement and
relocation without
the need for an
electrician.
The receptacle and plug must have an IP68 rating
with the attachment plug cap inserted or removed.
1080
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 77 Table 74 Backup Generator
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Manufacturers
Caterpillar No equal
Generator shall be on the SCAQMD list of approved
generators
2 Protection
Engine shutdown on high water temperature,
low oil pressure, overspeed, and engine
overcrank.
Limits as selected by manufacturer.
3 Controls Local control panel with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE
selector switch on engine- generator control panel.
4 Accessories Fuel pressure gage, water temperature gage, lube oil pressure gage on engine/generator control panel.
5 Enclosure NEMA MG1, Open, Drip Proof.
6 Fuel Storage
Mount on skid base with integral fuel storage.
Double wall fuel tank.
48 hours storage for full load operation.
7 Alternator
Line to Neutral Voltage THD ≤ 5 %
Line to Natural Individual Harmonic THvD: ≤ 3%
3 rd Harmonics: practically zero
Subtransient Reactance: ≤ 12%
8 Voltage Regulator
Volts/Hertz exciter-regulator: to match engine and
generator characteristics.
Voltage regulation: plus or minus 1% from no load
to full load.
Manual controls: ability to adjust voltage droop,
voltage level (plus or minus 5% ) and voltage gain
via control panel.
9 Governor
Electronic governor to maintain engine speed within
0.5%, steady state, and 5%, no load to full load, with
recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following
sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for
manual operation and adjustment.
10 Load Bank
Required for standby generator sets where the full
load is not available for regular maintenance testing
or start-up services.
If load banks are to be
hired for testing
instead of permanently
installed, design shall
include suitable facility
for connecting
temporary load bank
11 Communications Ethernet
Acceptable Protocols: Industrial IP, Modbus TCP
12 Signals
Hard-wired signals (form c, dry contacts): Fault,
Running, Available (Remote & not faulted), Battery
Low.
All signals shall go
back to SCADA –
fail/run/error, etc.
Signal for the fuel
indicator at the
generator
1081
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 78 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
13 Local Alarm
and Status
Monitoring
Low oil pressure (alarm & shutdown)
Oil pressure sender failure (alarm)
Low coolant temperature (alarm)
High coolant temperature (alarm & shutdown).
Engine temperature sender failure (alarm).
Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown selectable)
Fail to crank (shutdown).
Fail to start/overcrank (shutdown)
Overspeed (shutdown)
Low/high DC voltage (alarms)
Weak battery (alarm).
Low fuel day tank (alarm)
Low/high AC voltage (shutdowns)
Under frequency (shutdown).
Over current (alarm & shutdown)
Short circuit (shutdown).
Ground fault (alarm)
Overload (alarm).
Emergency stop (shutdown)
Engine oil pressure (psi or kPA)
Engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)
Engine oil temperature (degrees F or C)
Engine speed (rpm)
Number of hours of operation (hours)
Number of start attempts
Battery voltage (DC volts)
Table 75 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Manufacturers Eaton No equal.
2 Description
NEMA ICS 10. Provide two options:
Close-Transition
Open-Transition
For client selection
Suitable for use in standby systems in NFPA 70.
Conform to NFPA 110.
Manual operation conforms to UL 1008 Safe operation
under full load conditions.
3 Configuration Electrically operated.
Mechanically held in both operating positions.
4 Rating Continuous duty.
Three (3) poles with solid neutral.
5 Interrupting
Capacity
100% continuous rating.
6 Withstand
Current
Rating
14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with
molded case circuit breaker.
Non-welding contact when used upstream feeder
overcurrent device available fault current specified.
7 Service Conditions
NEMA ICS10
Temperature: -40 to +50 degrees C Relative
Humidity: up to 95%
8 Enclosure
Open switch in electrical equipment cabinet.
Visible main transfer switch.
Indicating lights: Normal Source, alternate
Source, connected to normal and connected to
emergency are accepted.
9 Enclosure
Auxiliary
Contacts
Rated no ≤ 10 amps at 120 volts, 60 Hz Loss of
Utility Power.
Preferred Source Active.
1082
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 79 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Alternate Source Active.
10 Preferred
Source
Monitor
Monitor normal source voltage and frequency.
Initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85%
or frequency varies more than 3% from rated
nominal value.
11 Alternate
Source
Monitor
Monitor alternate source voltage and frequency.
Inhibit transfer when voltage is below 85% or
frequency varies more than 3% from rated
nominal value.
12 In-Phase Monitor Inhibit transfer until source.
Load is within 10 electrical degrees.
13 Sequence of
Operation
Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine
Generator: Upon initiation by normal source monitor.
Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine
Generator: 0 to 30 seconds, adjustable and factory
set at 30 seconds.
Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon
initiation by normal source monitor and permission by
alternate source monitor.
Time Delay before Transfer to Alternate Power
Source: 0 to 300 seconds, adjustable, and factory
set at 3 seconds.
Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon
permission by normal source monitor.
Time Delay before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 30
minutes, adjustable; and factory set at 5 minutes.
Time delay shall be automatically defeated in the
event of alternate source failure, provide normal
source is available.
Time Delay before Engine Shutdown: 0 to 30 minutes,
adjustable, of unloaded operation factory set at 10
minutes.
14 Engine Exerciser
Generator exerciser timer User programmable run
times selectable between load transfer and engine run
only fail-safe feature that will retransfer the switch to preferred source during exercise period.
Bypass exerciser control when normal source fails
during exercising.
15 Alternate System
Exerciser
Transfer load to alternate source during engine
exercising period.
16 Startup and Testing
ATS and Generator testing shall be performed to
demonstrate functionality and operation of new and
existing equipment in an emergency.
If Startup and Testing
is performed prior to
installation of all
equipment, then
Startup and Testing
shall be repeated after
all equipment have
been installed.
Performance of
backup generator shall
be demonstrated
continuously for 48
hours.
Local and Remote testing shall be performed at full
load.
1083
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 80
6.7 Instrumentation and Controls
6.7.1 Process Control Narrative
Process controls will be set up according to industry standards and be connected to the new SCADA system.
Controls should allow automatic operation to the industry standard and the extent possible. The following section summarizes a conceptual process control narrative for DBE consideration.
Aeration control will allow dissolved oxygen (DO) concentration control in each aerated zone and swing zone. DO setpoints will be operator adjustable and operators will be able to schedule DO concentrations in 30-minute intervals for a diurnal or weekly schedule. The control system will be able to maintain DO setpoints at concentrations as low as 0.2 mg/L and as high as 2.5 mg/L. The DO control system would use cascade control with airflow control for the primary loop and DO control for the secondary loop. Blower control will be based on pressure control, including the option of operating in most-open-valve mode. Minimum airflows to each zone will be operator adjustable and initially set to an airflow equivalent to 0.1 scfm/sf or the minimum airflow required to meet the minimum diffuser airflow as recommended by the diffuser supplier, whichever is higher. Blower controls will include protections against blower damage due to low airflow and overpressure.
If needed, blower controls can also be based on flow or ammonia control in addition to DO and pressure control.
MLR pumps will include VFDs which will be set up to operate at an operator adjustable ratio to the primary effluent equalization pumps divided by the number of Aeration Basins in service, i.e. the feed flow to the aeration basins, per basin. The ratio will be adjustable between 2.0 and 5.0.
Solids retention time (SRT) is the most important parameter to be controlled at any activated sludge plant, including MBR plants. Ideally, SRT control should be set up to achieve a steady waste activated sludge (WAS) flow rate that is only adjusted when either the SRT setpoint changes (which may be done seasonally) or when a train or a basin is taken out of service. t is possible to achieve this condition when the return activated sludge (RAS) ratio (RAS flow/Influent flow, where influent flow to the MBR system is the flow provided by the equalization pumps) is maintained at a constant value. At the WWTP, the RAS ratio will be controlled by the ratio between the flow provided by the mixed liquor transfer pumps, transferring mixed liquor from the aeration basins to the membrane tanks. The target for this flow ratio will be 5.0, meaning the RAS ratio will be 4.0. The required WAS mass flow is equal to the biomass inventory divided by the target SRT. In the MBR system, the MLSS concentration in the aeration basin can be calculated as a fraction of the MLSS concentration in the membrane tank, where the fraction is 80% (= R/[R + 1]) when the typical RAS ratio of 4.0 is used. The solids inventory is the sum of the solids inventory in the aeration basins and the membrane tanks. If the WAS is taken from the RAS stream, which has a slightly higher MLSS concentration, the WAS flow is:
QWAS = (0.8.VAB + VMT)/SRT
Where QWAS = WAS flow rate, gpd
VAB = Volume of the aeration basin in service, gal
VMT = Volume of the membrane tank in service, gal
SRT = Target SRT, days
If the ML pumps cannot maintain the target RAS ratio of 4.0 for any reason, the 0.8 factor in the equation can be adjusted as required.
Using a stable WAS flow would help the MBR system to produce a consistent effluent quality and maintain the biomass at a stable point for optimal performance.
To minimize the accumulation of scum in the system, the WAS should be drawn from the surface of the RAS channel once scum would have had a chance to float, so that scum is wasted preferentially and the so-called scum SRT is less than the system SRT. This approach is also described as a classifying selector by some consultants.
6.7.2 Level of Automation
The Project shall include a high level of automation. The plant operators will manually initiate the wastewater treatment plant's start-up from the Project’s control system. After operator initiation, the control system will manage the plant startup sequences, normal operation, and shutdown sequence fully automatically. 1084
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 81 Every skid will have its own PLC control system and Human Machine Interface (HMI) and shall be Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system (SCADA) transparent, i.e., seamlessly integrated into the site SCADA system.
Plant operations will be monitored and controlled via a local operator station using an owner- and engineer-approved SCADA Platform. A development workstation will have the PLC programming software installed, as well as the SCADA platform Integrated Development Environment (IDE) to develop and maintain the project Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs).
Plant monitoring and control will be predominantly carried out from the Central Control Room on Operator Workstations located in the plant administration building. Further control will be available through HMIs located at critical areas of the plant, locations to be confirmed during project design.
The design will enable remote off-site access for operator monitoring, technician diagnostics, and control modifications under agreed security measures. If requested, allowance will be made for the transfer of historical data from the local historian to a central monitoring location.
The capability will be provided to connect laptop HMI units through a local secure, encrypted wireless network throughout the site to facilitate commissioning and maintenance activities over the life of the plant.
6.7.3 Plant Control Architecture
The following section summarizes a conceptual plant control architectural plan for DBE consideration.
The Plant LAN will be a secure Control Center Network within a single control area. The upper-level supervisory control network connects Control Center servers, application servers, and HMIs over Ethernet. The control servers and application object servers are installed in a server rack, and each is configured in redundant pairs with secondary network interfaces. The servers host the Wonderware System Platform. The owner and engineer shall approve the number of HMI workstations to be provided for operators and supervisors and at the security gate for monitoring and control.
Supplied Architecture shall:
Be scalable, as shown in Figure 10.
Be flexible from a connectivity standpoint, as shown in Figure 11. Employ virtualization, as shown in Figure 11.
Provide redundancy at the control and supervisory levels, as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 10 An example of a scalable plant architecture
1085
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 82 Figure 11 The solution shall have the flexibility of connectivity and manageability using thin clients.
Table 76 SCADA system elements descriptions
System Element Description
Process Automation
System Server
(PASS)
The PASS is a required system element that can host displays, alarms, and data connections to controllers. Multiple PASS servers can be used to provide additional system capacity or to create logical segregation of application content that is based on the process.
For smaller systems, the PASS - C (consolidated PASS server) supports functions that otherwise would be hosted on application servers.
Operator workstation
(OWS) and
Application server
(AppServ-OWS)
The OWS and AppServ-OWS provides an interactive graphical interface to monitor and control the process. The AppServ-OWS uses Microsoft® Remote Desktop Services (RDS) technology to serve multiple instances of the OWS as thin clients from one server. The technology provides for FactoryTalk® View SE thin clients that run applications and process data on a remote computer.
Engineering
workstation (EWS)
and Application
server (AppServEWS)
The EWS and AppServ-EWS provide a central location for configuring the system and monitoring/maintaining system operation. The AppServ-EWS uses Microsoft Remote Desktop Services (RDS) technology to serve multiple instances of the EWS as thin clients from one server. The technology provides for SCADA HMI thin clients that run applications and process data on a remote computer.
AppServ-Asset
management
The asset management server is a centralized tool for managing automation-related asset information (Rockwell Automation and third-party assets). The asset management application server includes capabilities for asset inventory, source control, audits, change notifications, reporting, and security.
AppServ-Info Data management storage can include a Historian or Microsoft SQL server.
Controllers/PLCs The Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) support continuous process and batch applications. These controllers also support discrete and motion applications. 1086
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 83 Figure 12 Architecture elements virtualization
Figure 13 Typical resilient DLR topology
The lower-level process control network connects the servers to the PLCs over Ethernet. The PLCs communicate via approved Ethernet protocols with compatible actuators, motors, instruments, analyzers, and other control elements at the field level. Approved Ethernet-based protocols are Ethernet/IP, Modbus/TCP, or other Engineerapproved protocols.
Secure wireless access points will connect operators' mobile tablets to access HMI and SCADA systems.
6.7.4 Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
Smart MCCs shall be used throughout the project. All MCCs will be connected to PLCs; all motors are controlled in Local (hand)/Remote (Auto) modes with proper signaling and indication for all normal and alarm conditions locally and remotely. Local PLCs control the operation of motors and provide data for the SCADA system. PLCs and VFDs will be securely connected to the network.
1087
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 84
6.7.5 Instrumentation and Field Devices
The following equipment shall be standardized to reduce the inventory of spares and minimize the time for replacement:
Instruments
Installation Materials
Tube and Tube Fittings
Manifolds
6.7.5.1 Instrument Specific Requirements
Local Control Panels-Local control switches and indicators shall be used where required to address specific safety or maintenance concerns. Otherwise, all manual control will be available via SCADA only (locally via wireless tablets).
6.7.5.2 Instrument Mounting and Access
All process instruments in wet areas will be housed in IP68, NEMA 4 enclosures (NEMA4x in chemical areas), or vendor requirements, whichever is more stringent. Access will be considered in the selection of instrumentation. Instruments will be mounted at a working level between three and five feet above the operating floor. Process indicators and indicating transmitters will be mounted in a position that is readable by an operator without requiring the use of a ladder or the building of platforms. Temperature sensors will be installed and clamped in tube racks. The excess capillary tube will be coiled and clamped to the mounting stand below the instrument. Instruments located near each other will be grouped to the maximum extent possible on a common mounting stand, wall bracket, or instrument rack.
Instrument impulse lines will incorporate a blowdown leg or contamination accumulation leg for the removal of dirt and moisture.
Instrumentation taps to process lines will be isolated by a root valve at the connection. Isolation valves for taps to process lines will be ¼-turn ball valves of materials compatible with the process fluid.
Isolation valves for chemical service will match isolation valves used in other portions of that chemical piping. Analyzers for primary process lines will be installed in bypass assemblies external to the main process headers to allow routine maintenance.
Analyzer assemblies will include an isolation valve at each process connection tap, pressure regulator, and manual sample valve, rotameter flow element with integral flow metering valve, check valve, miscellaneous piping, and fittings.
Analyzers will be generally panel mounted and located in close proximity to the relevant sample point in a designated analyzer room (where possible) for improved access to common operational and maintenance activities on these units.
The analyzer waste streams will be discharged into and drained to a common collection point for either pumped return to a specified point along the process or drained to waste. All analyzers will have “no flow" detection and pressure and flow control valves on the inlet to ensure a constant rate of feed through the analyzer.
1088
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 85 Manual sample points will be provided for sampling water at various points throughout the main process, typically with each change in process unit and upstream and downstream of chemical dosage points for manual checks of water quality and chemistry.
Assemblies for analyzer sensors that must remain wetted at all times (e.g., pH sensors) will incorporate a vacuum breaker in the drain piping.
Sample drain will be routed to a hub drain.
6.7.6 Controllers and Input/Output (I/O) Modules
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) to be Allen-Bradley, Siemens, or Modicon PLCs in that order of preference.
Current Versions - Each PLC CPU, I/O module, specialty module, and communication module will be the latest version, supported by the manufacturer for the life of the system. Programming Software, PLC, and SCADA IDEs shall use object-oriented programming based on function blocks for all typical equipment and functions in accordance with IEC- 61131-3. All CPUs will be equipped with non-volatile memory cards to preserve programs. Installed I/O capacity will include 25% spare I/O points. PLC rack power supplies will have the capacity to support at least 25% I/O expansion. The above requirements should also apply to vendor-supplied PLCs. I/O Modules Discrete input modules will be 24VDC only. Discrete output modules will be used to trigger interposing relays (unless an isolated output module is used.) Analog modules will be 4-20 mA 24VDC isolated input and output channel design. Analog input isolators will be used. All analog inputs will be scaled to specified engineering units at the PLC programming level.
High and low alarm trip points will be provided at 90% and 10% of the span for all analog points unless otherwise specified in P&ID and on IO lists. All analog signals exiting the buildings to or from devices or instruments will have transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS). RTD modules will be used for RTD inputs.
6.7.6.1 Spare Hardware
20% spares for I/O modules, CPUs, backplanes, and power supplies in addition to any other OEM recommended hardware.
6.7.6.2 Backups
A flexible backup system shall be implemented into the proposed system. Backup copies will be collected at minimum every six months of the transitional operation period.
6.7.7 General Instrumentation and Controls Requirements The following tables contain the Engineering Design Guidelines for I&C criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
6.7.7.1 Instrumentation and Field Devices
Table 77 General
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Standardization
Standardize on the following equipment throughout
the Project to reduce spare supply inventories and
minimize rework time for replacement:
Instruments
Installation materials
1089
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 86 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Tube and tube fittings
Manifolds
Variations from this requirement shall only be allowed
by specific approval of City of Banning. Manufacturer
or DBE preference shall not be justification for failure to comply with this requirement. Only sound,
engineering supported justifications will be
considered.
2 Communications Field bus to be nominated by the DBE to suit PLC.
3 Grounding and
Bonding
In accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and
as specified elsewhere.
4 Control System
Integrator
Control System Integrators Association (CSIA)
Certified Integrator; OR Ignition Certified System
Integrator; OR demonstrate similar recent
experience using the same PLC hardware, SCADA
software and networked instruments and MCCs
5 Duplicate
Instruments for
Different
Purposes
As a general rule, measuring points and measuring
equipment for interlocking and protection purposes
shall be separate and not combined with measuring
equipment for monitoring or automatic control
equipment.
For flow measurement one common primary element
can be used. Signals to be processed in several
systems shall be suitably repeated and mutually
decoupled to avoid interaction.
6 Location
All instrument materials and construction shall be
suitable for the location in which they are installed.
Consider wet, corrosive, and hazardous areas in the
selection of instrumentation.
6.7.7.2 Instrument Specific Requirements
Table 78 General
Item Parameter Criteria Application
1 Level - Radar
Manufacturer: Endress & Hauser, or equal.
Measurement Range: 0 % through 100 % level.
Measurement Resolution: 0.1 inch or less.
Measurement Accuracy: +/- 0.25 % of measured
distance for distances greater than 3.3 feet.
Consider where
foaming may be an
issue (in cases where
ultrasonic LT may not
be suitable).
2 Level - Ultrasonic
Manufacturer: Endress & Hauser, or equal
Measurement Range: 0 % through 100 % level.
Measurement Resolution: 0.1 inch or less.
Measurement Accuracy: +/- 0.25 % of measured
distance for distances greater than 3.3 feet.
Non-contact level
monitoring.
3 Level - Pressure
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, or equal.
Measurement Accuracy: +/- 0.1 % of range.
Where non-contact
level monitoring is not
required and ease of
access to the
transmitter is desired
(e.g. water tanks).
4 Level - Submersible
Hydrostatic
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, or equal.
Measurement Accuracy: +/- 0.25 %
Covered basins.
5 Level - Conductivity
Probe
Manufacturers: Warrick, or equal.
6 Level - Float Switch Manufacturers: Magnetrol, Kari, Flygt, equal. Level alarm detection. 1090
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 87 Item Parameter Criteria Application
Mercury shall not be acceptable in float switch
devices.
Not used for primary
process control
applications.
7 Pressure -
Absolute
(Diaphragm
Type)
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, or equal
Accuracy: +/- 0.1 % of range
Chemical Installation: Isolation Diaphragm Seal
Calibration/Testing: 3-way valve manifold for
calibration/testing and tapping point for pressure
gauge.
Pipe pressure, pump
discharge/suction,
general process
pressure.
8 Pressure -
Differential
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, equal
Accuracy: +/- 0.1 % of range
Chemical Installation: Isolation Diaphragm Seal
3-way valve manifold for calibration/testing and
tapping point for pressure gauge.
Pressure drop across
filters, etc.
9 Pressure - Switch Manufacturers: Ashcroft or similar approved 10 Flow -
Electromagnetic
(Full pipe)
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, No equal
Installation: Vault or above ground. Shall not be
directly buried.
Maintenance: Provide maintenance bypass for
critical applications where a bypass or standby
does not exist.
Accuracy: Max 1 % of measured, for flow velocities
between 10 % and 100 % of full scale.
Grounding: Grounding rings or protective shield
when installed in non-conductive pipe.
Repeatability: Max 0.25 % of full scale.
All primary and
secondary process
flows. DBE shall
provide engineering
justification for any
alternative proposed.
11 Flow - Open
Channel
Manufacturers: Endress & Hauser, no equal
Accuracy: Product shall be chosen for maximum
accuracy based on the dimensions and flow pattern
of the channel.
12 Flow- Air Manufacturers: FCI Insertion, or similar
approved
13 Flow - Liquid Switch Manufacturers (thermal flow switch): Dwyer, IFM, or similar approved
Pump no flow, sample
line no flow, etc.
14 Flow - Air Switch Manufacturers: FCI, or similar approved Ventilation/Extraction fan no flow, etc.
15 Limit - Switch Manufacturer: Square D, Class 9007 Type C, or similar approved
16 Temperature -
Transmitter
Manufacturer: Endress & Hauser, or equal Process temperature 17 Temperature -
Switch
Manufacturer: Ashcroft, Allen Bradley, or similar
approved.
18 Vibration -
Transmitter
Manufacturer: Bently Nevada, or similar approved. Vibration monitoring for large pumps, motors,
blowers, etc.
19 Residual Chlorine
Analyzer
Manufacturer: Hach CLF10sc, with sc200
controller no equal
Type: Free chlorine type.
Accuracy: Max + 0.5% of reading
Repeatability: Max 0.2% of reading.
20 Turbidity Analyzer
Manufacturer: Hach, no equal
Accuracy: Max 2% of NTU reading
Repeatability: Max 1% of NTU reading.
21 TOC Analyzer
Manufacturer: Suez Sievers M5310C, no equal
Accuracy/reliability: Max + 3% of reading or
0.3 mgC/l.
Compensation: Automatic compensation for
atmospheric pressure changes
Other Requirements: In addition to the above
Regulatory monitoring
for plant product water.
1091
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 88 Item Parameter Criteria Application
requirements, DBE specification shall include
requirements for self-testing and self- cleaning
requirements, sample system and pumps, service
frequency, cycle time, etc.
22 pH Analyzer
Manufacturer: Hach, no equal
Accuracy: Max + 0.5% of reading
Repeatability: Max 0.2% of reading.
23 Conductivity
Analyzer
Manufacturer: Hach, no equal
Accuracy: Max 3% of reading
Repeatability: Max 0.2% of reading
24 TDS
Manufacturer: Hach, UT5300, no equal
Accuracy:
- ±2% or 0.01 NTU from 0 - 40 NTU
- ±10% of reading from 40 - 1000 NTU based
on Formazin primary standard
Table 79 Junction Boxes
Item Parameter Criteria Preferred
Equipment
1 Mounting Mounted accessible from floor or platforms.
2 Doors Doors will be able to open without interference.
Table 80 Local Control Panels
Item Parameter Criteria Preferred
Equipment
1 Location Located close to the equipment.
Local control switches and indicators only where
required to address specific safety or maintenance
concerns, otherwise all manual control shall be
available via SCADA only (accessible locally via
wireless tablet computers)
2 Local-OffRemote Switch
and Control
Devices,
indicator lights
and
Pushbuttons
Where required, LOR switch shall allow an operator to
take manual control of a device or piece of equipment
and operate it from that panel manually.
LCPs should be protected from the weather and/or
be appropriate for the environment that they are
operated in. Local Control Panels (LCP) exposed to
direct sunlight shall include sunshade protection for
any exposed electronic displays or instrument
displays.
SCADA network side shall be all hard connections.
Wireless and Bluetooth shall be turned off.
Table 81 Instrument Mounting and Access
Item Parameter Criteria Preferred
Equipment
1 Housing
All process instruments in wet areas shall be housed
in IP68, NEMA 4 enclosures (NEMA 4X in chemical
areas), or vendor requirements, whichever is more
stringent.
2 Access
Access shall be considered in the selection of
instrumentation. For example, tanks shall be
measured using pressure at the base of the tank
1092
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 89 Item Parameter Criteria Preferred
Equipment
wherever practical, to remove the need for
maintenance access to the top of tanks.
3 Instrument Height Instruments mounted at a working level between 3 and 5 feet above the operating floor.
4 Indicator Height
Process indicators and indicating transmitters
mounted in a position that is readable by an operator
without requiring the use of a ladder or the building
of platforms.
5 Capillary Tube
Installation
Temperature and pressure instruments capillary
sensors will be installed and clamped in tube racks.
Excess capillary tube will be coiled and clamped to
the mounting stand below the instrument.
6 Grouping
Instruments located near each other will be grouped
to the maximum extent possible on a common
mounting stand, wall bracket or instrument rack.
7 Dirt/ Moisture
Removal
Instrument impulse lines will incorporate a blowdown
leg or contamination accumulation leg for the
removal of dirt and moisture.
8 Isolation Valves
Instrumentation taps to process lines will be
isolated by a root valve at the connection.
Isolation valves for taps to process lines will be 1/4- turn ball valves of materials compatible with the
process fluid.
Isolation valves for chemical service will match
isolation valves used in other portions of that
chemical piping.
9 Analyzers
Analyzers for primary process lines will be installed in bypass assemblies external to the main process
headers to allow routine maintenance.
Analyzer assemblies will include an isolation valve at
each process connection tap, pressure regulator,
manual sample valve, rotameter flow element with
integral flow metering valve, check valve,
miscellaneous piping and fittings.
Generally, panel mounted and located in close
proximity to the relevant sample point in a
designated analyzer room (where possible) for
improved access for common operational and
maintenance activities on these units.
The analyzer waste streams will be discharged into
a tundish and drained to a common collection point
for either pumped return to a specified point along
the process or drained to waste.
All analyzers will have no flow detection and pressure
and flow control valves on the inlet to ensure a
constant rate of feed through the analyzer.
Manual sample points will be provided for sampling
water at various points through the main process,
typically with each change in process unit and
upstream and downstream of chemical dose points
for manual checks of water quality and chemistry.
Assemblies for analyzer sensors which must remain
wetted at all times (e.g., pH sensors) will incorporate a vacuum breaker in the drain piping.
Sample drain will be routed to a hub drain.
1093
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 90
6.8 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System
(SCADA)
6.8.1 Approved SCADA platforms
SCADA systems shall include all components needed to:
o connect to the PLCs, field devices, and databases,
o include Historians, reporting platforms, and flexibility to generate reports as needed by the Owner and Operators,
o provide secure ways to connect and utilize the system with the latest and greatest security mechanisms,
o provide multi-level HMIs compatible with tablets and smartphones, and o provide structured alarming and annunciation, and alarms servers for multi-media alarming (emails, text messages …) compatible with tablets and smart phones. Approved SCADA system platforms are as follows:
o A control system integrated SCADA platform (e.g. if the control system is Rockwell Automation (PlantPAx or similar) FactoryTalk View SE system to be used; however if the control system is Siemens, the TIA should be used.
o Wonderware System Platform (latest version).
o An Owner and Engineer-approved platform.
Perpetual licenses will be used unless otherwise approved by the Owner and the Engineer. The selected system integrator will incorporate all the vendor screens in the final SCADA screens and will develop screens for all other equipment, for integration at the control room. New screens will be developed following the Owner and the Engineer’s SCADA standards. All analog and discrete inputs to the PLC will be displayed on the SCADA screens. Real-time and historical trending for all analog inputs to the PLC will be available from the local servers. Screen displays will be arranged using a hierarchy:
Show only information that needs to be immediately available for operations (system overview) Poke points for more details on a particular process or piece of equipment. Further poke points for control stations for devices such as pumps and valves. A hierarchy of alarms shall be specified, which will be adjustable by the operators. Each alarm shall be classified with a corresponding value representing criticality. The system will present the alarms in different ways based on the criticality, per the District's SCADA standards. All alarm functions shall be carried out at the PLC level. All alarms shall display on a common alarm screen.
All alarms must be acknowledged by the plant operating staff before they can be cleared. Some alarms may be cleared from the SCADA. Others will need a local reset. The philosophy will be based on safety and equipment protection.
No alarm will clear automatically until it has been properly acknowledged. 1094
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 91 Equipment safety interlocks specified to shutdown equipment "independent of control mode" or other similar descriptions will be active regardless of PLC (MANUAL/AUTO) or field control station (ON, LOCAL/REMOTE) operating status.
Other software generated alarms will remain active independent of operating mode, but only affect specified control actions in AUTO (PLC) and REMOTE (field) operating modes. For all equipment controlled by the PLC, the equipment will receive and display applicable statuses and alarm signals, such as operating mode (LOCAL, REMOTE, etc.), operating status (ON, OPEN, CLOSED, etc.), and alarm status (FAIL, LOCKED-OUT, etc.).
For multistate devices where actual digital input is not provided, provide PLC logic-based on the status of the other inputs to develop the remaining status. For example, for LOR switches use the status of the LOCAL and REMOTE inputs to develop and display the status of the OFF position. For all equipment controlled by the PLC, our DBE team will provide separate displays and poke points for the selection of AUTO/MANUAL operating modes. In AUTO mode, the device will be controlled by the PLC.
In MANUAL mode, the device will be operated by START/STOP and OPEN/CLOSE poke points, as appropriate. The workstation will display the current operating status of each device and an alarm if the equipment fails to respond to a command signal after an operator-adjustable time period. PID control functions will be performed at the PLC with controller faceplate displays at the workstation. Standard PID control operator interface will be provided, including AUTO/MANUAL mode selection:
o In AUTO, the controller output will be based on the PID control function at the PLC. o In MANUAL, the output of the controller will be based on an operator set value. o Transfer between MANUAL and AUTO will be bumpless.
o At the workstation, DBE will provide AUTO/MANUAL selection poke points for PID-controlled equipment, with graphic loading displays for manual control. PID loop tuning parameters shall be available via SCADA but will require engineering login to make adjustments.
6.8.2 Typical Monitoring and Control
The following are some of the typical I/O signals that shall be monitored and used to control equipment by SCADA:
All Analog Transmitters - Transmitter Fail Alarm
Constant Speed Drive - Drive start/stop command, Drive running indication, Drive in auto or remote indication, Drive faulted, PLC calculated drive run time, Fail to Start/Stop, and Diagnostics (confirm specific parameters)
Variable Speed Drive - Drive start/stop command, Drive running indication, Drive in auto indication, Drive faulted, VFD speed set point, VFD speed feedback, PLC calculated drive run time, and Diagnostics (confirm specific parameters)
Chemical Dosing Feed System - Chemical volume quantity used calculated values.
6.8.3 Control Philosophy
The control system will be fully automated so that, as far as practical, all day-to-day operational adjustments and reporting can be conducted from the SCADA screens. The level of automation will be consistent with the staffing requirements for the plant.
Skid vendor screens will be incorporated on the SCADA HMI, such that all parameters can be monitored and controlled except where safety concerns dictate local control only or where controls are related to maintenance tasks that can only be carried out locally anyway. 1095
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 92 Alarms for control network failures will be incorporated including Ethernet switches, PLCs, or any network communication where available.
Local manual override will be accomplished with a hard-wired switch except where personnel, equipment, or the process are protected by equipment software interlocks that need to be maintained at all times. The system will not be able to create a safety issue for the local operator. For example, remote operation should not be allowed if a local manual override is selected. Shutdown of the plant units will be fully automated.
Recovery after a power outage or shutdown will be mostly automatic but will require operator intervention for the process to begin and may require additional operator intervention through the startup sequence as determined during the plant design in order to ensure safely and compliance requirements are met. Automatic and manual operation of the system will be done from the Operator Workstations (OWS) and from wireless tablet devices. Additional remote-control access may be incorporated during the transitional operation period using RDP and VPN access built into the SCADA Virtual Servers and Virtual Machines systems.
6.8.4 System Integration & Testing
The selected system integrator shall incorporate all the vendor screens in the final SCADA screens and shall develop screens for all other equipment, for integration at the control room.
Factory acceptance testing and site acceptance testing (FAT and SAT) shall be performed and witnessed at minimum by The Engineer’s representative.
6.8.5 General SCADA Requirements
The following tables contain the Engineering Design Guidelines for SCADA criteria. The DBE is responsible to review and finalize these requirements for complete functioning facilities.
The table below describes the proposed plant network, from the Servers and Workstations to the PLC network. Any hardware or software requirements specified here may be modified with approval from City of Banning.
Table 82 System Specifications
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
SERVERS
1 Server Rack
One (1) server rack to be installed in the new server
room. Server rack slots will need to be accessible
from the front (for slot racks) and the rear (for cable management).
2 Servers
Minimum three (3) converged rack servers each with
the following specifications:
Two (2) CPUs
Eighteen (18) CPU cores
Eight (8) Network Interface Cards (NIC’s)
Hypervisor Servers are recommended to utilize
virtual machines to handle the server processes.
Servers will be redundant. If one server needs to be
taken offline for maintenance, two redundant servers
will still be active.
Ensure redundant
power supplies for this
hardware.
3 Network Switches
Minimum two (2) port-managed Layer 3
ethernet switches.
Ensure redundant
power supplies
(UPS) for this
hardware.
One ethernet switch will be configured for the
devices on the PLC/SCADA network.
1096
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 93 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
The other ethernet switch will be configured for
the devices on the City of Banning LAN.
4 Server Peripherals
Other server rack hardware should include local
KVM switch with keyboard and monitor for access
to the server and Network Time Server appliance
with four (4) isolated Network Interface Cards
(NIC’s) and GPS receiver
5 Server Capabilities
Server software capabilities, at a minimum,
should include:
Microsoft Windows Server 2019 OS, with HyperV
SQL Server 2019 Standard version
System Event Monitoring
Host Intrusion Detection and Antivirus agents for
each installed operating system with central
management and reporting
Host Intrusion and Detection Management
platform
System Data Log Management
Virtual Machines
Wonderware (Aveva) Server for configuring
graphics and HMI communication drivers
SCADA Active Directory
Servers must have capacity for redundant
storage of historical data (including old data
transferred from existing Historian).
6 Historical Data
DBE will need to design server storage space to
account for, at a minimum, the following Historical
data:
All analog I/O points at the WWTP, logged every
30 seconds
All motor run statuses at the WWTP plant,
logged on every change in status
All existing historical data, currently stored on
the existing servers at the City of Banning
Wastewater Treatment Plant Administrative
Building
7 Software
Licensing and
Versions
All licensing required for the server software,
workstation software, Wonderware software, and
Rockwell Automation Studio5000 software shall be
furnished by the DBE.
Support level for the
software licensing
should be specified
and agreed upon by
both the DBE and
City of Banning.
Furnish four (4) years extended Rockwell support
for the installed software.
Furnish five (5) years extended support for
installed Host Intrusion Detection and antivirus
software.
The DBE shall cover the update costs for the local
equipment as new versions of the software are
released, prior to Final Acceptance.
The DBE shall be responsible for costs associated
with any upgrade required to the software licenses
arising from incorrect specification, or changes
initiated by the DBE during the Performance
Acceptance period.
At the end of the Performance Acceptance period all
software shall be fully updated to the latest versions
provided by the manufacturer.
1097
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 94 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS
1 SCADA Room
Workstations
Minimum two (2) workstations (WS) in the SCADA
Room with video card capable of supporting a
minimum of twelve (12) independent high-resolution
monitors.
One workstation is for SCADA software only and
running on the PLC network. Minimum two (2) LED
monitors, 28” to 32” diameter. One must be wall
mount and one desk mount. Must have the
Wonderware (Aveva) Runtime application and the
Rockwell Automation Studio5000 application fully
licensed. No internet access.
Other workstation is for the CCTV system and
running on the City of Banning corporate LAN.
Minimum two (2) wall-mounted LED monitors. One
monitor for the CCTV system, 36” to 40” screen
diameter. Other monitor will be for operator
administrative tasks, 24” to 28” diameter. This
workstation will have internet access to allow
operators to check emails and attend VoIP calls.
Any additional workstations
2 Office
Workstations
Refer to Final Drawing for location and number of
workstations to be furnished.
3 Workstation
Specifications
Workstations must have minimum 16GB of RAM,
1TB Solid-State Hard Drive, and come with
keyboard, mouse, and speakers.
The workstations are required to have the Windows
10 Professional OS, Adobe Acrobat standard
standalone version and perpetual license, and
Microsoft 365 standalone applications installed
(Outlook, Word, Excel, etc.) with perpetual license.
4 Panel HMI’s
Each HMI shall be panel-mounted and have a
runtime version to allow operators to monitor and
control the WWTP process. Panel-mounted HMI’s
will be connected to the PLC network. HMI
specifications shall satisfy the minimum software
requirements. HMI shall be PanelView, Ignition
Edge, or engineer-approved equal.
HMI specifications to
be agreed upon
between DBE and
City of Banning.
PLC PANEL HARDWARE
1 Existing PLC
Replacement
Existing PLCs will be replaced with Allen-Bradley
CompactLogix 5370, CompactLogix 5380, or
engineer-approved equal PLCs.
Replacement PLCs shall have at minimum 2MB
of spare memory available after commissioning.
2 New PLCs
New PLC Panels will be Allen-Bradley CompactLogix
5370, CompactLogix 5380, or engineer-approved
equal PLCs.
New PLCs shall have at minimum 2MB of spare
memory available after commissioning.
3 Panel I/O
For all existing PLC panels, the panel enclosure will
remain. DBE will design a complete upgrade/
replacement of the panel hardware while utilizing
the space inside of existing panel enclosures.
PLC Total I/O count will need to account for 25%
spare I/O at each panel (new and existing).
Where integrating Modbus TCP IO, provide PLC
1098
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 95 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
rack-mouinted Modbus TCP cards that are
compatible with the furnished PLC.
4 Panel-to-Panel
Communications
All PLC panels and network hardware will
communicate via ethernet. Any existing network
protocols that are not ethernet will need to be
converted.
All new panel ethernet switches will have a
minimum of 8 ports and be listed as Managed and
Layer 2 by the manufacturer.
5 Fiber Testing
The DBE will coordinate testing of all existing fiber
runs for connectivity. Any fiber runs that are not
operational will need to be repaired/replaced.
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
1 Ethernet Protocol
Any network devices in the SCADA network that are
not communicating through Ethernet will need to be
converted to Ethernet protocol.
This includes any vendor package controllers that
need to communicate with the SCADA system.
Develop and implement a network segmentation
plan that uses firewalls and VLAN segmentation to
segregate network traffic.
2 Existing Fiber
Communications
The DBE will coordinate testing of all existing fiber
runs for connectivity. Any fiber runs that are not
operational will need to be repaired/replaced.
3 Wireless
All Wi-Fi connections shall be disabled, unless
absolutely required. If so, specific Wi-Fi connections
must be secured, monitored, and logged.
CYBERSECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
1 Accessibility
The Wonderware (Aveva) Server and Historian
log files should be accessible from the SCADA
Workstation. The SCADA system shall be
accessible remotely by SCADA operations staff.
Control capabilities
for remote access
shall be agreed upon
between DBE and
City of Banning.
2 SCADA Login and
Passwords
Require user specific operator login credentials for
access at all computerized host access points with a
minimum of seven (7) operator groups.
Prescribed automatic logout functionality (i.e.
logout upon 300 seconds of inactivity).
Login credentials to be managed in a similar way to
the City of Banning’s existing IT system login
credential. Remote logins will be required to include
two-factor authentication to allow access.
3 Default Passwords
Delete all default login credentials, and store
passwords in a secure location once
commissioning is completed.
4 Corporate LAN
There shall be no direct interface between the Plant
SCADA network and the Corporate LAN.
Secure transfer of data between the SCADA system
and Corporate LAN shall be managed by City of
Banning and shall not be compromised when the
DBE is integrating asset register data or SCADA
screens at the SCADA system.
A segmented Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) shall be
provided that blocks and restricts traffic from/to
SCADA LAN and Corporate LAN.
5 Cybersecurity Utilize industry best practice and design in 1099
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 96 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
Design accordance with ISA/IEC- 62443 Industrial Network and System Security standards.
Implement a defense in-depth approach to
cybersecurity.
Implement a zero-trust design.
Provide system operator notification indicating
system and device status, with controls that permit
manual and automatic blocking of network access
points and ethernet switch ports.
6 Cybersecurity
Workshops
The full extent of the cybersecurity requirements will
need to be discussed during workshops that include
the City of Banning, its representatives, and the DBE.
There will be a minimum of six (6) workshops with a
minimum allotted time of (20) hours. This time can be
allotted in any manner agreeable to both City of
Banning and the DBE.
Design decisions shall include input and final
direction given by City of Banning and its
representatives.
These workshops
are for discussing
cybersecurity
implementation
options and for
deciding on the final
security design
requirements for the
WWTP.
7 SCADA
Workshops
Four (4) training sessions (4-hours each).
Two (2) workshops for each group of City of
Banning.
Training on controls, alarm settings, modifying
settings, etc.
In addition to
functional testing
and I/O
verifications
SCADA MIGRATION
1 SCADA Migration
DBE shall prepare a SCADA Migration Plan that
outlines the steps that will be taken to install new
hardware and software as well as complete upgrades
to existing equipment and software while maintaining
operations at the WWTP.
SCADA Migration Plan shall list any required
shutdowns (quantity, timing, duration, systems
affected, etc.). Any shutdowns shall be in accordance
with overall project shutdown allowances.
DBE shall submit Draft SCADA Migration Plan to
City of Banning for review. DBE shall hold one (1) 4-
hour workshop with City of Banning and incorporate
any comments into updated SCADA Migration Plan.
DBE shall submit Final SCADA Migration Plan to City
of Banning for review and approval.
6.8.5.1 Design Deliverables
The I&C design deliverables will provide the framework for the system integrator to develop the PLC programs and configure the HMI system. While the PLC panels, PLC programming, and HMI configuration shall be furnished by the system integrator, the DBE shall be responsible for providing the necessary design deliverables to guide the programming and panel construction.
Details about the design deliverables and programming guidelines are described in the tables below. Any specifications below can be modified with approval from the City of Banning. 1100
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 97 Table 83 Design Deliverables
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
DESIGN DELIVERABLES
1 I/O List
List of all hard-wired I/O at each PLC panel
(including any remote I/O), including I/O channel
mapping
2 Register Map List of all signals to be communicated between PLCs, including register address mapping
3 Alarm List
List of every alarm and shutdown condition that will
require operator attention. Include any automatic
actions or required operator actions for alarm
conditions.
4 Process Control
Narratives
Create document to describe WWTP process in detail,
beginning with the automated process to be
programmed in the PLCs and including any operator
monitoring or control actions. This document should
be organized to describe each PLC’s individual control
processes and control loops as well as the PLC’s
interaction with other PLCs. Normal vs. Abnormal
process conditions at the plant should also be
detailed.
A draft control
narrative, which is
included in Section
6.7.1 of this DCR, has
been prepared by
City of Banning to
kick start this effort.
A cybersecurity control narrative shall be developed
that includes all server instances, workstation
instances, and detailed network functional
descriptions.
DBE shall conduct a preliminary workshop to
validate the scope and a minimum of two (2)
workshop before finalizing the Process Control
Narrative, each workshop shall be 2-4 hours in
duration.
5 HMI Screens List
Develop list of HMI screens for the system
integrator to build.
Verify with City
of Banning
Operations
6 Network List
List of all network devices, physical locations, IP
addresses, VLAN configurations, and gateway
information.
7 Equipment List List of all hardware, physical locations, manufacturer information, model numbers, etc.
Table 84 PLC Programming Specifications
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Programming
Upgraded PLCs
For each PLC program that is replacing an existing
PLC, program scope should encompass all I/O
mapping, controls, alarms, and logic from the
existing PLC. This program scope should be clearly
defined in the control narratives description for that
PLC.
2 PLC Programming
Standards
Ensure PLC programming practices in accordance
with IEC 61131-3 and comply with City of Banning
SCADA standards
3 Vendor Package
Systems
Vendor PLCs shall be the same type as the rest of
the site.
Vendor PLCs shall have processor program and
vital configuration information backed up in a similar
manner to the other site PLCs.
1101
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 98 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
4 Program
Modifications
A copy of the latest PLC program shall be saved to
the SCADA Workstation and backed up to the
Servers. Studio5000 shall be installed at the SCADA
Workstation to allow program modifications as
needed.
Latest version of Aveva (WonderWare) software, 1
developer license, 2 thick clients, and a pair of RDS
thin clients.
Table 85 HMI Configuration
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 HMI Screens List
HMI Screens list will include existing Wonderware
(Aveva) screens that the plant operators require
for the local SCADA and any screens or process
information from existing panel-mounted HMIs or
other packaged systems that have not been
incorporated into the existing Wonderware
screens.
Review with City of
banning Operations to
ensure all monitoring
and control data
points are accessible
from the SCADA
Workstation and all
SCADA Tablets.
2 Vendor
Package
Systems
The system integrator shall incorporate all the
necessary vendor data in the final SCADA screens.
3 Navigation/Alarm
Pane
Include a header or footer screen that is sized and
configured to always be displayed with any process
screen. This screen will contain navigation links, an
alarm banner, and critical process information to the
operator at all times.
4 Hard-wired
Signal
Monitoring
All hard-wired analog and discrete inputs to the
PLC will be displayed on the SCADA screens.
Real-time and historical trending for all analog inputs and run statuses to the PLC will be available from the
HMI screens.
5 Screen
Display
Hierarchy
Displays will be arranged using a hierarchy:
Show only information that needs to be
immediately available for operations (system
overview).
Poke points for more details on a particular
process or piece of equipment.
Further poke points for control stations for devices
such as pumps and valves, etc.
6 Alarm Hierarchy
A hierarchy of alarms shall be specified, which
will be adjustable by the operators.
Each alarm shall be classified with a
corresponding value representing criticality. The
system will present the alarms in different ways
based on the criticality, per City of Banning
SCADA standards.
7 Alarms
All alarm functions will be carried out at the PLC
level.
All alarms will display on a common alarm
screen.
All alarms must be acknowledged by the Plant
operating staff before they can be cleared.
Some alarms may be cleared from SCADA. Others
will need local reset. Philosophy shall be based on
safety and equipment protection.
No alarm will clear automatically until it has been
1102
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 99 Item Parameter Criteria Notes
properly acknowledged.
8 Proportional,
Integral,
Derivative (PID)
Control
PID control functions will be performed at the PLC
with controller faceplate displays at the workstation.
Standard PID control operator interface will be
provided, including AUTO/ MANUAL mode selection:
In AUTO, the controller output will be based on
the PID control function at the PLC.
In MANUAL, the output of the controller will be
based on an operator set value.
Transfer between MANUAL and AUTO will be
pumpless.
At the workstation, DBE will provide
AUTO/MANUAL selection poke points for PID
controlled equipment, with graphic loading
displays for manual control.
PID loop tuning parameters shall be available via
SCADA but will require engineering login to make
adjustments.
9 Standards New HMI screens shall be developed following City of Banning SCADA standards.
The following table includes some of the typical I/O signals that shall be monitored and used to control equipment or systems by SCADA.
Table 86 Typical Monitoring and Control
Item Parameter Monitoring & Control Signals Notes
1 All Analog
Transmitters
Transmitter Fail Alarm
2 Level Transmitters
Continuous level monitoring
PLC calculated high/low level alarm
PLC calculated high-high/low-low level alarm
3 Level Switches high/ low level alarms
high-high/low-low level alarms
4 Flow Transmitters Continuous flow monitoring PLC calculated flow totals PLC calculated high/low flow alarms
5 Flow Switches Flow alarms where applicable
6 Pressure
Transmitters
Continuous pressure monitoring
PLC calculated high/low pressure alarms
7 Analyzers
(pH/LEL/H2S/CL2/
DO etc.)
Continuous signal monitoring Dry
contact high/low level alarm
PLC calculated high-high/low-low level alarm
8 Temperature
Transmitters
Continuous temperature indication
PLC calculated high/low temperature alarm
9 Temperature
Switches
High temperature alarm Low temperature alarm
10 Open/Close
Valve or Gate
Valve open/close command.
Valve open/close position indication Valve in Auto or
Remote indication Valve fault indication.
11 Modulating Flow
Control Valve
Valve position set point Valve position feedback.
Valve open/close position indication if applicable.
Valve fault indication.
12 Constant Speed
Drive
Drive start/stop command Drive
running indication
Drive in auto or remote indication
Drive faulted (General Fault or Multiple Fault
Indicators, etc.)
PLC calculated drive run time
1103
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 100 Item Parameter Monitoring & Control Signals Notes
Failure to respond to command or change of status
when not commanded.
Diagnostics (DBE to confirm specific
parameters)
13 Variable Speed
Drive
VFD start/stop command VFD running indication
VFD in auto indication VFD faulted
VFD speed set point VFD speed feedback
PLC calculated VFD run time
Diagnostics (DBE to confirm specific
parameters)
14 Chemical
Dosing/ Feed
System
Chemical Dosing/Feed Systems
Chemical volume/quantity used calculated values
15 SCADA
Cybersecurity
Captured host intrusion and antivirus events to be
centrally logged within the SQL database located in
the DMZ with status displayed at the HMI and
alarmed on pickup of a high-level security event.
Network diagnostics and device communication
status shall be logged and displayed at the HMI.
Log network status to Historian.
System log files shall be logged to the SQL
database located in the DMZ.
Configure each HMI to log Factory Talk FT
Diagnostic data to SQL database located in the
DMZ.
Configure ethernet switches to be monitored and
status displayed at the HMI. Log status changes for
ethernet switch and each port to Historian. On
pickup of unauthorized port access or ethernet
switch fault, display alarm at HMI.
Table 87 Security
Item Parameter Criteria Notes
1 Construction /
Work Area
Make adequate provision for the protection of the
work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for
the protection of the public against exposure to injury. 2 General Design
Principles
Security improvements shall integrate with existing
site security infrastructure.
Discrete security measures shall be planned into the
facility without creating a fortress-like appearance.
Site design will address security issues related to
access control; electronic protection; and the
“hardening” of the site against man-made and natural
disasters.
Security measures shall be in line with 2008
America's Water Infrastructure Act.
3 Vulnerability
Assessment
DBE will conduct a vulnerability assessment and
provide all other security measures required pursuant
to Applicable Law
Report deliverable
4 Locking All electrical panels exterior to the building structures shall be lockable
5 Dual
Authentication
Key Fob
1104
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 101
6.9 Miscellaneous
The following table contains the Engineering Design Guidelines for miscellaneous criteria.
Table 88 General miscellaneous requirements
Clause Parameter Criteria
0 Scope This document applies to General/Misc.
1 Project Schedule Primavera Version 7.0 unless otherwise approved by the PM. 2 Design Submittals for
City Reviews
All design documents in support of establishing cost estimates and/or GMPs.
3 Permits
Consider all applicable permits. Examples include California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA),
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), and/or Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) permits.
4 Site Visit, Survey,
Geophysical
Investigation, and
Potholing
Review alignments for visible utility conflicts, constructability, and ease of operations and maintenance of the facilities. Conduct geophysical investigation to determine presence of subsurface features. Perform potholing to determine depths of subsurface features.
5 Technical Specifications CSI Format, "Green Book" Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction can be referenced in lieu.
6 Right-ofWay/Easements
Consider all applicable Right-of-Way/Easements requirements and limitations and how they are communicated with the Contractor. 7 Asset Register Create Asset Register and include for each new asset, size, capacity, year of construction, cost, tolerances, measured vibration, etc. 8 Landscape Review project landscape requirements with City staff. 9 Forklifts Use electric units and propane.
10 Equipment's Needing
Backwash Use recycled water in lieu of potable water where possible. 11 Spare Parts Evaluate spare parts requirements for all critical mechanical equipment being designed and discuss with City O&M Staff. 12 Equipment Utility Pads
Provide for all equipment.
Use reinforced concrete.
Bollards are necessary to protect utilities, where applicable. 13 Equipment Sole
Sourcing
Public Contract Code § 3400(b) allows sole sourcing under four reasons:
(1) to conduct a field test or experiment of the product, (2) to match existing products in use on the particular public work, (3) to obtain a product that is only available from one source, and (4) to respond to an emergency.
14 O&M/
SOPs/
UPCPs
Prepare treatment facility Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals to a standardized electronic format and level of content Establishment of standardized formats and content for Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) and Unit Process Control
Procedures (UPCPs)
15 Identification Devices
Develop a technical specification section to require Contractor to furnish and install all identification devices as shown and specified in the Contract Documents. This would include a section for "Smart Tags" and related tag guidelines including but not limited to Piping ID, Exit Signs, Safety Signs, Right-to-know labels and tags. 16 Submittal Packaging
Package submittals to facilitate quick reviews.
Consider a list of unique submittal packages required (e.g., material data, seismic calcs, testing plan, test results, Certificate of Proper Installation (COPI), warranty cert, O&M, etc.
Consider grouping submittals by facility, if multiple facilities. 1105
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Page 102 Clause Parameter Criteria
Requirements should state that submittals should be
“submitted and approved” prior to scheduling of shipping, testing, etc.
17 Prevent Damage to
Metal surfaces during
Unloading
Contractor shall use nylon straps for handling of all stainless steel, aluminum, and coated equipment and construction elements as to not damage the finish.
18 SDTI
WWTP shall remain in operation at all times.
The CONTRACTOR shall compile a detailed list of all items of work involving tie-ins and all their work elements.
1106
Design Criteria Report
City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Appendix A
Conceptual Design Drawings
1107
TITLE SHEET G-100 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1108
DRAWING INDEX G-101 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1109
VICINITY AND LOCATION MAP G-102 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
NORTH
NORTH
1110
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS I G-103 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1111
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS II G-104 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1112
DESIGN CRITERIA G-105 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1113
INF BYPASS CHANNEL MECHANICAL BAR SCREEN SCREENINGS WASHER COMPACTOR SCREENING CONTAINER TO DISPOSAL GRIT CONTAINER GRIT CLASSIFIER PRIMARY CLARIFIER 3 (OPTIONAL) PRIMARY EFFLUENT PUMP STATION FINE SCREEN 1 PERMEATE BACKWASH PUMP 3 TRICKLING FILTER 1 AERATION BLOWERS MBR AIR SCOUR BLOWERS PIPE GALLERY RECIRCULATION PUMP STATION DIGESTER 1 DRYING BEDS THICKENED SLUDGE PUMPS MECHANICAL THICKENER INFLUENT FLOW SPLITTER BOX GRIT CHAMBER GRIT PUMP 1 CITRIC ACID SODIUM HYPO CHLORINE CONTACT TANKS TO PERCOLATION PONDS TSL TSL
RSL
INFLUENT CHANNEL RAS PRIMARY CLARIFIER 1 PRIMARY CLARIFIER 2 GRIT PUMP 2 GRIT PERSL RSL PE PI RSL PE SECONDARY CLARIFIER 2 TRICKLING FILTER 2 SESE TRICKLING FILTER RECIRCULATION PUMPS SESE TO PERCOLATION PONDS SLUDGE THICKENER DIGESTER 2 DIGESTER 3 HEAT EXCHANGER HWR HWS HEAT EXCHANGER
RSL INF
INF MBR 3 MBR 2 MBR 1 PERMEATE BACKWASH PUMP 2 PERMEATE BACKWASH PUMP 1 PERM BWBW PERM PERM RSL WAS
DSL
DSL
DSL HWR HWS HEAT EXCHANGER TANK 4 ANOXIC ZONE TANK 4 AEROBIC ZONE MBR 4 SECONDARY CLARIFIER 1 WASHER/ COMPACTOR 1 FINE SCREEN 2 WASHER/ COMPACTOR 2 FINE SCREEN 3 WASHER/ COMPACTOR 3 TANK 4 SWING ZONE TANK 3 ANOXIC ZONE TANK 3 AEROBIC ZONE TANK 3 SWING ZONE TANK 2 ANOXIC ZONE TANK 2 AEROBIC ZONE TANK 2 SWING ZONE TANK 1 ANOXIC ZONE TANK 1 AEROBIC ZONE TANK 1 SWING ZONE EFFLUENT CHANNEL MLSS PUMP STATION BW PERM PERMEATE BACKWASH PUMP 4 WAS PUMPS HWR HWS PI BW PERM TANKS SODIUM HYPO CHLORINE CONTACT TANK WAS PE PE RSL PERM PERM PERM PERM PE BAR SCREEN IR PUMP 1 IR PUMP 2 IR PUMP 3 IR PUMP 4 TO DISPOSAL RECYCLE WATER RESERVOIR (BY OTHERS) SUN LAKES COUNTRY CLUB NON-POTABLE RECYCLE WATER BOOSTER (BY OTHERS) RO FACILITY (NOTE 1, 2) BEAUMONT WWTP (NOTE 1, NOTE 2) RO BRINE REMAINING RECYCLED WATER CUSTOMERS EQUALIZATION BASIN (BY OTHERS) EQUALIZATION BASIN PUMP STATION (BY OTHERS)
RETURNOF
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM G-106 N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\105-0002 G 03 19 2024_RECOVER.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:19 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP NOTE: (1) OPTION 1 IS TO INSTALL THE RO FACILITY AT THE SUN LAKES COUNTRY CLUB. BRINE WILL BE DISPOSED OF IN THE CITY OF BEAUMONT SEWER SYSTEM. (2) OPTION 2 IS TO INSTALL THE RO FACILITY AT THE BANNING WWTP. BRINE WOULD BE DISPOSED OF IN ON-SITE EVAPORATION PONDS. (3) ALL DRAWINGS ARE CONCEPTUAL AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE BY THE DESIGN BUILD ENTITY. 1114
N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\MBR SITE PLAN JAMES WANG 02 28 2024.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:20 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
CIVIL SITE PLAN C-101 NOTE: (1) ALL DRAWINGS ARE CONCEPTUAL AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE BY THE DESIGN BUILD ENTITY. 1115
N N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT: PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\IRIS JIMENEZ\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W SERVER - SERVER (1)\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\MBR SITE PLAN JAMES WANG 02 28 2024.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
7/9/2024 4:20 PM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE: ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE ANSI-D 105-0002
PRELIMINARY
99 E. RAMSEY STREET
BANNING, CA 92220
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
MECAHNICAL PLAN AND SECTION M-101 NOTE: (1) ALL DRAWINGS ARE CONCEPTUAL AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE BY THE DESIGN BUILD ENTITY. 1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
Exhibit B
Scope of Work and Schedule
1133
a joint venture
Proposal submitted to
City of Banning
December 2024
City of Banning CA
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades
Project
Progressive Design–Build Services, Phase 1 Scope of Work Regional Wastewater Control Facilities Project
1134
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
i
Table of Contents
Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1 Background ............................................................................................................................... 1 Project Description ........................................................................................................................ 1 Progressive Design Build Approach Implementation ................................................................ 1 Phase 1 – Scope of Work .............................................................................................................. 2 Task 1 - Design ......................................................................................................................... 2 Sub Task 1.1 – Preliminary Design Report ..................................................................... 2 Sub Task 1.2 – 30 Percent Design Phase ...................................................................... 3 Sub Task 1.3 – 60 Percent Design Phase ...................................................................... 4 Sub Task 1.4 – Hydraulic Profile Modeling ..................................................................... 5 Sub Task 1.5 – Final Design Phase ................................................................................ 5 Task 2 - Cost Estimating ........................................................................................................... 6 Sub Task 2.1. – Initial Baseline Cost Model and Updates .............................................. 6 Sub Task 2.2. – GMP Development ............................................................................... 6 Task 3 - Meetings & Reports ..................................................................................................... 7 Sub Task 3.1 – Kick-off Meeting/Workshop .................................................................... 7 Sub Task 3.2 – Progress Meetings and Reports ............................................................ 8 Sub Task 3.3 – Project Status Reports & Monthly Invoices ........................................... 9 Sub Task 3.4 – Risk Management Workshop................................................................. 9 Sub Task 3.5 – Constructability Review Workshops ...................................................... 9 Sub Task 3.6 –SCADA Development and Scoping Workshops ................................... 10 Task 4 – Preliminary Investigations & Support........................................................................ 11 Sub Task 4.1 – Potholing .............................................................................................. 11 Sub Task 4.2 – Topographic Survey ............................................................................. 11 Sub Task 4.3 – Environmental Support ........................................................................ 12 Sub Task 4.4 – Geotechnical Investigation................................................................... 13 Sub Task 4.5 – Permitting Support ............................................................................... 14 Sub Task 4.6 – Energy Tax Credits / Incentives ........................................................... 15 Scope Clarifications, Assumptions, and Exclusions ................................................................ 16 1135
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
1 Introduction
As requested by the City of Banning (City), AECOM/W. M. LYLES JOINT VENTURE (AECOM/WML) has developed a scope of services and preliminary schedule for Phase 1 of the progressive design-build services for the Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project (Project).
Background
The City of Banning is responsible for the collection, conveyance, treatment, and disposal of wastewater generated within its service area. The local collector sewers discharge into larger sewer trunk mains, then to the Banning WWTP, located in the southeast corner of the City.
The existing WWTP has a current capacity of 3.6 million gallons per day (MGD) and is designed to treat wastewater to secondary standards. The WWTP consists of preliminary treatment, primary treatment, secondary treatment, solids handling, disinfection (currently not in use), and evaporation/percolation ponds. The preliminary treatment system consists of a mechanical bar screen, compactor, grit removal system, and cyclone separator.
Effluent from the preliminary treatment system is gravity fed to two primary clarifiers. Primary effluent is pumped to two Trickling Filters, each rated for 1.8 MGD. The Trickling Filter effluent is sent to two secondary clarifiers.
Secondary effluent flows through a chlorine contact chamber and is then discharged to 10 unlined evaporation/percolation ponds which recharges the Cabazon Groundwater Basin. This recharge is provided only through surface percolation, and no injection wells are used by the City.
Primary and secondary sludge is processed via two primary anaerobic digesters. A second-stage digester is currently used as a sludge holding tank before thickened sludge is sent to the sludge drying beds. Sludge is allowed to dry and then is hauled offsite for final disposal. A gravity thickener was used to thicken secondary sludge but is currently not in service.
At this time, effluent from the WWTP is in compliance with effluent water quality discharge requirements.
However, the WWTP will not be able to meet the impending discharge limits proposed by the Colorado River Basin Regional Water Quality Control Boad (RWQCB). In addition, many treatment facilities at the plant, including the two Trickling Filters, have reached the end of their useful life.
Project Description
The Project involves upgrading the Banning WWTP to Title 22 standards for recycled water use.
The existing Trickling Filters and secondary clarifiers will be abandoned, and a new MBR facility and UV disinfection system will be installed to meet Title 22 recycled water standards. Other miscellaneous upgrades of the WWTP, including fine screening upstream of the aeration tanks, modifications to digester facilities, dewatering, chemical systems, and ancillary facilities (office, electrical and control systems including new SCADA, plant water, potable water, stormwater, etc.) will also be implemented as part of the project. An RO system and associated evaporations ponds may be needed as well and is included in this scope of services, if confirmed.
Progressive Design Build Approach Implementation
In accordance with the RFP, AECOM/WML proposes to implement the project on a progressive design-build basis. This approach involves bringing design and construction resources together in an integrated team to 1136
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
2 manage the project in a competitive manner but with a single source of responsibility and accountability. This approach is broken down into two distinct phases:
Phase 1 Services – Planning, Design Development, Permitting and Preparation of the Design-Build Price.
This phase includes all the planning, engineering, and permitting to prepare a complete design to develop a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) and schedule for Phase 2.
Phase 2 Services– Project Execution. Upon agreement on the GMP for the project and the release of required approvals, AECOM/WML will proceed with Phase 2 for equipment and material procurement, construction, engineering design support during construction, construction management, start-up, and acceptance testing.
Phase 1 – Scope of Work
AECOM/WML will provide Phase 1 engineering services including the preparation of a Preliminary Design Report (PDR) and a complete design to develop the Phase 2 Proposal, including a GMP for the construction of the Project.
The scope of work for Phase 1 has been organized into four interrelated tasks as follows:
Task 1- Design
Task 2- Cost Estimating
Task 3- Meetings & Reports
Task 4 – Investigations / Support
A detailed description of these tasks is provided in the following subsections.
Task 1 - Design
Sub Task 1.1 – Preliminary Design Report
Objective: Further develop design concepts and formally document project scope and rationale in a Preliminary Design Report (PDR).
AECOM/WML Activities: Prepare a PDR incorporating the results of kick-off and progress meetings, technical collaboration sessions, and workshops with the City conducted to date. A draft PDR will document these results and describe the proposed scope of work for new facilities. The final PDR will document the rationale for all design decisions and will present the initial scope of work for design and GMP development.
The PDR for the WWTP will define the overall project goals and design intent and the detailed design criteria for all project components, systems and subsystems such as:
Design criteria for flows and loads.
Anticipated unit process flow rates and chemical use and storage requirements. Wastewater treatment process design, including mass balances, equipment capacities and related design criteria.
Geotechnical data and design criteria (Geotechnical Report). Base Map from topographic survey.
Civil concepts and design criteria. Including facilities planning in regard to location and orientation of proposed facilities and relation to existing facilities and hydraulic profile. 1137
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
3 Foundation, structural and architectural concepts and design criteria. Architectural concepts and design criteria.
Process mechanical concepts and design criteria.
HVAC concepts and design criteria.
Plumbing concepts and design criteria.
Fire protection design criteria.
SCADA system architecture and outline process control descriptions for critical unit operations and draft P&IDs.
Physical and electronic security/surveillance systems. Electrical power supply and distribution strategy.
Permitting requirements.
Potholing/utility searches
Deliverables:
Draft PDR including Geotechnical Report and Base map. Updated List of drawings and specifications
Preliminary drawings including process flow diagrams, hydraulic profile, mass balances, conceptual site plans; major process general arrangement plans and sections (fine screens, MBR, UV disinfection, dewatering);
Final PDR incorporating City comments.
Deliverables will be provided in electronic format (PDF) Key Understanding: The main purpose of preparing the draft PDR is to further develop the design while formally documenting project scope and rationale. This document will provide the basis for the Initial Cost Baseline.
Drawings for all design phases will be prepared with AutoCAD or Revit, and in accordance with the United States National CAD Standard® (NCS). Design plans will be developed utilizing industry standard scales, in English (not metric) engineering units. Attachment A (Draft Index of Drawings and Specifications) shows a list of drawings and specifications anticipated for the Project and at what stage they will be provided.
Specifications for all design phases will be prepared in Microsoft Word using the industry standard.
AECOM/WML's budget for this task assumes no Division 0 and Division 1 specifications will be required to be prepared by AECOM/WML, and that AECOM/WML’s Design-Build specifications (16 Divisions format) will be used as a basis for the technical provisions.
Meetings/Travel: Refer to Task 3 – Meetings and Reports for planned meetings and workshops. Ad-hoc calls may be needed to coordinate and discuss emerging technical issues.
Information and Services Provided by Others: As-builts of existing facilities, available geotechnical reports and data, City’s input on the design concepts and alternatives. City to provide comments in spreadsheet for tracking and disposition purposes.
City’s operations staff to provide additional sampling and sample analysis as part of routine monthly efforts and as may be needed by MBR and RO equipment manufacturers to size their equipment and provide performance warranties.
Sub Task 1.2 – 30 Percent Design Phase
Objective: Preparation of 30 Percent Design.
AECOM/WML Activities: Develop initial discipline design drawings and specifications for City review. A preliminary list of the anticipated drawings and specifications included in this submittal is detailed in the Draft 1138
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
4 Index of Drawing List and Specifications included in Appendix A. The proposed number of drawings and level of details in each drawing are consistent with a 30 percent design level.
Deliverables:
30 percent Design drawings and major equipment specifications and draft hydraulic profile Deliverables will be provided in electronic format (PDF) Key Understanding: The main purpose of the 30 percent design package is to incorporate design requirements and develop the design sufficiently so that a cost estimate can be prepared. The 30 percent design will set the stage for subsequent design phases and development of the GMP and will be the basis for the Cost Update No.
1. The overall scope for the Project will be fixed after the City comments on the 30 percent design are addressed.
Meetings/Travel: Refer to Task 3 – Meetings and Reports for planned meetings and workshops.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input on PDR and technical collaboration sessions. City to provide comments in spreadsheet for tracking and disposition purposes.
Sub Task 1.3 – 60 Percent Design Phase
Objective: Preparation of 60 Percent Design.
AECOM/WML Activities:
Advance individual disciplines design for City review. A preliminary list of the anticipated drawings and specifications is included in this submittal is detailed in the Draft List of Drawing List and Specifications included in Appendix A. The proposed number of drawings and level of details in each drawing are consistent with a 60 percent design level.
Finalize 60 percent design package and update cost estimate based on City comments.
Deliverables:
60 percent Design drawings and specifications and final hydraulic profile calculations. Deliverables will be provided in electronic format (PDF) Key Understanding: The main purpose of the 60 percent design package is to progress the develop the design from the 30 percent design package sufficiently to develop the Draft GMP and ultimately the Final GMP as well as setting the stage for the final design package.
Included in the 60 percent design will be markups of as-built drawings and specifications developed for in-kind replacement of the equipment listed below to include in the GMP. No drawings will be developed for the replacement of equipment and construction will be performed from the shop drawings supplied by the equipment suppliers:
Upgrade Ferric Sulfate Feed/Storage System
Digester Coating
Replace Piping in Grit Chamber
Replace East Primary Clarifier Center Drive
Replace Existing PVC Digester Gas Piping
1139
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
5 Replace Digester Hot Water Boiler
Replace Grit/Cyclone Unit
Replace Two Old Grit Pumps
Title 24 analysis to comply with CalGreen regulations is included and will be provided after the 60 percent design review is provided by the City.
Meetings/Travel: Refer to Task 3 – Meetings and Reports for planned meetings and workshops.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input from review of the 30 Percent Design and technical collaboration sessions. City to provide comments in spreadsheet for tracking and disposition purposes.
Sub Task 1.4 – Hydraulic Profile Modeling
Objective: For the selected process configuration, develop and revise hydraulic profile for the proposed facility expansion.
AECOM/WML Activities: Use existing drawings and conceptual design information on the proposed expansion to develop a hydraulic model of the new and existing infrastructure. Model to be developed in AECOM’s plant hydraulic profile (PHP) program.
Deliverables: None. All information collected in this task will be incorporated into the PDR and design drawings.
Key Understanding: The goal of the modeling will be to minimize inter-process pumping after, as well as set elevations of major new facilities.
Meetings/Travel: None.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to provide any hydraulic profile information for the existing plant including the condition of existing pipelines or facility modifications. City to provide comments in spreadsheet for tracking and disposition purposes.
Sub Task 1.5 – Final Design Phase
Objective: Preparation of Final Design to issue for Construction pending Phase 2 notice to proceed.
AECOM/WML Activities:
Address the City comments on the complete design provided in the 60 Percent Design Submittal and provide a Final Design for the Project. A preliminary list of the anticipated drawings and specifications included in this submittal is detailed in the Draft List of Drawing List and Specifications in Appendix A. Proposed number of drawings and level of details in each drawing are consistent with a Final Design ready to be issued for construction.
Deliverables:
Final Design (Sealed and Signed by Engineer-of- Record for each discipline) drawings and specifications. Deliverables will be provided in electronic format (PDF).
Key Understanding: The Final Design will be the basis for the final cost update (Cost Update No. 4). The Final Design package will set the stage for the preparation of the GMP submittal and the overall scope for Phase 2 of this Project. Any modifications by the City to this design will be handled as design change notices in Phase 2. 1140
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
6 Meetings/Travel: Refer to Task 3 – Meetings and Reports for planned meetings and workshops.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input on 60 percent design packages. City to provide comments in spreadsheet for tracking and disposition purposes.
Task 2 - Cost Estimating
Sub Task 2.1. – Initial Baseline Cost Model and Updates Objective: Preparation of initial baseline cost model and one cost update and draft and final GMP.
AECOM/WML Activities: Provide cost estimates tracking different stages of design as follows:
- Initial Baseline Cost Estimate – After submittal of Draft PDR Report - Cost Update No. 1 – After 30% Design Submittal
- Draft GMP – After 60% Design Submittal
- Final GMP – After Draft GMP Submittal and reconciliation of 60% Design Submittal comments Deliverables:
Initial Baseline Cost Estimate, Cost Update, Draft GMP, and Final GMP. Initial Draft Phase 2 CPM Schedule, Schedule Update, Draft Phase 2 Baseline Schedule, and Final Phase 2 Baseline Schedule
Deliverables will be provided in electronic format (PDF).
Key Understanding: The main purpose of the baseline cost estimate is to incorporate confirmation of concept design and establish the format and base for cost updates through design development. The baseline cost estimate and subsequent cost updates will set the stage for development of the GMP. This will allow the City and AECOM/WML to ensure the Project is being designed to budget.
Meetings/Travel: Virtual meetings will be held to present the Initial Baseline Cost Estimate and up to four Cost Updates. These meetings will be held as part of the technical collaboration portion of the Project Progress Meetings.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input on design concepts and input on potential value engineering ideas.
Sub Task 2.2. – GMP Development
Objective: Complete a Phase 2 proposal including development of a guaranteed maximum price (GMP) based on a combination of competitive bidding and self-performing construction work based on final design documents.
AECOM/WML Activities: Using the Phase 1 work products, the AECOM/WML team will obtain pricing for equipment and materials and solicit bids for construction of the proposed project. The AECOM/WML will then prepare and submit a detailed Phase 2 proposal for City review. The Phase 2 Proposal will detail all the necessary services for permitting, equipment and materials procurement, physical construction of the Project, engineering design support during construction, construction management, quality control activities, start-up, commissioning and acceptance testing, O&M manual and record drawings, training and any additional contracted 1141
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
7 services for the duration of the Project. It shall contain a construction schedule, Substantial and Final Completion dates, and a Startup, Commissioning and Acceptance Testing Plan.
Alternative approaches and materials of construction will be evaluated using bidding or through in-house cost estimates and final recommendations will be made to the City. After completion of bidding and pricing efforts, the Phase 2 proposal will be updated to summarize a description of the recommended project approach and the details of the GMP estimate.
Deliverables: Phase 2 proposal (Draft and Final) documenting the design-build project scope of work, design drawings and detailed cost estimate including the following:
Contract amendment (general conditions)
Final design including drawings and specifications.
GMP, including recommended Design-Builder contingency, process guarantee, assumptions, clarifications, and exceptions.
Org Chart for Phase 2
Phase 2 schedule
Draft Quality Management Plan
Draft Startup, Commissioning and Training Plan (Final needs to be done in Phase 2 in coordination with vendors)
Risk Register
Key Understanding: The AECOM/WML team will provide GMP for the project using an open book bidding process. Certain portions of the work such as concrete work, installation of process equipment and process piping will be self-performed by the AECOM/WML team. Items such as unforeseen site conditions and scope additions are not to be carried in the Design-Builder contingency and should be managed as change orders.
AECOM/WML will provide a Draft Phase 2 Proposal followed by a Final Phase 2 Proposal incorporating the results and agreements of the negotiations with the City.
Meetings/Travel: One full day meeting to review draft Phase 2 Proposal Information and Services Provided by Others: Input from City on draft Phase 2 Proposal.
Task 3 - Meetings & Reports
Sub Task 3.1 – Kick-off Meeting/Workshop
Objective: Discuss project expectations with the City including project scope and execution, roles and responsibilities, quality control, progress reporting, schedule, and deliverables. Review concept design and discuss major unit process treatment that will meet the project performance goals.
AECOM/WML Activities: Prior to the workshop, AECOM/WML will prepare an agenda and PowerPoint presentation all the items described in the objective. Also, AECOM/WML will prepare a data request to gather all information available that can assist in the development of the activities scoped in Phase 1. 1142
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
8 Deliverables: Workshop agenda and data request will be issued at least three days before the meeting. A summary of workshop findings will be issued after the meeting. A Project Quality Plan and Project Execution Plan will be developed for discussion in the kick-off meeting.
Key Understanding: The main purpose of the Kick-off / Workshop is to set project expectations and facilitate effective collaboration between the City and AECOM/WML and to plan the specifics of the next steps for Phase 1.
Meetings/Travel: A 4-hour workshop will be held to kick-off the Project at a location chosen by the City. The PM, DM, Process Lead, and Preconstruction Manager will attend in person.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to attend workshop with key staff and provide a venue.
Sub Task 3.2 – Progress Meetings and Reports
Objective: The overall objective of this task is to ensure on-time and on-budget project progression according to the scope, fluid and coordinated communication with City staff, adequate project controls and quality of all deliverables. Included in this task are 16 Progress Meetings. Progress Meetings will be broken down into a Project Management Segment, to discuss overall project progression and issues, followed by a Technical Collaboration Segment. Technical Collaboration Segments will be used to discuss specific technical items, such as process options or preferences, or to review design submittals for the different design phases after the City has provided their comments.
The following Technical Collaboration Segments are included:
MBR and Disinfection Technical Collaboration
Site Layout Technical Collaboration
Permitting Technical Collaboration
Other Emerging Topics for Technical Collaboration
Draft PDR Review
30 Percent Design / VE Review
60 Percent Design Review
100 Percent Design Review
Progress Meetings and Reports
AECOM/WML Activities: Schedule and conduct 16 Progress Meetings with City and City’s representatives at City offices or by video conference calls.
Deliverables: Meeting agendas prior to each meeting date. Other relevant documents requiring City review prior to the meeting will be submitted in advance.
Key Understanding: Half-day Progress Meetings will be held. It is envisioned that, typically, the Project Management portion of the Progress Meetings will last one hour and will be attended by the DB project manager, design manager and process lead. The Technical Collaboration Portion of the Progress Meeting will be attended by the same team members plus additional discipline leads as needed to cover the selected technical item.
Meetings/Travel: Meetings will be held with a combination of in person and video conference calls as needed.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to attend meetings with key staff to provide input on overall Project progress and performance as well as ensuring that appropriate key technical staff participates in the Technical Collaboration segments.
1143
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
9 Sub Task 3.3 – Project Status Reports & Monthly Invoices AECOM/WML Activities: Prepare monthly invoices in accordance with actual progress and a monthly progress report to accompany each invoice for the previous month’s work. Progress reports will review major work activities and budget and schedule status by task, summarizing work hours by task and job title and person assigned for the invoice period, and document progress made during the past month, accomplishments, and a look-ahead to the next month’s progress goals. Update Phase 1 schedule periodically, comparing actual progress to the originally proposed schedule and identifying any necessary corrective measures.
Deliverables: PDF of monthly invoices and monthly progress reports.
Meetings/Travel: None.
Information and Services Provided by Others: None.
Sub Task 3.4 – Risk Management Workshop
AECOM/WML Activities: AECOM/WML will develop and maintain a risk log. The risk log is the key document used in managing risk. The log records risks identified during proposal and work plan development; workshops, technical reviews, and monthly project meetings; and through other events that occur during the project. Initially the log will be populated with generic risks and those captured through past experience on similar projects. Each identified event is assigned a score based on one of three probability ratings and one of five impact (cost or schedule) severity ratings. This allows a semi-quantitative approach for prioritizing the various risks and to calculate and assign values for the important risks.
A workshop will be used to discuss this risk register and build consensus among stakeholders and as a means to bring the Project together to identify and evaluate potential risks.
The workshop will be held after the 30 Percent Design Submittal and will focus on design and procurement risks, especially those areas indicated in the proposal analysis. After the risk register is developed, it will be maintained through the end of Phase 1 and submitted as part of the Phase 2 Proposal.
Deliverables: Develop and maintain risk log. For workshop, PDF of workshop agenda and risk register will be issued before the workshop. A summary of workshop findings issued after the meeting.
Meetings/Travel: None.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input on additional risks and valuation of identified risks.
Sub Task 3.5 – Constructability Review Workshops
Objective: Conduct constructability reviews as a tool to plan and sequence the construction and identify potential capital cost savings for the Project
AECOM/WML Activities:
AECOM/WML technical, construction, and operations specialists will perform constructability reviews to evaluate constructability and potential for less-costly means of achieving City’s project value objectives. The constructability review team will conduct reviews of the 30 Percent and 60 Percent Designs. Findings will be presented in a workshop format to promote collaboration between the Design-build team and City staff. Two workshops are planned.
Deliverables:
1144
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
10 PowerPoint presentation for each workshop with agenda and constructability analysis and results. Meeting minutes after each workshop.
Key Understanding: City to provide input during workshop on constructability preferences and constrains.
Meetings/Travel: Constructability Workshops will be conducted in person or virtually. It is anticipated that each workshop will last 2-3 hours.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City’s input on the constructability information provided.
Sub Task 3.6 –SCADA Development and Scoping Workshops
Objective: Interact with City staff to analyze and collaborate on electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA needs for the Project
AECOM/WML Activities: Four workshops are planned to discuss electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA needs for the Project.
Prior to the initial Workshop (SCADA Workshop No. 1), prepare a summary of proposed electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA components (including SCADA architecture) of the Project to be presented during the initial workshop to receive input and exchange ideas with City staff and validate project scope and preferences. This will include input from the City on equipment preferences, controls, including automated and fail-safe control, and any SCADA system hardware, software, and programming requirements, including quantity and location of SCADA Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs).
SCADA Workshops No. 2 and 3 will focus on reviewing the conceptual control narratives (control philosophies) developed as part of the design to ensure obtain the City’s agrees with input on the control philosophies being proposed for the different processes.
SCADA Workshop No. 4 will focus on how the input received in the previous workshops were addressed as well as other topics such as site-wide communications, security, cybersecurity, SCADA screens planning for Phase 2, etc.
Deliverables: PowerPoint presentation for each workshop with agenda and technical content. Meeting minutes after each workshop.
Key Understanding: These workshops will provide the basis for the electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA concepts for design and cost estimate. The conceptual control narratives developed in the design phase are preliminary in nature and will have to be adjusted during Phase 2 after the submittals for the equipment are available. However, they will have enough information to provide an understanding to the City how the equipment will be controlled and their level of automation. Equipment and Instrumentation tagging nomenclature will be established in the first workshop and will adhere by all parties.
Meetings/Travel: Four SCADA Workshops will be conducted in person or virtually. It is anticipated that each workshop will last 4 hours. AECOM/WML team members, including design manager, preconstruction manager, programming lead, process lead, electrical lead, and I&C lead, will attend in person or virtually.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to attend workshops with key facility staff to provide input on electrical, instrumentation, and SCADA.
1145
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
11 Task 4 – Preliminary Investigations & Support
Sub Task 4.1 – Potholing
AECOM/WML Activities: Potholing activities will be conducted if necessary to locate buried infrastructure, verify as-built locations, and determine utility locations throughout the project site.
Deliverables: None. All information collected in this task will be incorporated into the PDR or design drawings Key Understanding: A budget of $15k is being carried for potholing and ground radar penetration (GPR) for utility investigation. It is our understanding that the existing plant and the area allocated for the new plant does not have any cultural significance and no special cultural monitoring provisions are required.
Meetings/Travel: It is assumed that the field activities associated with this task will be conducted in a period of two days.
Sub Task 4.2 – Topographic Survey
Objective: Provide a Boundary and Topographic Survey for the WWTP to supplement existing available information and fill information gaps to assist on further development of concept layout, detail design activities, and construction cost estimates.
AECOM/WML Activities: Perform boundary and topographic survey including the existing WWTP and areas of the proposed expanded plant to the west of the existing plant as shown in red in the figure below.
Surveying activities include the following:
Aerial Topographic Survey
Field locate and recover an existing benchmark and establish survey datum for the project. Vertical datum shall be based on the North America Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88), and Horizontal control will be North American Datum of 1983 (NAD83) State Plan Coordinates, Zone VI. Set ground control and aerial targets for aerial topographic mapping of the project limits by aerial subconsultant.
Fly overall site and process aerial imagery and control. 1146
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
12 Map existing ground surface elevations and identify surface features within the project limits, including curb, gutter, pavement areas, sidewalk, utility appurtenances, structures, fence lines, and other existing visible features for the West and East limits of the project, depicted in Figure 1. Provide a 1" = 40' scale digital aerial topographic survey of property with one-foot contour, for the project limits.
Title Report
Obtain and furnish one Title Report from a title company for APNs: 532-180-008, -009. The Title report will be used to verify legal ownership, legal description of the property, along with easements/encumbrances on the property that may impact the project design and/or property rights.
Boundary Survey
Utilizing the obtained title report, together with available public records tools, research and compile all appropriate reference materials pertaining to the property, including reference Record Maps, Corner Records, Tie Sheets, Vesting Deeds, Right-of-Way Deeds and Easement Documents. Perform field survey to locate and recover existing survey monuments and establish survey control for the project. Horizontal control datum and basis of bearings shall be based on the California State Plane Coordinate System, North American Datum of 1983 (NAD83), Zone VI. Map existing property lines, easements, right-of-way, and street centerlines, based on public records research data and items noted in the obtained title report.
Prepare a boundary survey to show the existing property lines, easements, right-of-way, and street centerlines, for APNs: 532-180-008, -009.
Deliverables:
Digital color orthorectified photo (1” = 40’ scale).
Electronic PDF & CAD of Aerial Topographic Survey from Aerial.
Title Report for APNs: 532-180-008, -009
Electronic PDF of Boundary Survey, signed & stamped by a Licensed Land Surveyor.
AutoCAD file with 2D linework for the existing property lines, easements, right-of-way, and street centerlines to be used and referenced for design.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to provide any past survey data, location of historical benchmarks, property survey of newly acquired land to the north of the main plant area, right of ways, easements, etc.
Sub Task 4.3 – Environmental Support
Objective: Identify necessary environmental support and scope of work to be provided as an allowance of $30,000.
AECOM/WML Activities: AECOM/WML will support the update of the previous IS-MND (included as an attachment to the RFP). The City is in the process of updating this IS-MND to include new CEQA and NEPA requirements; the completion of the update is anticipated in Q1 of 2025.
Deliverables: As required to support the update of the IS-MND. It is anticipated that this may include narratives, figures, and other supporting documentation to describe the Project. 1147
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
13 Key Understanding: The City will lead this effort and request support to AECOM/WML as needed.
Meetings/Travel: None. Except phone calls as needed as part of the normal communication for the Project.
Information and Services Provided by Others: Preparation of IS-MND Sub Task 4.4 – Geotechnical Investigation
Objective: Collect subsurface information to determine soil and groundwater conditions as well as corrosivity potential to assist on the development of alternative analyses, detail design activities, and construction cost estimates.
AECOM/WML Activities: The AECOM/WML team will conduct subsurface investigations to supplement the existing information from the previous investigations at the site. The geotechnical investigation includes approximately 4-acres in the area of the proposed WWTP expansion west of the existing WWTP. This task includes the following:
Document Review and Field Preparation Review available geotechnical maps and documents to evaluate the subsurface conditions prior to performing field investigation. Obtain boring permits. Site reconnaissance Call Dig Alert and mark out borings.
Geotechnical Investigation 8 borings (1 to 100 feet, 5 to 30 feet and 2 to 50’) Install groundwater monitoring well in the 100’ boring (This may be changed to a shorter boring depending on where groundwater is encountered Mud rotary drilling methods for two 50’ borings and the 100’ boring. Hollow stem auger drilling methods for other borings Drum and dispose of cuttings for mud rotary borings, including analytical testing. Assumed thin spread other soil cuttings on site.
Laboratory Testing Based on soil conditions encountered, perform collapse potential as well as other lab tests, including moisture and density, grain size distribution, Atterberg limits, corrosion potential, and direct shear tests.
Analyses Perform engineering analyses to evaluate the foundation bearing and settlement for the structures, lateral loading conditions, foundation types, groundwater and uplift conditions, as applicable. Evaluate the seismic conditions based on the California Building Code.
Report Geotechnical report with results of the field investigation and laboratory testing. Geotechnical engineering recommendations for the seismic design (code-based parameters), foundations, slope stability, and earthwork for the project.
Deliverables: A draft Geotechnical Report, including corrosion analysis and mitigations, will be included as appendices in the PDR.
Key Understanding: The location and extent of the field investigations will be further refined based on revisions to the proposed site plan and associated facilities.
1148
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
14 Meetings/Travel: A representative from AECOM/WML’s will travel to the site to supervise the geotechnical investigations.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to provide any available past geotechnical data, including subsurface investigations and analyses conducted at the site prior to the beginning of the field investigations.
Sub Task 4.5 – Permitting Support
Objective: Provide support for permit review and issuance, as well as compliance and verification, coordinating with regulatory agencies. Develop a plan to be implemented to timely obtain all permits necessary to build and operate the proposed improvements at the WWTP.
AECOM/WML Activities:
The following agencies have jurisdiction over the Banning WWTP in relation to the proposed Project improvements, and the City of Banning will need to coordinate with multiple agencies regarding the review and approval of permit applications to construct and commission the proposed improvements. Permitting support will include regional, state, and federal levels include approvals from and coordination with the following:
City of Banning (CEQA Lead Agency)
o Community Development
Building Permit
o Public Works
Encroachment Permit
County of Riverside
o Department of Environmental Health
Solid Waste Facility Requirements
o Fire Department – Hazardous Materials Division
Hazardous Material Business Plan
California State Waterboard Region 7: Colorado River
o Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Updates - Proposed changes to the facility that may affect the existing National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit (for stormwater discharges associated with industrial activities) requirements and/or stormwater monitoring, the existing SWPPP must be updated.
o Salinity and Nitrogen Technical Memorandum
o Title 22 Engineering Report for the Production, Distribution, and Use of Recycled Water o Title 27 Permit
South Coast Air Quality Management District
o Authority to Construct Permit
o Permit to Operate
Key Understanding: AECOM/WML will provide preliminary preparation of all necessary permit applications and facilitation of regulatory agency approval of all permits that are Contractor’s responsibility. City will maintain a lead role with the permitting agencies. It is understood that applying and securing these permits will be part of Phase 2 of this Project. Includes permitting new backup generator. 1149
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
15 Meetings/Travel: AECOM/WML permitting lead to attend up to 4 meetings and conference calls as needed.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City will sign permit applications, furnish permit application fees, and attend permitting coordination and review meetings with regulatory agencies as necessary. City to provide copies of all relevant existing permits, plus relevant communications with permitting agencies. City staff or consultant will assist in timely contacting regulatory agencies to gather information to prepare schedule and action plan for permitting.
Deliverables: Permitting Plan and submissions will include a draft for City review and final for submittal to agencies.
Sub Task 4.6 – Energy Tax Credits / Incentives
Objective: Explore Federal and State tax credits for energy generating and storage facilities and other incentives related to facilities such as energy savings equipment and electrical vehicles charging stations.
AECOM/WML Activities: AECOM/WML will explore the feasibility of the City obtaining funding from the following:
Solar Incentives (Federal ITC):
The Federal Investment Tax Credit (ITC) allows the water treatment facility to claim 30% of the total cost of their solar installation. This includes solar panels, inverters, labor, and other associated costs like permitting fees. The ITC applies to projects completed between now and 2032, providing significant tax savings. For instance, a $100,000 solar installation would result in a $30,000 tax credit, reducing upfront expenses. If the facility’s tax liability is less than the credit, the remaining amount can be carried over into future years. This makes solar installation more affordable and offers a quicker return on investment.
Battery Energy Storage Incentives (SGIP):
The California Self-Generation Incentive Program (SGIP) provides rebates for battery energy storage systems (BESS). The rebate starts at $150 per kilowatt-hour (kWh) of installed battery capacity. After the SGIP rebate is applied, the federal Investment Tax Credit (ITC) allows you to claim 30% of the remaining project cost. For example, if a battery system costs $100,000 and qualifies for a $15,000 SGIP rebate, the ITC would then apply to the remaining $85,000. This combined approach can significantly reduce the overall cost.
Direct Pay Provision:
For tax-exempt entities like nonprofits or government-run facilities, Direct Pay allows them to receive the full value of the ITC as a direct payment instead of a tax credit. This ensures that even entities without tax liabilities can fully benefit from both the ITC and any bonus credits.
Deliverables: PowerPoint presentation for workshop with agenda and technical content. Meeting minutes after workshop.
Key Understanding: This effort is limited to the identification of the programs that the City qualifies for and does not include planning and designing a renewable energy facilities.
Meetings/Travel: PowerPoint presentation will be delivered virtually.
Information and Services Provided by Others: City to provide type of energy generating and storage facilities is targeting.
1150
City of Banning
Progressive Design–Build Services
Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled
Water Upgrades Project
Phase 1 Scope of Work (FINAL)
16 Scope Clarifications, Assumptions, and Exclusions
Our Phase 1 Services are based on the technical approach and concepts presented in our Technical Proposal (Section 3).
No CCTV or other video surveillance systems are included in the Phase 1 Services. We have assumed a 2-week City review time for each submittal. The facility sizing is based on information provided in the concept documents and discussions with the City.
Key assumptions include a Maximum Month Flow rate of 3.6 mgd, BOD of 317 mg/l, TSS of 318 mg/l and total Nitrogen of 58 mg/l.
The extent of SCADA integration of existing facilities will be determined during Phase 1. Our Phase 1 scope of services does not include any services related to asbestos or hazardous or toxic materials, paint, etc.
Costs for unplanned upgrades to existing structures or buildings to comply with National Fire Protection Agency, ADA, or building code requirements triggered by electrical or renovation work in existing facilities is not included.
The requested and provided Bid Bond (20% of the Phase 1 Cost) will be deemed satisfied and no longer in effect upon the execution of a Phase 1 contract. It will not be carried forward to Phase 2. Performance and Payment Bonds for the PDB Basis of Design Services are not included in the Pricing Information Form PDB Basis of Design Services. Cost of Payment and Performance bonds for the full value of the contract will be provided upon execution of the GMP and Phase 2 contract amendment. The Phase 1 Baseline Preliminary services follow the schedule and timeline presented as part of this proposal submission.
We assume progress meetings will be conducted via video conference using Microsoft Teams. Cost for phase 1 will be managed as a whole and not by individual tasks requested to be provided in the cost forms on a time and material basis. The Design Build team will have the ability to move funds as needed between tasks to complete the Phase 1 activities without exceeding the total contract value. The price breakdown presented in the Proposal Forms is provided for reference only and does not represent the cost to perform individual items of work separately. Electrical design will be limited to all new facilities and not inclusive of the design of a facility-wide upgrade and/or replacement of the existing electrical infrastructure. 1151
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
City of Banning - WWTP & Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 732 25-Mar-25 23-Feb-28 35 Design & Construction Project 732 25-Mar-25 23-Feb-28 35 Key Milestones & Dates 732 25-Mar-25 23-Feb-28 35
ADM.10 NTP - Phase 1 Design (Orig 12/10/25) 0 25-Mar-25 35ADM.20 Phase 2 GMP Proposal & Amendment Complete 0 15-Jan-26 35ADM.50 Begin Early Work Procurement - Critical Equip / Site Civil 0 16-Jan-26 55ADM.30 Council Review & Approval - P2 20 16-Jan-26 13-Feb-26 35ADM.45 Receipt of Permit to Construct 0 02-Feb-26 45ADM.40 NTP - Phase 2A Approval of Construction 0 17-Feb-26 35ADM.60 Phase 1 Design Complete 0 14-Apr-26 110ADM.70 NTP - Phase 2B Approval of Construction 0 14-Apr-26 110ADM.80 Substantial Completion - Phase 2 Construction 0 09-Dec-27 75ADM.90 Final Completion & Accept - Anticipated (Orig End Q4 2027) 0 23-Feb-28 35 Tasks 716 25-Mar-25 31-Jan-28 52
Design 275 25-Mar-25 27-Apr-26 100
Task 1.1: Preliminary Design Report (PDR) / 10% Design 90 25-Mar-25 30-Jul-25 60 P1D.1000 10% Design / PDR - Draft 50 25-Mar-25 03-Jun-25 35P1D.1010 10% Design / PDR - Draft - City Review 20 04-Jun-25 01-Jul-25 40P1D.1020 10% Design / PDR - Final 20 02-Jul-25 30-Jul-25 40Phase 1 Schedule 35 25-Mar-25 12-May-25 115 P1D.1040 Phase 1 Schedule - Draft 15 25-Mar-25 14-Apr-25 39P1D.1050 Phase 1 Schedule - Draft - City Review 10 15-Apr-25 28-Apr-25 115P1D.1060 Phase 1 Schedule - Final 10 29-Apr-25 12-May-25 115 Preferred Vendor Identification 30 15-Apr-25 28-May-25 38 P1D.1030 Identify Preferred Vendors 30 15-Apr-25 28-May-25 38 Task 1.2: 30% Design Phase 65 04-Jun-25 04-Sep-25 65
P1D.1070 30% Design 45 04-Jun-25 06-Aug-25 35P1D.1080 30% Design - City Review 20 07-Aug-25 04-Sep-25 65 Task 1.3: 60% Design Phase 110 07-Aug-25 15-Jan-26 37
P1D.1090 60% Design 50 07-Aug-25 16-Oct-25 35P1D.1100 60% Design - City Review 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 75P1D.1810 Early Works Package (Civil, Equip, Aeration Basins) - Draft 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 37P1D.1820 Early Works Package (Civil, Equip, AB's) - City Review 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 37P1D.1830 Early Works Package (Civil, Equip, AB's) - Final/Issue 20 17-Dec-25 15-Jan-26 37 Task 1.4: Hydraulic Profile Modeling 70 07-Aug-25 14-Nov-25 75 P1D.1110 Hydraulic Profile 50 07-Aug-25 16-Oct-25 75P1D.1120 Hydraulic Profile - City Review 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 75 Task 1.5: Final Design Phase 130 17-Oct-25 27-Apr-26 100 P1D.1130 Final Design 110 17-Oct-25 30-Mar-26 100P1D.1140 Final Design - City Review 20 31-Mar-26 27-Apr-26 100 Task 2.0: Cost Estimating 229 12-Jun-25 11-May-26 162
Task 2.1: Initial Baseline Cost Model & Updates 229 12-Jun-25 11-May-26 162 Initial Baseline Cost Estimate 30 12-Jun-25 24-Jul-25 64 P1D.1160 Initial Baseline Cost Model - Draft 20 12-Jun-25 10-Jul-25 64P1D.1170 Initial Baseline Cost Model - Draft - City Rev 10 11-Jul-25 24-Jul-25 64 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 NTP - Phase 1 Design (Orig 12/10/25)
Phase 2 GMP Proposal & Amendment Complete
Begin Early Work Procurement - Critical Equip / Site Civil Council Review & Approval - P2
Receipt of Permit to Construct
NTP - Phase 2A Approval of Construction
Phase 1 Design CompleteNTP - Phase 2B Approval of Construction Substantial Completion - Pha
Final Completion
10% Design / PDR - Draft
10% Design / PDR - Draft - City Review
10% Design / PDR - Final
Phase 1 Schedule - Draft
Phase 1 Schedule - Draft - City Review
Phase 1 Schedule - Final
Identify Preferred Vendors
30% Design
30% Design - City Review
60% Design
60% Design - City ReviewEarly Works Package (Civil, Equip, Aeration Basins) - Draft Early Works Package (Civil, Equip, AB's) - City Review
Early Works Package (Civil, Equip, AB's) - Final/Issue
Hydraulic Profile
Hydraulic Profile - City Review
Final Design
Final Design - City Review
Initial Baseline Cost Model - Draft
Initial Baseline Cost Model - Draft - City Rev
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1152
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
30% Cost Estimate / Cost Update #1 30 07-Aug-25 18-Sep-25 55 P1D.1180 30% Cost Estimate - Draft 20 07-Aug-25 04-Sep-25 55P1D.1190 30% Cost Estimate - Draft - City Rev 10 05-Sep-25 18-Sep-25 55 GMP / 60% Cost Estimate 60 17-Oct-25 15-Jan-26 35
P1D.1280 Phase 2 GMP / 60% Cost Estimate - Draft 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 35P1D.1290 Phase 2 GMP / 60% Cost Estimate - Draft - City Review 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 35P1D.1310 Negotiate GMP 20 17-Dec-25 15-Jan-26 35P1D.1320 Phase 2 GMP - Final 10 02-Jan-26 15-Jan-26 35 Phase 2 CPM Schedules 190 07-Aug-25 11-May-26 162
Initial Phase 2 Schedule - 30% 30 07-Aug-25 18-Sep-25 55 P1D.1200 P2 Schedule - 30% Draft 20 07-Aug-25 04-Sep-25 55P1D.1210 P2 Schedule - 30% Draft - City Review 10 05-Sep-25 18-Sep-25 55 Draft Baseline Phase 2 Schedule 50 17-Oct-25 31-Dec-25 45 P1D.1340 P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Draft 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 35P1D.1350 P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Draft - City Review 10 17-Nov-25 02-Dec-25 45P1D.1360 P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Update 20 03-Dec-25 31-Dec-25 45 Final Baseline Phase 2 Schedule 30 31-Mar-26 11-May-26 162 P1D.1260 P2 Schedule - Final Draft 20 31-Mar-26 27-Apr-26 162P1D.1270 P2 Schedule - Final Draft - City Review 10 28-Apr-26 11-May-26 162 Task 2.2: GMP Development 60 17-Oct-25 15-Jan-26 35
Phase 2 GMP / Proposal Documents 60 17-Oct-25 15-Jan-26 35 P1D.1870 Phase 2 Org Chart 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 45P1D.1850 Draft Start-up, Commission, & Training Plan - Draft 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 45P1D.1860 Risk Register - Update 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 45P1D.1300 Phase 2 Amendment - Draft 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 45P1D.1840 Quality Management Plan - Draft 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 45P1D.1330 Phase 2 Amendment - Final 10 02-Jan-26 15-Jan-26 35 Task 3.0: Meeting & Reports 701 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52
Task 3.1: Kick-off Meeting/Workshop 1 15-Apr-25 15-Apr-25 38 P1D.1370 Kick-off Meeting 1 15-Apr-25 15-Apr-25 38
Task 3.2: Progress Meetings & Reports 700 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52 Progress Meetings 700 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52
P1D.1460 Bi-Weekly Progress Meetings 700 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52 Technical Collaborations / Workshops 240 29-Apr-25 14-Apr-26 110 P1D.1380 WS - MBR & Disinfection Tech Workshop 1 29-Apr-25 29-Apr-25 58P1D.1390 WS - Site Layout Tech Workshop 1 28-May-25 28-May-25 38P1D.1400 WS - Permitting Collaboration 1 04-Jun-25 04-Jun-25 64P1D.1410 WS - Other Emeging Topics Collaboration 1 11-Jun-25 11-Jun-25 64P1D.1900 WS - Draft PDR Review 1 18-Jun-25 18-Jun-25 50P1D.1420 WS - 30% Design / VE Review 1 21-Aug-25 21-Aug-25 53P1D.1430 WS - 60% Design Review 1 31-Oct-25 31-Oct-25 85P1D.1440 WS - GMP Workshop 1 17-Nov-25 17-Nov-25 75P1D.1880 WS - 100% / Final Design Review 1 14-Apr-26 14-Apr-26 110 Task 3.3: Project Status Reports & Monthly Invoicing 700 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52 P1D.1470 Monthly PSRs & Invoicing 700 15-Apr-25 31-Jan-28 52 Task 3.4: Risk Management Workshop 21 07-Aug-25 05-Sep-25 48 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 30% Cost Estimate - Draft
30% Cost Estimate - Draft - City Rev
Phase 2 GMP / 60% Cost Estimate - Draft
Phase 2 GMP / 60% Cost Estimate - Draft - City Review
Negotiate GMPPhase 2 GMP - Final
P2 Schedule - 30% Draft
P2 Schedule - 30% Draft - City Review
P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Draft
P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Draft - City Review
P2 Schedule - GMP/60% Update
P2 Schedule - Final Draft
P2 Schedule - Final Draft - City Review
Phase 2 Org Chart
Draft Start-up, Commission, & Training Plan - DraftRisk Register - UpdatePhase 2 Amendment - DraftQuality Management Plan - Draft Phase 2 Amendment - Final
Kick-off Meeting
Bi-Weekly Progress M
WS - MBR & Disinfection Tech Workshop
WS - Site Layout Tech Workshop
WS - Permitting Collaboration
WS - Other Emeging Topics Collaboration
WS - Draft PDR Review
WS - 30% Design / VE Review
WS - 60% Design Review
WS - GMP Workshop
WS - 100% / Final Design Review
Monthly PSRs & Invo
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1153
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
P1D.1890 Risk Register - Draft 20 07-Aug-25 04-Sep-25 48P1D.1480 WS - Risk Management Workshop 1 05-Sep-25 05-Sep-25 48 Task 3.5: Constructability Review Workshops 36 12-Sep-25 31-Oct-25 84 P1D.1490 WS - Constructability Workshop #1 1 12-Sep-25 12-Sep-25 48P1D.1500 WS - Constructability Workshop #2 1 31-Oct-25 31-Oct-25 84 Task 3.6: SCADA Development & Scoping Workshops 120 29-May-25 17-Nov-25 189 P1D.1510 WS - SCADA Workshop #1 1 29-May-25 29-May-25 38P1D.1520 WS - SCADA Workshop #2 1 02-Jul-25 02-Jul-25 59P1D.1530 WS - SCADA Workshop #3 1 29-Sep-25 29-Sep-25 48P1D.1540 WS - SCADA Workshop #4 1 17-Nov-25 17-Nov-25 189 Task 4.0: Preliminary Investigations & Support 360 15-Apr-25 17-Sep-26 322 Task 4.1: Potholing 35 29-Apr-25 18-Jun-25 70
P1D.1550 Potholing 5 29-Apr-25 06-May-25 70P1D.1560 Potholing Report 30 06-May-25 18-Jun-25 70 Task 4.2: Topographic Survey (Aerial, Title Report, Boundary Summary) 40 29-Apr-25 25-Jun-25 65 P1D.1570 Survey 20 29-Apr-25 28-May-25 65P1D.1580 Survey Report 20 28-May-25 25-Jun-25 65 Task 4.3: Environmental Support 30 15-Apr-25 28-May-25 40 P1D.1590 Environmental Support 30 15-Apr-25 28-May-25 40 Task 4.4: Geotechnical Investigation 65 29-Apr-25 30-Jul-25 40 P1D.1600 Geotechnical Report - Draft 30 29-Apr-25 11-Jun-25 45P1D.1610 Geotechnical Report -Draft-City Rev 10 11-Jun-25 25-Jun-25 45P1D.1620 Geotechnical Report - Final 20 02-Jul-25 30-Jul-25 40 Task 4.5: Permitting Support 280 07-Aug-25 17-Sep-26 322 City of Banning 80 17-Oct-25 13-Feb-26 150
P1D.1760 Community Development 30 17-Oct-25 02-Dec-25 180P1D.1750 County Traffic Control Permit 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 75P1D.1780 Public Works Coordination 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 170P1D.1790 Encroachment Permit Coordination 20 17-Nov-25 16-Dec-25 75P1D.1770 Building Permit 60 17-Nov-25 13-Feb-26 150 County of Riverside 150 17-Oct-25 26-May-26 397
P1D.1630 Health Dept. - Solid Waste Facility Reqs 20 17-Oct-25 14-Nov-25 190P1D.1640 Flood Control & Water Conservation District 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 170P1D.1650 Transport. & Land Management Agency & Planning 30 17-Nov-25 31-Dec-25 160P1D.1660 Fire Dept. - Hazardous Material Business Plan 40 31-Mar-26 26-May-26 397 CA State Waterboard R7: Colorado River 90 03-Oct-25 13-Feb-26 130 Stormwater 50 03-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 170
P1D.1670 Industrial User Waste Discharge Permits 50 03-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 170P1D.1680 Construction General Permit 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 75P1D.1690 SWPPP Plan Development 40 17-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 75P1D.1700 SWPPP Updates assoc. w/Industrial Activities 30 31-Oct-25 16-Dec-25 170 Recycled Water 60 17-Nov-25 13-Feb-26 130
P1D.1710 Title 22 Eng. Report for Prod., Dist. & Use of Rec. Water 60 17-Nov-25 13-Feb-26 130P1D.1720 Title 27 Eng. Report for Brine Evap Ponds (if req'd) 60 17-Nov-25 13-Feb-26 130 South Coast Air Quality Management District (AQMD) 280 07-Aug-25 17-Sep-26 322 P1D.1730 Authority to Construct Permit 120 07-Aug-25 30-Jan-26 45 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 Risk Register - Draft
WS - Risk Management Workshop
WS - Constructability Workshop #1
WS - Constructability Workshop #2
WS - SCADA Workshop #1
WS - SCADA Workshop #2
WS - SCADA Workshop #3
WS - SCADA Workshop #4
Potholing
Potholing Report
Survey
Survey Report
Environmental Support
Geotechnical Report - Draft
Geotechnical Report -Draft-City Rev
Geotechnical Report - Final
Community Development
County Traffic Control PermitPublic Works CoordinationEncroachment Permit Coordination Building Permit
Health Dept. - Solid Waste Facility Reqs
Flood Control & Water Conservation District
Transport. & Land Management Agency & Planning
Fire Dept. - Hazardous Material Business Plan
Industrial User Waste Discharge PermitsConstruction General PermitSWPPP Plan DevelopmentSWPPP Updates assoc. w/Industrial Activities Title 22 Eng. Report for Prod., Dist. & Use of Rec. WaterTitle 27 Eng. Report for Brine Evap Ponds (if req'd) Authority to Construct Permit
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1154
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
P1D.1740 Permit to Operate (After Construction) 120 31-Mar-26 17-Sep-26 322 Energy Tax Credits / Incentives 20 04-Jun-25 01-Jul-25 40 P1D.1800 Energy Tax Credits / Incentives Support 20 04-Jun-25 01-Jul-25 40 CONSTRUCTION 527 16-Jan-26 23-Feb-28 35
Construction Phase 2A - Early Work 400 16-Jan-26 18-Aug-27 62 Early Procurement 140 16-Jan-26 05-Aug-26 306
Early Administative Tasks 140 16-Jan-26 05-Aug-26 306
C2A.1000 Procure Early Works Subcontractors & Suppliers 60 16-Jan-26 13-Apr-26 37C2A.1010 Coordinate w/ Banning Elect Utility / SCPPA) 120 17-Feb-26 05-Aug-26 306 Prepare Early Submittals & Submit 120 17-Feb-26 05-Aug-26 182 C2A.1020 P/S Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOG 10 17-Feb-26 02-Mar-26 41C2A.1050 P/S Electrical Materials - General 10 17-Feb-26 02-Mar-26 36C2A.1030 P/S General Piping & Valves 20 17-Feb-26 16-Mar-26 105C2A.1040 P/S Concrete Mix Design 20 17-Feb-26 16-Mar-26 41C2A.1060 P/S Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance 40 03-Mar-26 27-Apr-26 184C2A.1070 P/S Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs) 60 14-Apr-26 08-Jul-26 182C2A.1100 P/S Fine Screens & Washer Compactors 60 14-Apr-26 08-Jul-26 197C2A.1130 P/S Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs, etc.) 60 14-Apr-26 08-Jul-26 37C2A.1080 P/S Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) Equipment 80 14-Apr-26 05-Aug-26 97C2A.1110 P/S Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser Systems 80 14-Apr-26 05-Aug-26 62C2A.1120 P/S MBR Air Scour Systems 80 14-Apr-26 05-Aug-26 182C2A.1170 P/S UV System 80 14-Apr-26 05-Aug-26 153C2A.1180 P/S Aeration Blowers 80 14-Apr-26 05-Aug-26 62 Early Submittal Review & Approval 130 03-Mar-26 02-Sep-26 182 C2A.1440 R/A Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOG 10 03-Mar-26 16-Mar-26 41C2A.1470 R/A Electrical Materials - General 10 03-Mar-26 16-Mar-26 36C2A.1450 R/A General Piping & Valves 10 17-Mar-26 30-Mar-26 105C2A.1460 R/A Concrete Mix Design 10 17-Mar-26 30-Mar-26 41C2A.1480 R/A Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance 10 28-Apr-26 11-May-26 184C2A.1490 R/A Fine Screens & Washer Compactors 20 09-Jul-26 05-Aug-26 197C2A.1500 R/A Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs) 20 09-Jul-26 05-Aug-26 182C2A.1510 R/A Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs, etc.) 20 09-Jul-26 05-Aug-26 37C2A.1560 R/A Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) Equipment 20 06-Aug-26 02-Sep-26 97C2A.1580 R/A Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser Systems 20 06-Aug-26 02-Sep-26 62C2A.1590 R/A MBR Air Scour Systems 20 06-Aug-26 02-Sep-26 182C2A.1600 R/A UV System 20 06-Aug-26 02-Sep-26 153C2A.1610 R/A Aeration Blowers 20 06-Aug-26 02-Sep-26 62 Early Fabrication & Delivery Release 360 17-Mar-26 18-Aug-27 62 C2A.1220 F/D Electrical Materials - General 10 17-Mar-26 30-Mar-26 36C2A.1200 F/D Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOG 10 17-Mar-26 30-Mar-26 41C2A.1210 F/D General Piping & Valves 60 31-Mar-26 23-Jun-26 105C2A.1230 F/D Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance 20 12-May-26 09-Jun-26 184C2A.1270 F/D Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs) 60 06-Aug-26 29-Oct-26 182C2A.1260 F/D Fine Screens & Washer Compactors 120 06-Aug-26 29-Jan-27 197 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 Permit to Operate (After Construction)
Energy Tax Credits / Incentives Support
Procure Early Works Subcontractors & Suppliers
Coordinate w/ Banning Elect Utility / SCPPA)
P/S Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOGP/S Electrical Materials - General P/S General Piping & ValvesP/S Concrete Mix Design
P/S Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance
P/S Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs)P/S Fine Screens & Washer CompactorsP/S Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs, etc.) P/S Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) EquipmentP/S Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser SystemsP/S MBR Air Scour SystemsP/S UV SystemP/S Aeration Blowers R/A Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOGR/A Electrical Materials - General R/A General Piping & ValvesR/A Concrete Mix Design
R/A Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance
R/A Fine Screens & Washer CompactorsR/A Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs)R/A Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs, etc.) R/A Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) EquipmentR/A Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser SystemsR/A MBR Air Scour SystemsR/A UV SystemR/A Aeration Blowers F/D Electrical Materials - GeneralF/D Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Aeration Basin / UV SOG F/D General Piping & Valves
F/D Concrete Reinforcing (Rebar) - Balance
F/D Pre-Eng. Metal Buildings & Canopies (PEMBs)
F/D Fine Screens & Washer Compactors
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1155
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2A.1250 F/D Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs, etc.) 260 06-Aug-26 18-Aug-27 37C2A.1320 F/D UV Sytem 120 03-Sep-26 01-Mar-27 153C2A.1330 F/D MBR Air Scour Systems 120 03-Sep-26 01-Mar-27 182C2A.1300 F/D Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) Equipment 200 03-Sep-26 22-Jun-27 97C2A.1340 F/D Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser Systems 200 03-Sep-26 22-Jun-27 62C2A.1350 F/D Aeration Blowers 240 03-Sep-26 18-Aug-27 62 Mobilization 6 17-Feb-26 24-Feb-26 35
C2A.1380 Set-up Traffic Control 1 17-Feb-26 17-Feb-26 35C2A.1370 Mobilization 5 17-Feb-26 23-Feb-26 35C2A.1390 Install SWPPP BMPs 3 18-Feb-26 20-Feb-26 35C2A.1400 Install Temp Facilities (Trailers, Toilets, Parking, etc.) 5 18-Feb-26 24-Feb-26 35 Early Civil Site Work 30 25-Feb-26 07-Apr-26 154
C2A.1410 Clear & Grub @ Site 5 25-Feb-26 03-Mar-26 35C2A.1420 Mass EXC @ Aeration Basins (elev 2109') 15 04-Mar-26 24-Mar-26 35C2A.1430 Mass EXC @ UV Basin (elev 2120') 10 25-Mar-26 07-Apr-26 154 Early Aeration Basins / Reactors 1-3 Work 160 25-Mar-26 06-Nov-26 35 C2A.1620 Cut & Grade - Aeration Basins 1-3 5 25-Mar-26 31-Mar-26 35C2A.1630 Install BG Utility Piping 5 01-Apr-26 07-Apr-26 35C2A.1640 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 15 01-Apr-26 21-Apr-26 35C2A.1650 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - Aeration Basin 1-3 150 08-Apr-26 06-Nov-26 35 Construction Phase 2B 457 28-Apr-26 23-Feb-28 35
Procurement 250 28-Apr-26 26-Apr-27 167
Administrative Tasks 50 28-Apr-26 08-Jul-26 122
C2B.2350 Design - Issue For Construction Docs 10 28-Apr-26 11-May-26 100C2B.2360 Procure Misc Subcontractors & Suppliers 40 12-May-26 08-Jul-26 122 Prepare Submittals & Submit 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 207
C2B.2300 P/S Permeate Tanks (Bolted Steel) 40 09-Jul-26 02-Sep-26 217C2B.2330 P/S Chemical Feed Tanks 40 09-Jul-26 02-Sep-26 227C2A.1670 P/S Digester Hot Water Boiler 40 09-Jul-26 02-Sep-26 196C2A.1140 P/S Digester Heat Exchangers 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 176C2A.1150 P/S MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/Hypo 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 137C2A.1190 P/S Rotary Drum Thickener (RDT) Equipment 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 207C2B.2280 P/S RAS Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 177C2B.2290 P/S Permeate Backwash Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 154C2B.2310 P/S Plant Water Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 123C2B.2320 P/S Polymer Feed Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 147C2B.2340 P/S WAS Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 147C2A.1160 P/S Grit / Cyclone Unit 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 122C2A.1700 P/S Primary Clarifier Equipment 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 167C2A.1730 P/S Grit Pumps 60 09-Jul-26 01-Oct-26 182 Review & Approve Submittals 40 03-Sep-26 29-Oct-26 197
C2B.2230 R/A Permeate Tanks 10 03-Sep-26 17-Sep-26 217C2B.2260 R/A Chemical Feed Tanks 10 03-Sep-26 17-Sep-26 227C2A.1680 R/A Digester Hot Water Boiler 10 03-Sep-26 17-Sep-26 196C2A.1520 R/A Digester Heat Exchangers 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 176 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 F/D Electrical Gear & Equip (VFDs, MCCs, PLCs
F/D UV SytemF/D MBR Air Scour Systems
F/D Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) EquipmentF/D Fine & Course Bubble Diffuser Systems F/D Aeration Blowers
Set-up Traffic Control
Mobilization
Install SWPPP BMPs
Install Temp Facilities (Trailers, Toilets, Parking, etc.) Clear & Grub @ Site
Mass EXC @ Aeration Basins (elev 2109')
Mass EXC @ UV Basin (elev 2120')
Cut & Grade - Aeration Basins 1-3
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - Aeration Basin 1-3
Design - Issue For Construction Docs
Procure Misc Subcontractors & Suppliers
P/S Permeate Tanks (Bolted Steel)P/S Chemical Feed TanksP/S Digester Hot Water Boiler P/S Digester Heat ExchangersP/S MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/HypoP/S Rotary Drum Thickener (RDT) EquipmentP/S RAS PumpsP/S Permeate Backwash PumpsP/S Plant Water PumpsP/S Polymer Feed PumpsP/S WAS PumpsP/S Grit / Cyclone UnitP/S Primary Clarifier EquipmentP/S Grit Pumps R/A Permeate TanksR/A Chemical Feed TanksR/A Digester Hot Water Boiler R/A Digester Heat Exchangers
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1156
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2A.1550 R/A Rotary Drum Thickener Equipment 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 207C2B.2210 R/A RAS Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 177C2B.2220 R/A Permeate Backwash Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 154C2B.2240 R/A Plant Water Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 123C2B.2250 R/A Polymer Feed Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 147C2B.2270 R/A WAS Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 147C2A.1290 R/A Grit / Cyclone Unit 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 122C2A.1710 R/A Primary Clarifier Equipment 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 167C2A.1740 R/A Grit Pumps 10 02-Oct-26 15-Oct-26 182C2A.1530 R/A MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/Hypo 20 02-Oct-26 29-Oct-26 137 Fabrication & Delivery 150 18-Sep-26 26-Apr-27 167
C2B.2180 F/D Chemical Feed Tanks 60 18-Sep-26 15-Dec-26 227C2B.2200 F/D Permeate Tanks 60 18-Sep-26 15-Dec-26 217C2A.1690 F/D Digester Hot Water Boiler 60 18-Sep-26 15-Dec-26 196C2A.1240 F/D Digester Heat Exchangers 60 16-Oct-26 14-Jan-27 176C2A.1360 F/D Rotary Drum Thickener Equipment 60 16-Oct-26 14-Jan-27 207C2A.1750 F/D Grit Pumps 60 16-Oct-26 14-Jan-27 182C2A.1720 F/D Primary Clarifier Equipment 80 16-Oct-26 12-Feb-27 167C2B.2140 F/D Permeate Backwash Pumps 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 154C2B.2150 F/D RAS Pumps 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 177C2B.2160 F/D Plant Water Pumps 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 123C2B.2170 F/D Polymer Feed Pumps 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 147C2B.2190 F/D WAS Pumps 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 147C2A.1660 F/D Grit / Cyclone Unit 120 16-Oct-26 12-Apr-27 122C2A.1280 F/D MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/Hypo 120 30-Oct-26 26-Apr-27 137 Civil Site Work 407 12-May-26 23-Dec-27 75
Misc Site Work 251 24-Dec-26 23-Dec-27 75
C2B.2370 Mass BF @ Aeration Basins (elev 2118-2120') 5 24-Dec-26 31-Dec-26 35C2B.2380 DEMO - Exst DSL btwn Digesters 2 & 3 3 02-Mar-27 04-Mar-27 279C2B.2390 Mass BF @ UV Basin (elev 2125') 5 29-Apr-27 05-May-27 100C2B.2400 Mass BF @ Fine Screen Structure (elev 2125') 5 15-Jun-27 21-Jun-27 45C2B.2410 Mass BF @ Membrane Tanks (elev 2125') 5 14-Jul-27 20-Jul-27 35C2B.2420 F/R/P Misc Site Concrete @ MBR Facilities 15 09-Nov-27 02-Dec-27 75C2B.2440 Patch AC Pave @ Existing Plant 5 03-Dec-27 09-Dec-27 75C2B.2430 Install New AC Paving @ MBR Facilities 10 10-Dec-27 23-Dec-27 75 Below Grade Pipe Installation 305 24-Jun-26 09-Sep-27 147 C2B.2450 D/L/B RES & PW 10 24-Jun-26 08-Jul-26 334C2B.2490 D/L/B DSL Piping for Digesters 10 04-Nov-26 18-Nov-26 270C2B.2500 D/L/B TSL from TSL Pmps to DIG 2 3 19-Nov-26 23-Nov-26 270C2B.2510 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - DIG 2 to TSL 1 24-Nov-26 24-Nov-26 270C2B.2520 SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in DSL Digesters 1-3 1 24-Nov-26 24-Nov-26 270C2B.2530 D/L/B TSL from RDT to TSL Pmps 2 27-Apr-27 28-Apr-27 149C2B.2540 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - RDT-D to TSL Pmps 1 29-Apr-27 29-Apr-27 164C2B.2550 D/L/B RDT-D to INF Splitter Box 15 29-Apr-27 19-May-27 149C2B.2570 D/L/B PERM/MBR EFF Piping from Tanks to UV 10 06-May-27 19-May-27 139 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 R/A Rotary Drum Thickener EquipmentR/A RAS PumpsR/A Permeate Backwash PumpsR/A Plant Water PumpsR/A Polymer Feed PumpsR/A WAS PumpsR/A Grit / Cyclone UnitR/A Primary Clarifier EquipmentR/A Grit Pumps R/A MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/Hypo
F/D Chemical Feed TanksF/D Permeate TanksF/D Digester Hot Water Boiler F/D Digester Heat ExchangersF/D Rotary Drum Thickener EquipmentF/D Grit Pumps F/D Primary Clarifier Equipment
F/D Permeate Backwash PumpsF/D RAS PumpsF/D Plant Water PumpsF/D Polymer Feed PumpsF/D WAS PumpsF/D Grit / Cyclone Unit F/D MBR Chemical Feed Systems - Citric Acid/Hypo
Mass BF @ Aeration Basins (elev 2118-2120')
DEMO - Exst DSL btwn Digesters 2 & 3
Mass BF @ UV Basin (elev 2125')
Mass BF @ Fine Screen Structure (elev 2125')
Mass BF @ Membrane Tanks (elev 2125')
F/R/P Misc Site Concrete @ M
Patch AC Pave @ Existing Pla
Install New AC Paving @ M
D/L/B RES & PW
D/L/B DSL Piping for Digesters
D/L/B TSL from TSL Pmps to DIG 2
PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - DIG 2 to TSLSHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in DSL Digesters 1-3 D/L/B TSL from RDT to TSL Pmps
PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - RDT-D to TSL Pmps
D/L/B RDT-D to INF Splitter BoxD/L/B PERM/MBR EFF Piping from Tanks to UV City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1157
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2B.2560 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in RDT-D to INF Split Box 1 20-May-27 20-May-27 149C2B.2580 D/L/B Emergency Bypass - UV to Perc Ponds 15 20-May-27 10-Jun-27 139C2B.2590 SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in EMERG. BYPASS to PERC 1 11-Jun-27 11-Jun-27 139C2B.2460 D/L/B PE Piping - EQ Pmp Sta to Fine Screen 15 22-Jun-27 13-Jul-27 95C2B.2610 D/L/B Air Piping from Blower to MBR Tanks 15 22-Jun-27 13-Jul-27 113C2B.2600 D/L/B Air Piping from Blower to AB's 20 22-Jun-27 20-Jul-27 108C2B.2470 SHUTDOWN (TEMP) & Tie-in PE to EQ Pmp Sta 1 14-Jul-27 14-Jul-27 95C2B.2480 PLANT SHUTDOWN (TEMP) & Tie-in PE to TRIK Filter INF 1 15-Jul-27 15-Jul-27 95C2B.2630 D/L/B PERM Piping from Pumps to Tanks 10 21-Jul-27 03-Aug-27 72C2B.2620 D/L/B New Stormdrain & Catch Basins 15 21-Jul-27 10-Aug-27 138C2B.2640 D/L/B RAS Piping 10 04-Aug-27 17-Aug-27 72C2B.2650 Tie-in Storm Drain @ Existing Plant 1 11-Aug-27 11-Aug-27 167C2B.2660 D/L/B WAS Piping from Pmps to Digesters 15 18-Aug-27 08-Sep-27 72C2B.2670 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - RSL/WAS at DIG 3 1 09-Sep-27 09-Sep-27 72 Site Electrical 346 12-May-26 24-Sep-27 61
C2B.2680 D/L/B Elec Ductbank @ Existing Plant 20 12-May-26 09-Jun-26 386C2B.2690 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in New Elec @ Exst Plant 1 10-Jun-26 10-Jun-26 386C2B.2710 ELEC - D/L/B Ductbank - New Power Feed (if needed) 20 06-May-27 03-Jun-27 119C2B.2700 D/L/B New Elec Ductbank @ MBR Facilities 60 06-May-27 30-Jul-27 100C2B.2720 ELEC - Install Additional 12kV Power Feed (if needed) 20 26-Aug-27 23-Sep-27 61C2B.2730 PLANT SHUTDOWN - Connect New Addtl Power Feed 1 24-Sep-27 24-Sep-27 61 Aeration Basins / Reactors 1-3 275 28-Aug-26 01-Oct-27 61 C2B.1390 Install/Relocate Deck Shoring 50 28-Aug-26 06-Nov-26 55C2B.1400 Concrete Cure - Deck Aeration Basins 15 09-Nov-26 02-Dec-26 35C2B.1410 Remove Deck Shoring 5 03-Dec-26 09-Dec-26 35C2B.1420 Water Test Structure - Aeration Basins 10 10-Dec-26 23-Dec-26 35C2B.1430 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 60 23-Jun-27 16-Sep-27 62C2B.1440 ELEC - Install EI&C 40 22-Jul-27 16-Sep-27 62C2B.1450 Painting & Coating 5 17-Sep-27 23-Sep-27 62C2B.1460 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Aeration Basins 5 27-Sep-27 01-Oct-27 61 Membrane Facilities 221 04-Jan-27 16-Nov-27 40
Membrane Tanks 214 04-Jan-27 04-Nov-27 37
C2B.1740 Cut & Grade - Membrane Tanks 3 04-Jan-27 06-Jan-27 35C2B.1750 Install BG Utility Piping 5 07-Jan-27 13-Jan-27 35C2B.1760 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 10 07-Jan-27 21-Jan-27 35C2B.1770 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Decks - Membrane Tanks 100 14-Jan-27 07-Jun-27 35C2B.1780 Concrete Cure - Membrane Tanks 15 08-Jun-27 28-Jun-27 35C2B.1790 Water Test Structure - Membrane Tanks 10 29-Jun-27 13-Jul-27 35C2B.1800 Install PEMB Canopy - Membrane / Permeate Pumps 15 26-Aug-27 16-Sep-27 37C2B.1810 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 20 17-Sep-27 14-Oct-27 37C2B.1820 ELEC - Install EI&C 20 01-Oct-27 28-Oct-27 37C2B.1830 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Membrane Tanks 5 29-Oct-27 04-Nov-27 37 Permeate Pumps 54 21-Jul-27 05-Oct-27 59
C2B.1840 Cut & Grade - Permeate Pumps 1 21-Jul-27 21-Jul-27 37C2B.1850 Install BG Utility Piping 5 22-Jul-27 28-Jul-27 37 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in RDT-D to INF Split Box
D/L/B Emergency Bypass - UV to Perc Ponds
SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in EMERG. BYPASS to PERC
D/L/B PE Piping - EQ Pmp Sta to Fine ScreenD/L/B Air Piping from Blower to MBR Tanks D/L/B Air Piping from Blower to AB's
SHUTDOWN (TEMP) & Tie-in PE to EQ Pmp Sta
PLANT SHUTDOWN (TEMP) & Tie-in PE to TRIK Filte
D/L/B PERM Piping from Pumps to Tanks
D/L/B New Stormdrain & Catch Basins
D/L/B RAS Piping
Tie-in Storm Drain @ Existing Plant
D/L/B WAS Piping from Pmps to DigestersPLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in - RSL/W D/L/B Elec Ductbank @ Existing Plant
PLANT SHUTDOWN (Temp) & Tie-in New Elec @ Exst Plant
ELEC - D/L/B Ductbank - New Power Feed (if needed)
D/L/B New Elec Ductbank @ MBR Facilities
ELEC - Install Additional 12kV Power Feed
PLANT SHUTDOWN - Connect New Addt
Install/Relocate Deck Shoring
Concrete Cure - Deck Aeration Basins
Remove Deck Shoring
Water Test Structure - Aeration Basins
Install Piping & Mechanical EquipmentELEC - Install EI&C Painting & Coating
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Aeration B
Cut & Grade - Membrane Tanks
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Decks - Membrane Tanks
Concrete Cure - Membrane Tanks
Water Test Structure - Membrane Tanks
Install PEMB Canopy - Membrane / Permea
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Me
Cut & Grade - Permeate Pumps
Install BG Utility Piping
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1158
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2B.1860 ELEC - BG / In-slab Conduit 10 22-Jul-27 04-Aug-27 37C2B.1870 F/R/P SOG - Permeate Pumps 5 05-Aug-27 11-Aug-27 37C2B.1880 Concrete Cure - Permeate Pmp SOG 10 12-Aug-27 25-Aug-27 37C2B.1890 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 10 26-Aug-27 09-Sep-27 59C2B.1900 ELEC - Install EI&C 5 15-Sep-27 21-Sep-27 59C2B.1920 Painting & Coating 5 22-Sep-27 28-Sep-27 59C2B.1910 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Permeate Pumps 5 29-Sep-27 05-Oct-27 59 Permeate Tanks 83 21-Jul-27 16-Nov-27 40
C2B.1930 Cut & Grade - Permeate Storage Tanks 3 21-Jul-27 23-Jul-27 35C2B.1940 Install BG Utility Piping 2 26-Jul-27 27-Jul-27 35C2B.1950 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 3 28-Jul-27 30-Jul-27 35C2B.1960 F/R/P - SOG - Permeate Tank #1 5 02-Aug-27 06-Aug-27 35C2B.1980 F/R/P - SOG - Permeate Tank #2 5 09-Aug-27 13-Aug-27 40C2B.1970 Concrete Cure - Permeate Tank #1 20 09-Aug-27 03-Sep-27 35C2B.1990 Concrete Cure - Permeate Tank #2 20 16-Aug-27 13-Sep-27 40C2B.2000 Install Bolted Steel Tank - Permeate Tank #1 10 07-Sep-27 20-Sep-27 35C2B.2010 Water Test Tank - Permeate Tank #1 10 21-Sep-27 04-Oct-27 40C2B.2020 Install Bolted Steel Tank - Permeate Tank #2 10 21-Sep-27 04-Oct-27 35C2B.2030 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment - Permeate Tank #1 5 05-Oct-27 11-Oct-27 40C2B.2040 Water Test Tank - Permeate Tank #2 10 05-Oct-27 18-Oct-27 35C2B.2050 ELEC - Install EI&C - Permeate Tank #1 5 12-Oct-27 18-Oct-27 40C2B.2060 Install Piping & Mechanical - Permeate Tank #2 5 19-Oct-27 25-Oct-27 35C2B.2090 Painting & Coating - Permeate Tank #1 10 19-Oct-27 01-Nov-27 40C2B.2070 ELEC - Install EI&C - Permeate Tank #2 5 26-Oct-27 01-Nov-27 35C2B.2080 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Permeate Tank #1 5 02-Nov-27 08-Nov-27 35C2B.2100 Painting & Coating - Permeate Tank #2 10 02-Nov-27 16-Nov-27 40C2B.2870 Mechancial Start-up & Testing - Permeate Tank #2 5 09-Nov-27 16-Nov-27 40 UV Dinsinfection Facility 320 24-Jun-26 30-Sep-27 62
C2B.2740 Cut & Grade - UV 5 24-Jun-26 30-Jun-26 100C2B.2750 Install BG Utility Piping 15 01-Jul-26 22-Jul-26 100C2B.2760 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Piping 15 09-Jul-26 29-Jul-26 100C2B.2770 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deckss - UV 160 23-Jul-26 15-Mar-27 100C2B.2780 Install/Relocate Deck Shoring 20 16-Feb-27 15-Mar-27 100C2B.2790 Concrete Cure - SOG, Walls, Decks - UV 20 16-Mar-27 12-Apr-27 100C2B.2800 Remove Deck Shoring 2 13-Apr-27 14-Apr-27 100C2B.2810 Water Test Structure - UV 10 15-Apr-27 28-Apr-27 100C2B.2820 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 30 29-Apr-27 10-Jun-27 111C2B.2830 ELEC - Install EI&C 40 13-May-27 09-Jul-27 111C2B.2840 Painting & Coating 5 12-Jul-27 16-Jul-27 111C2B.2850 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - UV 4 27-Sep-27 30-Sep-27 62 Process Bldg (Blower, Elec, Lab/Officel) 340 01-Jul-26 04-Nov-27 37 C2B.1580 Cut & Grade - Process Bldg 3 01-Jul-26 06-Jul-26 214C2B.1590 Install BG Utility Piping 10 07-Jul-26 20-Jul-26 214C2B.1600 ELEC - Install BG / In-Slab Conduit 15 14-Jul-26 03-Aug-26 214C2B.1610 F/R/P - SOG - Process Bldg 15 28-Jul-26 17-Aug-26 214 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 ELEC - BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P SOG - Permeate Pumps
Concrete Cure - Permeate Pmp SOG
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Painting & Coating
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Permeat
Cut & Grade - Permeate Storage Tanks
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG - Permeate Tank #1
F/R/P - SOG - Permeate Tank #2
Concrete Cure - Permeate Tank #1
Concrete Cure - Permeate Tank #2
Install Bolted Steel Tank - Permeate Tank #
Water Test Tank - Permeate Tank #1Install Bolted Steel Tank - Permeate Tank Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment -
Water Test Tank - Permeate Tank #2ELEC - Install EI&C - Permeate Tank # Install Piping & Mechanical - Permeat
Painting & Coating - Permeate Tank ELEC - Install EI&C - Permeate Tan Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Pe
Painting & Coating - Permeate TaMechancial Start-up & Testing - P Cut & Grade - UV
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Piping
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deckss - UVInstall/Relocate Deck Shoring Concrete Cure - SOG, Walls, Decks - UV
Remove Deck Shoring
Water Test Structure - UV
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Painting & Coating
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - UV
Cut & Grade - Process Bldg
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-Slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG - Process Bldg
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1159
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2B.1620 Concrete Cure - Process Bldg SOG 20 18-Aug-26 15-Sep-26 214C2B.1630 F/R/P Equipment Pads - RO/Blowers/Elec Gear 10 25-Aug-26 08-Sep-26 219C2B.1640 Concrete Cure - Equipment Pads 20 09-Sep-26 06-Oct-26 219C2B.1650 Install PEMB - Process Bldg 20 30-Oct-26 01-Dec-26 182C2B.1660 Install Building Trades - Various 60 02-Dec-26 01-Mar-27 182C2B.1670 ELEC - Building Rough-in 20 31-Dec-26 29-Jan-27 207C2B.1680 ELEC - Building Finish Electrical 20 02-Mar-27 29-Mar-27 187C2B.1700 ELEC - Set Electrical Gear - Elec Rm 5 19-Aug-27 25-Aug-27 37C2B.1690 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment - (Blowers, etc.) 20 19-Aug-27 16-Sep-27 62C2B.1710 ELEC - Install EI&C (Blowers, etc.) 40 26-Aug-27 21-Oct-27 37C2B.1720 Painting & Coating - Piping 5 22-Oct-27 28-Oct-27 37C2B.1730 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Blowers 5 29-Oct-27 04-Nov-27 37 Chemical Storage Areas 272 07-Oct-26 04-Nov-27 37
C2B.1480 Cut & Grade - Chem Tanks 3 07-Oct-26 09-Oct-26 221C2B.1490 Install BG Utility Piping 5 12-Oct-26 16-Oct-26 221C2B.1500 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 10 19-Oct-26 30-Oct-26 221C2B.1510 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Decks - Chem Tanks 10 26-Oct-26 06-Nov-26 221C2B.1520 Concrete Cure - SOG Chem Tanks 20 09-Nov-26 09-Dec-26 221C2B.1530 Install PEMB Canopy - Chem Tanks 10 10-Dec-26 23-Dec-26 221C2B.1540 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 20 27-Apr-27 24-May-27 137C2B.1550 ELEC - Install EI&C 20 11-May-27 08-Jun-27 137C2B.1560 D/L/B Chem Piping 10 21-Jul-27 03-Aug-27 98C2B.1570 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Chem Tanks 5 29-Oct-27 04-Nov-27 37 Fine Screen Facility / RAS Mixing 206 04-Jan-27 25-Oct-27 45 Fine Screen Facility 206 04-Jan-27 25-Oct-27 45
C2B.1170 Cut & Grade - Fine Screen 3 04-Jan-27 06-Jan-27 45C2B.1180 Install BG Utility Piping 5 07-Jan-27 13-Jan-27 45C2B.1190 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 10 14-Jan-27 28-Jan-27 45C2B.1200 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - Fine Screen Structure 60 29-Jan-27 23-Apr-27 45C2B.1210 Install Deck Shoring 5 12-Apr-27 16-Apr-27 70C2B.1220 Concrete Cure - Deck Fine Screen Structure 20 26-Apr-27 21-May-27 45C2B.1230 Remove Deck Shoring 5 24-May-27 28-May-27 45C2B.1240 Water Test Structure 10 01-Jun-27 14-Jun-27 45C2B.1260 D/L/B PE from EQ Basin Pmp Sta 10 22-Jun-27 06-Jul-27 117C2B.1250 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 20 22-Jun-27 20-Jul-27 98C2B.1270 Shutdown - Tie-in PE from EQ Pmp Sta PE to Fine Screens 1 07-Jul-27 07-Jul-27 117C2B.1280 ELEC - Install EI&C 10 21-Jul-27 03-Aug-27 98C2B.1290 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Fine Screens Struct 5 19-Oct-27 25-Oct-27 45 RAS / Flow Mix Structure 88 22-Jun-27 25-Oct-27 45
C2B.1300 Cut & Grade - RAS 1 22-Jun-27 22-Jun-27 45C2B.1310 Install BG Utility Piping 2 23-Jun-27 24-Jun-27 45C2B.1320 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 2 25-Jun-27 28-Jun-27 45C2B.1330 F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - RAS 40 29-Jun-27 24-Aug-27 45C2B.1340 Concrete Cure - RAS 20 25-Aug-27 22-Sep-27 45C2B.1350 Water Test Structure 10 23-Sep-27 06-Oct-27 45 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 Concrete Cure - Process Bldg SOG
F/R/P Equipment Pads - RO/Blowers/Elec Gear
Concrete Cure - Equipment Pads
Install PEMB - Process Bldg
Install Building Trades - Various
ELEC - Building Rough-in
ELEC - Building Finish Electrical
ELEC - Set Electrical Gear - Elec Rm
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment - (Blo
ELEC - Install EI&C (Blowers, etc.)
Painting & Coating - Piping
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Blow
Cut & Grade - Chem Tanks
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Decks - Chem Tanks
Concrete Cure - SOG Chem Tanks
Install PEMB Canopy - Chem Tanks
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
D/L/B Chem Piping
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Che
Cut & Grade - Fine Screen
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - Fine Screen Structure
Install Deck Shoring
Concrete Cure - Deck Fine Screen Structure
Remove Deck Shoring
Water Test Structure
D/L/B PE from EQ Basin Pmp Sta
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
Shutdown - Tie-in PE from EQ Pmp Sta PE to Fine Scre
ELEC - Install EI&C
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Fine S
Cut & Grade - RAS
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG, Walls, Deck - RAS
Concrete Cure - RAS
Water Test Structure
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1160
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2B.1360 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 5 07-Oct-27 13-Oct-27 45C2B.1370 ELEC - Install EI&C 3 14-Oct-27 18-Oct-27 45C2B.1380 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - RAS 5 19-Oct-27 25-Oct-27 45 Modifcations with Existing Plant Facilities 381 04-May-26 04-Nov-27 37 Rotary Drum Thickeners (RDTs) 325 23-Jul-26 04-Nov-27 37 C2B.1080 Cut & Grade - RDTs 2 23-Jul-26 24-Jul-26 223C2B.1090 Install BG Utility Piping 2 27-Jul-26 28-Jul-26 223C2B.1100 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 2 29-Jul-26 30-Jul-26 223C2B.1110 F/R/P - SOG - RDTs 10 05-Aug-26 18-Aug-26 223C2B.1120 Concrete Cure - RDTs 20 19-Aug-26 16-Sep-26 223C2B.1130 Install PEMB Canopy - RDTs 10 17-Sep-26 30-Sep-26 278C2B.1140 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 10 13-Apr-27 26-Apr-27 147C2B.1150 ELEC - Install EI&C 10 11-May-27 24-May-27 147C2B.1160 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - RDTs 5 29-Oct-27 04-Nov-27 37 Digester 206 04-May-26 01-Mar-27 212
C2B.10119 Digester Coating Replacement 30 04-May-26* 15-Jun-26 317C2B.10009 Shutdown (TEMP ) Digester 1 12-May-26 12-May-26 311C2B.1000 Cut & Grade - Heat Ex 2 17-Sep-26 18-Sep-26 223C2B.1010 Install BG Utility Piping 2 21-Sep-26 22-Sep-26 223C2B.1020 ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit 2 23-Sep-26 24-Sep-26 223C2B.1030 F/R/P - SOG - Heat Ex 5 30-Sep-26 06-Oct-26 223C2B.1040 Concrete Cure - SOG Heat Ex 20 07-Oct-26 03-Nov-26 223C2B.1050 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment 5 15-Jan-27 22-Jan-27 176C2B.1060 ELEC - Install EI&C 5 16-Feb-27 22-Feb-27 212C2B.1070 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Digester 5 23-Feb-27 01-Mar-27 212 Grit Facilities 290 12-May-26 07-Jul-27 122
C2B.10129 Shutdown (TEMP ) Grit Pumps & Grit Chamber/OF storage 1 12-May-26 12-May-26 306C2B.10089 Install Bypass / Temp Facilities (Temp) - if necessary 2 12-May-26 13-May-26 306C2B.10019 Demo Existing Equipment & Piping 5 13-May-26 19-May-26 306C2B.10099 Modify Utility Piping 5 20-May-26 27-May-26 306C2B.10029 ELEC - Modify Exist Conduit 5 28-May-26 03-Jun-26 306C2B.10039 F/R/P - Modify / Install New Conc SOG/Pads 10 04-Jun-26 17-Jun-26 306C2B.10049 Concrete Cure - Grit, etc. 20 18-Jun-26 16-Jul-26 306C2B.10059 Modify Piping & Install New Mechanical Equipment 10 13-Apr-27 26-Apr-27 122C2B.10069 ELEC - Install EI&C 5 11-May-27 17-May-27 122C2B.10109 Painting & Coating 20 18-May-27 15-Jun-27 122C2B.10079 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Misc 15 16-Jun-27 07-Jul-27 122 East Primary Clarifier 70 25-Jan-27 03-May-27 167
C2B.10149 Shutdown (TEMP ) - East Primary Clarifier 1 25-Jan-27 25-Jan-27 176C2B.10159 Demo Existing Equipment 5 26-Jan-27 01-Feb-27 176C2B.10209 Modify Piping & Install New Mechanical Equipment 20 16-Feb-27 15-Mar-27 167C2B.10219 ELEC - Install EI&C 10 16-Mar-27 29-Mar-27 167C2B.10229 Painting & Coating 20 30-Mar-27 26-Apr-27 167C2B.10239 Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Misc 5 27-Apr-27 03-May-27 167 Commissioning 70 09-Nov-27 23-Feb-28 35
Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - RAS
Cut & Grade - RDTs
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG - RDTs
Concrete Cure - RDTs
Install PEMB Canopy - RDTs
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - RD
Digester Coating Replacement
Shutdown (TEMP ) Digester
Cut & Grade - Heat Ex
Install BG Utility Piping
ELEC - Install BG / In-slab Conduit
F/R/P - SOG - Heat Ex
Concrete Cure - SOG Heat Ex
Install Piping & Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Digester
Shutdown (TEMP ) Grit Pumps & Grit Chamber/OF storageInstall Bypass / Temp Facilities (Temp) - if necessary Demo Existing Equipment & Piping
Modify Utility Piping
ELEC - Modify Exist Conduit
F/R/P - Modify / Install New Conc SOG/Pads
Concrete Cure - Grit, etc.
Modify Piping & Install New Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Painting & Coating
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Misc
Shutdown (TEMP ) - East Primary Clarifier
Demo Existing Equipment
Modify Piping & Install New Mechanical Equipment
ELEC - Install EI&C
Painting & Coating
Mechanical Start-up & Testing - Misc
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1161
Activity ID Activity Name Original
Duration
Start Finish Total
Float
C2B.1470 Functional Testing (30 cal Days) 20 09-Nov-27 09-Dec-27 35C2B.2880 Wastewater Start-up (30 cal Days) 20 10-Dec-27 10-Jan-28 35C2B.9999 Plant Commissiong & Acceptance 30 cal Days) 20 11-Jan-28 08-Feb-28 35C2B.2860 Acceptance Testing Report 10 09-Feb-28 23-Feb-28 35 Project Close-out 50 10-Dec-27 23-Feb-28 35
C2B.2120 Submit As-builts 10 10-Dec-27 23-Dec-27 75C2B.2110 Punchlist 40 27-Dec-27 23-Feb-28 35C2B.2130 Demobilization 10 09-Feb-28 23-Feb-28 35 Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F Mar Apr M Jun Jul Aug S Oct N Dec Jan F MarApr Qtr 1, 2025 Qtr 2, 2025 Qtr 3, 2025 Qtr 4, 2025 Qtr 1, 2026 Qtr 2, 2026 Qtr 3, 2026 Qtr 4, 2026 Qtr 1, 2027 Qtr 2, 2027 Qtr 3, 2027 Qtr 4, 2027 Qtr 1, 2028 Qtr 2, 2028 Functional Testing (30 cal Day
Wastewater Start-up (30
Plant Commissiong
Acceptance Test
Submit As-builts
PunchlistDemobilization
City of Banning - WWTP Recycled Water Project - Update_02182025 APPENDIX A PROPOSED PHASE 1 DESIGN & PHASE 2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 18-Feb-25 11:02
Datadate 25-Mar-25
Remaining Level of Effort
Actual Level of EffortActual Work
Remaining WorkCritical Remaining WorkMilestone
TASK filter: All Activities
© Oracle Corporation
1162
Appendix A
Index of Drawings and Specifications
AECOM / W.M. Lyles Co.
3960 Industrial Blvd.
Suite 300
W. Sacramento, CA 95691
(916) 375-1833 Office
(916) 375-1848 Fax
www.aecom.com
www.wmlyles.com
1163
AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
General
00 G-001 COVER SHEET c c f f
00 G-002 INDEX OF DRAWINGS I p c f f
00 G-003 INDEX OF DRAWINGS II p c f f
00 G-004 STRUCTURE DESIGNATION KEY c c f f
00 G-005 HYDRAULIC PROFILE
00 G-006 DESIGN CRITERIA
Civil
C-001 LEGEND, ABBREIVATIONS, AND GENERAL NOTES c c f f
C-002 EXISTING CONDITIONS I
C-003 EXISTING CONDITIONS II c c f f
C-004 EXCAVATION AND GRADING PLAN I p c f f
C-005 EXCAVATION AND GRADING PLAN II p c f f
C-006 EXCAVATION AND GRADING PLAN III p c f f
C-007 LINING SYSTEM I - p c f
C-008 LINING SYSTEM II - p c f
C-009 LINING SYSTEM III - p c f
C-010 SURVEY CONTROL PLAN I p c f f
C-011 SURVEY CONTROL PLAN II p c f f
C-012 SURVEY CONTROL PLAN III p c f f
C-013 EROSION CONTROL/STORMWATER II - c f f
C-014 EROSION CONTROL/STORMWATER II - c f f
C-015 YARD PIPING PLAN I p c f f
C-016 YARD PIPING PLAN II p c f f
C-017 YARD PIPING PLAN III - p c f
C-018 YARD PIPING PLAN IV - p c f
C-019 YARD PIPING PLAN V - p c f
C-020 YARD PIPING SECTIONs - c f f
C-021 PAVING AND GRADING I p c f f
C-022 PAVING AND GRADING II - c f f
C-023 GRADING SECTIONS I - c f f
C-024 GRADING SECTIONS II - c f f
C-025 GRADING SECTIONS III - c f f
C-026 GRADING SECTIONS IV - c f f
99 C-501 DETAILS I - c f f
99 C-502 DETAILS II - c f f
99 C-503 DETAILS III - p c f
99 C-504 DETAILS IV - p c f
99 C-505 DETAILS V - p c f
Architectural
00 A-001 ARCHITECTURAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS p c f f
00 A-001 ARCHITECTURAL CODE REVIEW/AREA CLASSIFICATION - c f f 03 A-101 MEMBRANE TANKS (W/ CANOPY) PLAN p c f f
03 A-102 MEMBRANE TANKS ROOF PLAN p c f f
03 A-201 MEMBRANE TANKS ELEVATIONS p c f f
03 A-301 MEMBRANE TANKS SECTIONS - p c f
04 A-101 PERMEATE PUMPS (W/ CANOPY) PLAN p c f f
04 A-102 PERMEATE PUMPS ROOF PLAN p c f f
04 A-201 PERMEATE PUMPS ELEVATIONS p c f f
04 A-301 PERMEATE PUMPS SECTIONS - p c f
05 A-001 PROCESS BUILDING (OFFICE, LAB, BLOWERS (PEMB)) LIFE SAFETY p c f f 05 A-101 PROCESS BUILDING PLAN p c f f
05 A-102 PROCESS BUILDING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - p c f 05 A-103 PROCESS BUILDING ROOF PLAN p c f f
05 A-201 PROCESS BUILDING ELEVATIONS p c f f
05 A-301 PROCESS BUILDING SECTIONS - p c f
05 A-301 PROCESS BUILDING WALL SECTIONS - p c f
05 A-501 PROCESS BUILDING ENLARGED PLANS AND INT ELEVATIONS - p c f 07 A-101 CHEMICAL STORAGE (W/ CANOPY) PLAN p c f f
07 A-102 CHEMICAL STORAGES ROOF PLAN p c f f
07 A-201 CHEMICAL STORAGE ELEVATIONS p c f f
07 A-301 CHEMICAL STORAGE SECTIONS - p c f
08 A-101 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS (W/ CANOPY) PLAN p c f f 08 A-102 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS ROOF PLAN p c f f
08 A-201 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS ELEVATIONS - p c f
08 A-301 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERS SECTIONS - p c f
99 A-501 DETAILS I p c f f
99 A-502 DETAILS II - p c f
99 A-503 DETAILS III - p c f
99 A-601 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS - p c f
99 A-602 WINDOW/ LOUVER SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, & DETAILS - p c f XX A-101 RO CHEMICAL STORAGE (W/ CANOPY) PLAN p c f f
XX A-102 RO CHEMICAL STORAGES ROOF PLAN p c f f
XX A-201 RO CHEMICAL STORAGE ELEVATIONS p c f f
XX A-301 RO CHEMICAL STORAGE SECTIONS - p c f
Structural
00 S-001 STRUCTURAL NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS c c f f
00 S-002 STRUCTURAL NOTES II p c c f
00 S-003 STRUCTURAL NOTES III p c c f
01 S-101 FINE SCREENS - FOUNDATION PLAN p p c f
01 S-102 FINE SCREENS - UPPER LEVEL PLAN p p c f
01 S-301 FINE SCREENS - SECTIONS - c c f
02 S-101 REACTORS - FOUNDATION PLAN p c c f
02 S-102 REACTORS - UPPER LEVEL PLAN p p c f
NO. DRAWING TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN
BANNING WWTP DRAWING LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN
2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - DRAWING LIST 1 - Drawings 1164 AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
NO. DRAWING TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN
BANNING WWTP DRAWING LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN
02 S-301 REACTORS - SECTIONS I - c c f
02 S-302 REACTORS - SECTIONS II - p c f
03 S-101 MEMBRANE TANKS/PERMEATE PUMPS - PLAN & SECTIONS p p c f 04 S-101 PERMEATE PUMPS - PLAN & SECTIONS p p c f
05 S-101 PROCESS BUILDING - PLAN & SECTIONS p p c f
06 S-101 UV SYSTEM UPPER LOWEER LEVEL PLAN p c c f
06 S-102 UV SYSTEM TANK- UPPER LEVEL PLAN p c c f
06 S-301 UV SYSTEM SECTIONS I - c c f
06 S-302 UV SYSTEM SECTIONS Ii - p c f
07 S-101 CHEMICAL STORAGE - PLAN & SECTIONS - p c f
08 S-101 ROTARY DRUM THICKENERSS - PLAN & SECTIONS p c c f 99 S-501 STRUCTURAL STANDARD DETAILS I - p c f
99 S-502 STRUCTURAL STANDARD DETAILS II - p c f
99 S-503 STRUCTURAL STANDARD DETAILS III - p c f
99 S-504 STRUCTURAL STANDARD DETAILS IV - - c f
99 S-505 STRUCTURAL STANDARD DETAILS V - - c f
XX-S-101 BLENDING TANK - PLANS AND SECTIONS - p c f
XX-S-102 CHEMICAL FACILITY - PLANS AND SECTIONS - p c f Process Mechanical
00 D-001 PROCESS LEGEND p c f f
00 D-002 NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS p c f f
00 D-003 PIPE SCHEDULE p c f f
00 D-004 PROCESS SCHEDULES I (PUMPS, BLOWERS, CHEM METERING) p c f f 00 D-005 PROCESS SCHEDULES II (SLIDE GATES, STOP LOGS, HOISTING) - p c f 00 D-006 PROCESS SCHEDULES II (MIXING) - p c f
00 D-007 SCREENINGS PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
00 D-008 MBR REACTOR PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM I (INCL AERATION BLOWERS) 00 D-009 MBR REACTOR PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM II
00 D-010 MEMBRANE TANK PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
00 D-011 PERMEATE PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM (INCL. BW PUMPS & AIR SCOUR BLOWERS) 00 D-012 CHEMICAL FEED PFD I (HYPO)
00 D-013 CHEMICAL FEED PFD II (POLYMER)
00 D-014 CHEMICAL FEED PFD (CITRIC ACID)
00 D-015 CHEMICAL FEED PFD (CARBON FOR MBR)
00 D-016 UV PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
00 D-017 RDT PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
00 D-016 PLANT WATER PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
00 D-017 SECONDARY DIGESTER CONVERSION PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM 01 D-101 FINE SCREEN LOWER PLAN p c f f
01 D-102 FINE SCREEN UPPER PLAN p c f f
01 D-301 FINE SCREEN SECTION I - c f f
01 D-302 FINE SCREEN SECTION II - p c f
02 D-101 AERATION TANKS LOWER LEVEL p c f f
02 D-102 AERATION TANKS LOWER LEVEL II p c f f
02 D-103 AERATION TANKS UPPER LEVEL p c f f
02 D-104 AERATION TANKS UPPER LEVEL II p c f f
02 D-301 AERATION TANKS SECTION I - c f f
02 D-302 AERATION TANKS SECTION II - c f f
03 D-101 MEMBRANE TANKS LOWER PLAN I p c f f
03 D-103 MEMBRANE TANKS UPPER PLAN I p c f f
03 D-301 MEMBRANE TANKS SECTION I - c f f
03 D-302 MEMBRANE TANKS SECTION II - c f f
04 D-101 PERMEATE & BW PUMPS p p c f
04 D-301 PERMEATE & BW PUMPS SECTION II - c f f
05 D-101 BLOWER ROOM PLAN & SECTION p p c f
05 D-102 PLANT WATER PUMPS PLAN & SECTION - c f f
06 D-101 UV DISINFECTION FACILITY LOWER PLAN (INCLUDES PUMPS) p p c f 06 D-301 UV DISINFECTION FACITILY SECTION I - c f f
06 D-302 UV DISINFECTION FACILITY SECTION II - c f f
07 D-101 CHEMICA AREA PLAN (HYPO, CITRIC, CARBON) p p c f 07 D-301 CHEMICAL AREA SECTION - p c f
08 D-101 RDT PLAN (INCLUDES POLYMER AREA) p c f f
08 D-102 RDT UPPER / PLATFORM PLAN - p c f
08 D-301 RDT SECTION I - p c f
09 DD-101 DIGESTER CONVERSION DEMO I p c f f
09 DD-102 DIGESTER CONVERSION DEMO II - p c f
09 D-101 DIGESTER CONVERSION PLAN I p c f f
09 D-102 DIGESTER CONVERSION PLAN II - p c f
99 D-001 TANK DETAILS I - p c f
99 D-002 TANK DETAILS II - p c f
99 D-002 DETAILS I - p c f
99 D-003 DETAILS II - p c f
99 D-004 DETAILS III - p c f
XX D-101 RO TANKS, CIP & PERMEATE TANKS LOWER PLAN - p c f XX D-102 RO TANKS, CIP & PERMEATE TANKS UPPER PLAN - p c f XX D-301 RO TANKS, CIP & PERMEATE TANKS SECTION I - p c f XX D-001 RO REJECT & EVAP PONDS PLAN (ASSUMES 1 TYPICAL PLAN FOR ALL) - p c f XX D-002 RO REJECT & EVAP PONDS SECTION (ASSUMES 1 TYPICAL SECTION FOR ALL PONDS) - p c f 2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - DRAWING LIST 2 - Drawings 1165 AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
NO. DRAWING TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN
BANNING WWTP DRAWING LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN
HVAC
00 H-001 LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS p c f f 00 H-002 SCHEDULE I p c f f
00 H-003 SCHEDULE II
05 H-100 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION AND CONTROL - p c f
05 H-101 FLOOR PLANS p c f f
05 H-102 ROOF PLAN p c f f
05 H-201 ELEVATION I - c f f
05 H-202 ELEVATION II - c f f
99 H-001 INSTALLATION DETAILS - c f f
Plumbing
00 P-001 LEGEND, NOTES AND ABBREVATIONS p c f f
00 P-002 SCHEDULE I p c f f
00 P-003 SCHEDULE II
05 P-100 UNDEGROUND SANITARY DRAIN - p c f
05 P-101 GROUND FLOOR PLAN SANITARY DRAIN/VENT p c f f
05 P-102 GROUND FLOOR WATER AND NATURAL GAS p c f f
05 P-201 PARTIAL FLOOR-BATHROOM UNDERGROUND p c f f
99 P-001 DETAILS I - p c f
99 P-002 DETAILS II - p c f
Fire Protection
00 FP-001 LEGEND, NOTES AND ABBREVATIONS p c f f
05 FP-001 PIPING RISERS AND MAINS p c f f
99 FP-001 INSTALLATION DETAILS - p c f
Instrumentation & Control
00 I-001 SYMBOLS, LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES p c f f
00 I-002 NETWORK DIAGRAM I p c f f
00 I-003 NETWORK DIAGRAM II - p c f
01 I-001 HEADWORKS AND FINE SCREENS I p c f f
01 I-002 HEADWORKS AND FINE SCREENS II - p c f
02 I-001 AERATION TANKS I, II, III p c f f
03 I-001 MEMBRANE TANKS I, II, III p c f f
04 I-001 PERMEATE AND BACKWASH PUMPS p c f f
05 I-001 AERATION BLOWERS p c f f
05 I-002 MBR AIR SCOUR BLOWERS p c f f
06 I-001 UV SYSTEM p c f f
06 I-002 PLANT WATER PUMPS - p c f
07 I-001 SODIUM HYPO p c f f
07 I-002 POLYMER p c f f
07 I-003 CITRIC ACID p c f f
07 I-001 MICRO C p c f f
08 I-002 RDT I p c f f
09 I-001 DIGESTERS I p c f f
09 I-002 DIGESTERS II - p c f
99 I-001 MISC. I/O I - - c f
99 I-002 MISC. I/O II - - c f
XX I-001 RO P&D I p c f f
XX I-002 RO P&D II p c f f
XX I-003 EVAPORATION PONDS P&ID I p c f f
XX I-004 EVAPORATION PONDS P&ID II p c f f
XX I-005 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS p c f f
XX I-006 PH ADJUSTING CHEMICALS P&ID p c f f
Electrical
00 E-001 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS p c f f 00 E-002 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN I - POWER p c f f
00 E-003 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN II - SYSTEMS - p c f
00 E-004 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM I - EXST. SWBD-MS - DEMOLITION - p c f 00 E-005 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM II - EXST. MCC-1 - DEMOLITION - p c f 00 E-006 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM II - EXST. MCC-3M - DEMOLITION - p c f 00 E-007 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM III - EXST. SWBD-MS - MODIFICATIONS p c f f 00 E-601 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES I - AREA CLASSIFICATITON - p c f 00 E-602 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES II - CONDUIT AND WIRE, LUMINAIRE - p c f 00 E-603 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES III - GROUNDING, TABLE OF RESPON. - p c f 00 E-604 SCADA SYSTEM NETWORK DIAGRAM - p c f
00 E-605 DATA AND PHONE SYSTEM NETWORK DIAGRAM - p c f
00 E-606 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NETWORK DIAGRAM - p c f
01 E-101 FINE SCREENS - POWER PLAN - p c f
01 E-201 FINE SCREENS - SYSTEMS PLAN - p c f
01 E-601 FINE SCREENS - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
02 E-101 AERATION TANKS - POWER PLAN I - p c f
02-E-102 AERATION TANKS - POWER PLAN II - p c f
02-E-201 AERATION TANKS - SYSTEMS PLAN - p c f
02 E-601 AERATION TANKS - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
03 E-101 MEMBRANE TANKS - POWER PLAN I - p c f
03 E-102 MEMBRANE TANKS - POWER PLAN II - p c f
03 E-201 MEMBRANE TANKS - SYSTEMS PLAN I - p c f
03 E-202 MEMBRANE TANKS - SYSTEMS PLAN II - p c f
03 E-601 MEMBRANE TANKS - RISERS - - c f
2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - DRAWING LIST 3 - Drawings 1166 AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
NO. DRAWING TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN
BANNING WWTP DRAWING LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN
04 E-101 PERMEATE & BACKWASH PUMPS - POWER PLAN - p c f 04 E-601 PERMEATE & BACKWASH PUMPS - RISER DIAGRAMS - p c f 04 E-602 PERMEATE & BACKWASH PUMPS - WIRING SCHEMATICS - p c f 05 E-001 PROCESS BUILDING - SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM I - SWBD-1 - p c f 05 E-002 PROCESS BUILDING - SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM II - MCC-1 - p c f 05 E-003 PROCESS BUILDING - SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM III - MCC-2 - p c f 05 E-004 PROCESS BULIDING - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES I - p c f 05 E-005 PROCESS BUILDING - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES II - p c f 05 E-006 PROCESS BUILDING - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES III - p c f 05 E-101 PROCESS BUILDING - POWER PLAN I - GRADE LEVEL - p c f 05 E-102 PROCESS BUILDING - POWER PLAN II - GRADE LEVEL - p c f 05 E-105 PROCESS BUILDING - POWER PLAN V - ROOF LEVEL - p c f 05 E-201 PROCESS BUILDING - SYSTEMS PLAN I - GRADE LEVEL - p c f 05 E-202 PROCESS BUILDING - SYSTEMS PLAN II - GRADE LEVEL - p c f 05 E-601 PROCESS BULIDING - WIRING SCHEMATICS I - p c f 05 E-602 PROCESS BUILDING - WIRING SCHEMATICS II - p c f 05 E-603 PROCESS BUILDING - WIRING SCHEMATICS III - p c f 05 E-604 PROCESS BUILDING - RISER DIAGRAMS I - - c f
05 E-605 PROCESS BULIDING - RISER DIAGRAMS II - - c f
05 E-606 PROCESS BULIDING - RISER DIAGRAMS III - - c f
06 E-101 UV - POWER PLAN I - p c f
06 E-201 UV - SYSTEMS PLAN I - p c f
06 E-601 UV - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
07 E-101 HYPO/CITRIC/MICRO C - POWER PLAN I - p c f
07 E-102 HYPO/CITRIC/MICRO C - POWER PLAN II - p c f
07 E-201 HYPO/CITRIC/MICRO C - SYSTEMS PLAN I - p c f
07 E-202 HYPO/CITRIC/MICRO C - SYSTEMS PLAN II - p c f
07 E-601 HYPO/CITRIC/MICRO C - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
08 E-101 RDT - POWER PLAN I - GRADE LEVEL - p c f
08 E-102 RDT - POWER PLAN II - PLATFORM/UPPER LEVEL - p c f 08 E-201 RDT - SYSTEMS PLAN - p c f
08 E-601 RDT - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
09 ED-101 DIGESTER - ELECTRICAL DEMO PLAN I - p c f
09 ED-102 DIGESTER - ELECTRICAL DEMO PLAN II - p c f
09 E-101 DIGESTER - POWER PLAN I - p c f
09 E-102 DIGESTER - POWER PLAN II - p c f
09 E-201 DIGESTER - SYSTEMS PLAN II - p c f
09 E-202 DIGESTER - SYSTEMS PLAN II - p c f
09 E-601 DIGeSTER - RISER DIAGRAMS - - c f
99 E-501 ELECTRICAL DETAILS I - - f f
99 E-502 ELECTRICAL DETAILS II - - f f
99 E-503 ELECTRICAL DETAILS III - - f f
XX-E-001 MODS TO SITE PLAN - p c f
XX-E-002 RO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - p c f
XX-E-003 RO AND PONDS AREA SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - p c f
XX-E-101 RO AREA POWER PLAN I - p c f
XX-E-102 RO AREA POWER PLAN II - p c f
XX-E-103 PONDS POWER PLAN I - p c f
XX-E-104 PONDS POWER PLAN II - p c f
XX-E-201 RO AREA SYSTEMS PLAN - p c f
XX-E-202 PONDS AREA SYSTEMS PLAN - p c f
XX-E-601 PANEL SCHEDULES I - p c f
XX-E-602 PANEL SCHEDUELS II - p c f
XX-E-603 RISER DIAGRAMS I - p c f
XX-E-604 RISER DIAGRAMS II - p c f
XX-E-605 WIRING SCHEMATICS I - p c f
XX-E-606 WIRING SCHEMATICS II - p c f
TOTAL 102 252 269 269
2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - DRAWING LIST 4 - Drawings 1167 AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
Division 1
01045 Cutting, Coring and Patching - c c f
01065 Structural Tests and Inspections - - c f
01568 Erosion Control - - c f
01900 Seismic and Wind Requirements - c c f
Division 2
02018 Vibration Monitoring - - c f
02050 Demolition and Alterations - - c f
02100 Site Preparation - - c f
02160 Temporary Excavation Support Systems - - c f
02210 Earth Excavation, Backfill and Grading p c c f
02223 Screened Gravel - c c f
02224 Bank-Run Gravel - c c f
02741 Select Borrow - c c f
02271 Geotextile Fabric - c c f
02431 Catchbasins - c c f
02435 Crushed Stone - c c f
02444 Chain-Link Fences and Gates - c c f
02560 Manholes - c c f
02615 Ductile-Iron Piping and Fittings p c c f
02620 PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe p c c f
02625 Corrugated HDPE Pipe - c c f
02630 PVC Pressure Pipe p c c f
02740 Bituminous Pavement and Appurtenances - c c f
02760 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement - c c f
02770 Concrete Sidewalks, Curbs and Gutters - c c f
02776 Parking Bumpers and Guardrails - - c f
XXXXX HDPE Geomembranes p c c f
XXXXX Geosynthetic Clay Liners p c c f
XXXXX Geocomposite Drains p c c f
Division 3
03100 Concrete Formwork - c c f
03200 Concrete Reinforcement - c c f
03250 Construction and Expansion Joints - c c f
03255 Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops - c c f
03256 Hydrophilic Rubber Waterstops - c c f
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete - c c f
03345 Concrete Floor Treatment - c c f
03350 Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) - c c f
03420 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults - c c f
03600 Grout - c c f
03730 Concrete Repair Work - c c f
03800 Leakage Testing of Containment Structures - c c f Division 5
05120 Structural Steel - c c f
05500 Miscellaneous Metal - c c f
05510 Aluminum Stairs, Ladders and Platforms - c c f
05540 Aluminum Plate Covers and Frames - c c f
Division 6
06129 Fiberglass Baffles, Weirs, and Filter Washwater Troughs - c c f 06600 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Grating and Structural Fabrications - c c f Division 7
07840 Firestopping - c c f
07900 Joint Sealants - c c f
Division 8
08100 Metal Doors and Frames - c c f
08331 Insulated Overhead Coiling Doors - c c f
08500 Windows - c c f
08710 Finish Hardware - c c f
08810 Glass and Glazing - c c f
08920 Translucent Wall Panels - c c f
Division 9
09250 Drywall Construction - c c f
09300 Tile Work - c c f
09500 Acoustical Treatment - c c f
09940 Shop Painting - - c f
09941 Field Painting - - c f
Division 10
10162 Metal Toilet Partitions - c c f
10200 Louvers - c c f
10525 Safety, First Aid, and Fire Fighting Equipment - - c f 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories - c c f
Division 11
11306 Submersible Solids Handling Pumps & Appurtenances p c c f 11316 Process Pumps and Appurtenances p c c f
11323 Chemical Diaphragm Metering Pumps and Appurtenances p c c f 11326 Mechanically Cleaned Fine Screen (In-Channel Rotary Type) p c c f 11332 Screenings Washpress & Appurtenances p c c f
11340 MBR Package c c c f
11341 RO Package c c c f
BANNING WWTP - SPECIFICATIONS LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
NO. SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN 60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN 2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - SPECIFICATIONS LIST 1 - Specifications 1168 AECOM/WML JV Appendix A - Scope of Work
BANNING WWTP - SPECIFICATIONS LIST
Estimated Level of Detail for Each Percent (%) Submittal p - partial, c - complete, f - final
NO. SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE 30% DESIGN 100% DESIGN 60% DESIGN 90% DESIGN 11347 Ultraviolet (UV) Disinfection p c c f
11350 Polymer Blend Feed Equipment and Appurtenances p c c f 11365 Rotary Drum Thickeners and Appurtenances p c c f
11377 Rotary Positive Displacement Blowers & Appurtenances p c c f 11383 Digester Equipment Specialties p c c f
11386 Spiral Heat Exchangers p c c f
11398 Diesel Generators p c c f
XXXXX Mechanical Evaporators p c c f
Division 12
12500 Furniture - - c f
12641 Laboratory Furniture - - c f
Division 13
13120 Metal Building Systems - c c f
13121 Pre-Engineered Metal Building Systems - c c f
13141 Epoxy Coated, Bolted Steel Water Tank - c c f
13202 Polyethylene Chemical Storage Tanks & Appurtenances - c c f 13300 Instrumentation and Control System (General) - p c f Division 14
14300 Hoisting Equipment - c c f
14370 Bridge Cranes and Appurtenances - c c f
14549 Sludge Conveying Equipment (Shaftless Screw Type) - c c f Division 15
15056 Pipe Supports - c c f
15066 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings - c c f
15101 Process Valves and Appurtenances - c c f
15103 Stainless Steel Slide Gate and Appurtenances - c c f 15108 Stop Logs and Appurtenances - c c f
15109 Electric Motor Actuators and Appurtenances - c c f 15113 Short Body Tilting Disc Check Valves and Appurtenances - c c f 15114 Knife Gate Valves and Appurtenances (Bonneted Type) - c c f 15115 Combined Function Check Valves and Appurtenances - c c f 15177 Bladder Type Surge Tanks and Appurtenances - c c f 15270 Membrane Bioreactors (MBR) - c c f
15370 Process Piping and Appurtenances - c c f
15817 Fine Bubble Air Diffusers - c c f
15819 Air Diffuser Assemblies (Course Bubble Air Diffusers) - c c f 15820 Large Bubble Channel Mixing Systems and Appurtenances - c c f 15821 Large Bubble Anaerobic-Anoxic Tank Mixing Systems & Appurtenances - c c f 15855 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Duct, Dampers and Appurtenances - c c f 15856 Odor Control System - c c f
15806 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems - c c f 15052 Building Services Materials and Methods - c c f
15195 Natural Gas and Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) Piping Systems - c c f 15410 Plumbing Systems - c c f
15171 Motors - c c f
Division 16
16050 General Electrical - c c f
16051 Electrical Demolition - c c f
16075 Disconnection of Service - c c f
16110 Raceways - c c f
16112 Busway - c c f
16113 Cablebus - c c f
16120 Conductors - c c f
16121 MV Cable - c c f
16140 Wiring Devices - c c f
16147 MV VFD - c c f
16151 Medium Voltage Electric Motors - c c f
16160 Panelboards - c c f
16161 Transformer-Panelboard Assembiles - c c f
16260 Low Voltage VFDs - c c f
16320 Dry Type Transformers - c c f
16321 Padmount Transformer and Fused Load Interrupter - c c f 16322 Primary Substation Transformers - c c f
16355 Unit Substations - c c f
16359 Electrical System Studies - c c f
16360 Closed Transition ATS - c c f
16361 LV Switchgear - c c f
16362 MV Switchgear - c c f
16366 LV Switchboards - c c f
16368 Power Monitoring - c c f
16400 Surge Protection Devices - c c f
16402 Underground Distribution System - c c f
16450 Grounding - c c f
16500 Lighting - c c f
16521 Exterior Lighting - c c f
16721 Fire Alarm - c c f
16900 Controls and Misc Equipment - c c f
16920 LV MCCs - c c f
16921 MV MCCs - c c f
16998 Field Inspection - - c f
16999 Field Acceptance Test - - c f
TOTAL 22 132 146 146
2/18/2025 CITY OF BANNING WWTP RECYCLED WATER UPGRADES - SPECIFICATIONS LIST 2 - Specifications 1169 Exhibit C
Supporting Pricing Information
1170
Task Description Cost of Work
Task 1 Design
Task 1.1 Preliminary Design Report (PDR) $ 352,948
Task 1.2 30% Preliminary Design $ 691,617
Task 1.3 60% Design Phase $ 915,033
Task 1.4 Hydraulic Analysis/ Hydraulic Profile $ 54,452 Task 1.5 90% Design Phase $ -
Task 1.6 Final Design Phase $ 1,054,067
Task 2 Cost Estimating
Task 2.1 Initial Baseline Cost Model and Updates (5) $ 162,598 Task 2.2 GMP Development $ 105,754
Task 3 Meetings & Reports
Task 3.1 Kick-off Meeting/Workshop (1) $ 42,934
Task 3.2 Progress Meetings and Reports (16) $ 123,563
Task 3.3 Project Status Reports (Monthly with Invoice) $ 47,709 Task 3.4 Risk Management Workshop (1) $ 18,766
Task 3.5 Constructability Review Workshops (2) $ 47,591 Task 3.6 SCADA Development and Scoping Workshops (4) $ 55,966 Task 4 Investigation / Support
Task 4.1 Potholing and Cultural Monitoring $ 24,577
Task 4.2 Topographic Survey $ 29,954
Task 4.3 Environmental Support ( $30,000 allowance) $ 27,444 Task 4.4 Geotechnical Investigation $ 121,809
Task 4.5 Permitting Support and Title 22 and Title 27 (if needed) Eng Reports $ 96,836 Task 4.6 Energy Tax Credits / Incentives $ 25,009
Total $ 3,998,627
1171
Personnel Title/Classification (Including Subconsultants) Design Manager (Perigault)
Process Design
Lead (Lena)
Water Process
Lead (Franchi)
Process Design
Lead II (Bowden)
Project Engineer
(Hayroyan)
Project
Controls
(Minelli)
Air Quality
Specialist
(Various)
Permitting
(Bartholomae)
Design Support
(Various) Safety (TBD) Est/Proc/ Change
Mgmt (Various)
Geotech
(Various)
BIM
Coordinator
(TBD)
QRM (Harris) O&M Lead () *AECOM Design
Production Hydraulic Engineer
DB Project
Manager
(Lawrence)
Pre-Construction
Manager
(Guillama)
Construction
Manager (Reyes)
Estimator/Cost
Controls Estimator(s) Scheduler Commisioning
Lea
Safety Director
Construction
Superintendent
Operations
Administrator
Task Description Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Total Hours Task 1 Design
Task 1.1 Preliminary Design Report (PDR) 180 141 75 123 70 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 8 0 671 9 76 80 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1452 Task 1.2 30% Preliminary Design 131 127 66 53 176 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 8 0 2698 9 85 81 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 3452 Task 1.3 60% Design Phase 110 127 75 35 220 0 88 0 7 0 99 19 0 8 0 3818 0 80 80 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 4774 Task 1.4 Hydraulic Analysis/ Hydraulic Profile 16 49 9 7 18 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 2 0 33 53 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 206 Task 1.5 90% Design Phase 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Task 1.6 Final Design Phase 163 141 57 39 264 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 17 0 4465 0 120 120 0 0 0 0 32 0 0 0 5431 Task 2 Cost Estimating
Task 2.1 Initial Baseline Cost Model and Updates (5) 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 80 24 240 240 120 0 0 0 0 744 Task 2.2 GMP Development 16 14 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 0 24 40 8 80 160 40 0 0 0 0 502 Task 3 Meetings & Reports
Task 3.1 Kick-off Meeting/Workshop (1) 41 35 0 0 0 0 0 28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 8 8 4 4 0 4 4 4 0 4 152 Task 3.2 Progress Meetings and Reports (16) 41 35 88 70 44 0 0 55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 32 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 438 Task 3.3 Project Status Reports (Monthly with Invoice) 0 0 0 0 0 176 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 13 0 13 0 13 0 0 0 26 254 Task 3.4 Risk Management Workshop (1) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 16 4 4 0 0 4 4 0 4 64 Task 3.5 Constructability Review Workshops (2) 16 14 9 7 0 0 0 0 7 0 13 0 0 0 0 22 0 16 16 16 16 0 8 0 8 16 8 192 Task 3.6 SCADA Development and Scoping Workshops (4) 41 21 9 18 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 55 0 16 16 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 16 214 Task 4 Investigation / Support
Task 4.1 Potholing and Cultural Monitoring 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 8 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 Task 4.2 Topographic Survey 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 8 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36 Task 4.3 Environmental Support ( $30,000 allowance) 20 0 0 0 18 0 0 83 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 125 Task 4.4 Geotechnical Investigation 2 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 24 7 221 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 275 Task 4.5 Permitting Support and Title 22 and Title 27 (if needed) Eng Reports 8 0 44 0 9 0 0 385 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 458 Task 4.6 Energy Tax Credits / Incentives 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 59 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 69 Total 816 704 440 352 880 176 88 550 132 40 132 240 0 44 0 11,872 88 517 613 56 361 400 185 76 16 16 90 18,884 Summary
1172
Exhibit D
List of Reference Documents
1173
SS
BAR SCREEN
SS
BYPASS CHANNEL
MECHANICAL
BAR SCREEN
SCREENINGS
WASHER
COMPACTOR
SCREENINGCONTAINER
MECHANICAL
BAR
SCREEN
TO DISPOSAL GRIT CONTAINER GRIT CLASSIFIER
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER 3
EQUALIZATION
BASIN
PRIMARY
EFFLUENT
PUMP STATION
FINE
SCREEN 1
PERMEATE
BACKWASH
PUMP 3
TRICKLING
FILTER 1
AERATION BLOWER MBR AIR SCOUR BLOWER
PIPE GALLERY
RECIRCULATION
PUMP STATION
DIGESTER 1
DRYING BEDS
THICKENED
SLUDGE PUMPS
MECHANICAL
THICKENER
INFLUENT
FLOW
SPLITTER BOX
GRIT
CHAMBER
GRIT PUMP 1
CITRIC
ACID
SODIUM
HYPO
RECYCLE
WATER
RESERVOIR
CHLORINE CONTACT TANKS
TO
PERCOLATION
POND
RSL
TSL
RSL
INFLUENT CHANNEL
RAS
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER 1
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER 2
GRIT PUMP 2
GRIT
PE
RSL
PE
RSL
PE
PI
RSL
PI
PE
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER 2
SODIUM
HYPO
CHLORINE CONTACT TANK
TRICKLING
FILTER 1
BFEBFE
TRICKLING FILTER
RECIRCULATION PUMPS
BFEBFE
TO
PERCOLATION
POND
SLUDGE
THICKENER
HR
DIGESTER 2 DIGESTER 3
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HR
HS
HEAT
EXCHANGER
RSL
SS
SS
MBR MBR MBR PERMEATE BACKWASH PUMP 2 PERMEATE
BACKWASH
PUMP 1
PERM
BWBW
PERMPERM
NON-POTABLE
RECYCLE
WATER
DISTRIBUTION
RO FACILITY
NP-1
MECHANICAL
EVAPORATORS/
RO CONCENTRATE
EVAPORATION
PONDS
RO
CONC
NON-POTABLE
RECYCLE WATER
BOOSTER
EQUALIZATION BASIN
PUMP STATION
WAS
RSL
DSL
DSL
DSL
HR
HS
HEAT
EXCHANGER
HS
TANK 4
ANOXIC
ZONE
TANK 4
AEROBIC
ZONE
MBR
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER 1
WASHER/
COMPACTOR 1
FINE
SCREEN 2
WASHER/
COMPACTOR 2
FINE
SCREEN 3
WASHER/
COMPACTOR 3
TANK 4
SWING
ZONE
TANK 3
ANOXIC
ZONE
TANK 3
AEROBIC
ZONE
TANK 3
SWING
ZONE
TANK 2
ANOXIC
ZONE
TANK 2
AEROBIC
ZONE
TANK 2
SWING
ZONE
TANK 1
ANOXIC
ZONE
TANK 1
AEROBIC
ZONE
TANK 1SWING
ZONE
EFFLUENT CHANNEL
MLSS
PUMP
STATION
BW PERM
PERMEATE
BACKWASH
PUMP 4
WAS PUMPS
RO FEED
PUMPS
PERM
TANKS
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
G-101
N2W ENGINEERING, INC.
3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150
Irvine, CA 92602
WWW.N2WENG.COM
SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\JAMES WANG\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W - SERVER\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\MBR PFD 11 04 2023.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
2/27/2024 11:24 AM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE:
ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE
ANSI-D105-0002
PRELIMINARY
BANNING, CA 92220
789 N. SAN GORGONIO AVENUE
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
1174
N N2W ENGINEERING, INC. 3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150 Irvine, CA 92602 WWW.N2WENG.COM SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\JAMES WANG\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W - SERVER\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\MBR SITE PLAN JAMES WANG 02 12 2024.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
2/27/2024 11:14 AM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE:
ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE
ANSI-D105-0002
PRELIMINARY
BANNING, CA 92220
789 N. SAN GORGONIO AVENUE
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
MECAHNICAL PLAN AND SECTION
M-101
1175
N2W ENGINEERING, INC.
3240 El Camino Real. Suite 150
Irvine, CA 92602
WWW.N2WENG.COM
SHEET:
CLIENT:
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO.
STATUS:
FILE: C:\USERS\JAMES WANG\N2W ENGINEERING\N2W - SERVER\PROJECTS\105-CITY OF BANNING\105-0002 OWNER ADVISOR W&WWTP\6. PROJECT ENGINEERING AND DESIGN\06.01_PRELIMINARY DESIGN\DESIGN DRAWING\MBR SITE PLAN JAMES WANG 02 12 2024.DWG REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
PLOT DATE:
2/27/2024 11:13 AM
DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY:
TITLE:
ORIGINAL SHEET SIZE
ANSI-D105-0002
PRELIMINARY
BANNING, CA 92220
789 N. SAN GORGONIO AVENUE
CITY OF BANNING
BANNING, CA 92220
2242 CHARLES STREET
BANNING WWTP
CIVIL SITE PLAN
C-101
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
Page | i
City of Banning
Wastewater Treatment Plant
and Recycled Water Upgrades
Feasibility Study (Revision 1)
January 5, 2024
N2W Engineering, Inc. T 714.716.1711
3240 El Camino Real, Suite 150, Irvine, CA 92602 [email protected] 1320
Page | ii
Prepared by: Iris Jimenez and Jamal Awad
Reviewed by: James Wang
1321
Page | iii
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 1 Prelude ............................................................................................................................ 1 Non-Federal Project Sponsor .......................................................................................... 1 Study Area and Project Map ........................................................................................... 1
1.3.1 Land Use ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Climate ........................................................................................................................ 6
1.3.3 Population ................................................................................................................... 6 Reclaimed Water Area .................................................................................................... 7
2. Statement of Problem and Needs .......................................................................................... 8 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 8 Need for Water Reclamation .......................................................................................... 8 Current Water Supplies................................................................................................... 8
2.3.1 Water Sources and Supplies ....................................................................................... 8
2.3.2 Wastewater Treatment Plant Flows ......................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Non-Potable Groundwater Well Capacities .............................................................. 15
2.3.4 Recycled Water Production ...................................................................................... 16 Current and Projected Water Demands ....................................................................... 16
2.4.1 Current Water Demands ........................................................................................... 16
2.4.2 Projected Water Demands........................................................................................ 17
2.4.3 Projected Recycled Water Demands ........................................................................ 18
2.4.4 Projected Water Supply and Demand Imbalances ................................................... 19 Future Recycled Water Supplies ................................................................................... 20 Water Quality Concerns ................................................................................................ 20
2.6.1 Regional Water Quality Control Board Order ........................................................... 20
2.6.2 Title 22 Requirements ............................................................................................... 22
2.6.3 Beaumont Basin Plan Requirements ........................................................................ 22
3. Water Reclamation, Recycling Opportunities ....................................................................... 23 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 23 Uses for Reclaimed Water ............................................................................................ 23 Water Market Available to Utilize Reclaimed Water ................................................... 23 1322
Page | iv
3.3.1 Methodology ............................................................................................................. 23
3.3.2 Potential Customers.................................................................................................. 24 Considerations That Will Prevent Implementing Water Reclamation ......................... 24 Agencies with Jurisdiction Over Sources of Reclaimed Water ..................................... 24 Potential Sources to be Reclaimed ............................................................................... 24 Description and Location of Source Water Facilities .................................................... 24 Current Water Reclamation Taking Place in Study Area .............................................. 24 Other Current and Projected Wastewaters and Disposal Options ............................... 25 Water Reclamation Technology Use in Study Area ...................................................... 25
4. Description of Alternatives ................................................................................................... 26 Non-Federal Funding Condition .................................................................................... 26 Specific Objectives Alternatives Are Designed to Address ........................................... 26
4.2.1 Alternative 1 - Do Nothing ........................................................................................ 26
4.2.2 Alternative 2 - Non-Potable Reuse ........................................................................... 27
4.2.3 Alternative 3 – Hybrid Non-Potable Reuse and Indirect Potable Reuse .................. 28 Description of the Proposed Water Reclamation Project ............................................ 30 Estimated Costs of Alternatives .................................................................................... 32 Waste-Stream Discharge Treatment ............................................................................ 32 Alternative Technologies .............................................................................................. 33
5. Economic Analysis ................................................................................................................. 34 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 34 Economic Analysis ......................................................................................................... 34 Cost Comparison of Alternatives that Would Satisfy Demand of Proposed Project .... 34 Description and Benefits of Water Supply Alternatives ............................................... 35 Alternative Most Likely to be Implemented in Absence of Project .............................. 35 Qualitative Benefits and Justification of Water Reclamation ....................................... 35
6. Selection of the proposed Water Reclamation Project ........................................................ 37 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 37 Justification of Water Reclamation as Selected Alternative......................................... 37 Analysis of Water Reclamation ..................................................................................... 37 1323
Page | v
6.3.1 Reduction, Postponement, or Elimination of Development of New or Expanded Water Supplies and Reduction of Diversions of Natural Water Courses ............................. 37
6.3.2 Reduction of Demand on Existing Federal Water Supply Facilities .......................... 37
6.3.3 Reduction, Postponement, or Elimination of new or Expanded Wastewater Facilities 38 7. Environmental Considerations and Potential Effects ........................................................... 39 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 39 Potential Environmental Impacts and Effects .............................................................. 39 Public Outreach ............................................................................................................. 41 Effect of Historic Properties .......................................................................................... 41 Avoiding Public Health and Environmental Quality Issues Associated with Use of Reclaimed Water....................................................................................................................... 41
8. Legal and Institutional Requirements ................................................................................... 43 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 43 Analysis of Water Rights Issues .................................................................................... 43 Discussion of Legal and Institutional Requirements with Potential to Affect Implementation of Project ........................................................................................................ 43
8.3.1 Department of Water Resources – Sustainable Groundwater Management Act .... 43
8.3.2 Groundwater Sustainability Agencies ....................................................................... 43
8.3.3 Groundwater Sustainability Plans ............................................................................. 44
8.3.4 San Gorgonio Pass Subbasin ..................................................................................... 44
8.3.5 Santa Ana River Basin Plan ....................................................................................... 45 Discussion of Need for Multi-Jurisdictional or Interagency Agreements ..................... 45 Discussion of Permitting Procedures Required ............................................................ 45 Discussion of Unresolved Issues Associated with Implementing Proposed Project .... 46 Identification of Current and Proposed Discharge Requirements ............................... 46 Rights to Wastewater Discharges ................................................................................. 46
9. Financial Capability of Sponsor ............................................................................................. 47 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 47 Schedule ........................................................................................................................ 47 Willingness and Capability of the City of Banning to Fund the Project ........................ 49 Project Funding Plan ..................................................................................................... 49 1324
Page | vi
9.4.1 Operating Budgets .................................................................................................... 49
9.4.2 Development Impact Fees ........................................................................................ 50 Other Funding Sources ................................................................................................. 51
10. Research Needs ..................................................................................................................... 52
11. References ............................................................................................................................ 53 List of Figures
Figure 1. City of Banning Project Map (courtesy of 2018 Integrated Master Plan (2018 IMP)) .... 3 Figure 2. City of Banning – Known Developments (courtesy of 2018 IMP).................................... 5 Figure 3. City of Banning Reclaimed Water Area (courtesy of 2018 IMP) ...................................... 7 Figure 4. City of Banning Reclaimed Wastewater Treatment Plant Location (courtesy of 2018 IMP) ....................................................................................................................................................... 14 Figure 5. Process Schematic for Existing WWTP ........................................................................... 15 Figure 6. City of Banning Potential Recycled Water Customers (courtesy of 2018 IMP) ............. 19 Figure 7. Preliminary Site Layout for Alternative 3 (courtesy of 2018 IMP) ................................. 29 List of Tables
Table 1. Current Land Use & Economic Statistics for Riverside County and City of Banning Land 4 Table 2. Recent Climate Characteristics (2022 – 2023) .................................................................. 6 Table 3. Imported Water Purchases, courtesy of the 2020 Urban Water Management Plan (2020 UWMP) ............................................................................................................................................ 9 Table 4. Imported Water Purchases, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP ............................................. 10 Table 5. Projected Water Supply Availability in AFY, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP ..................... 10 Table 6. Wastewater Flows Collected in City ................................................................................ 13 Table 7. Projected Wastewater Flows Collected in City ............................................................... 13 Table 8. Existing City Non-Potable Groundwater Well Capacities ............................................... 15 Table 9. Recycled Water Produced and/or Used in City ............................................................... 16 Table 10. City Recent Water Use .................................................................................................. 17 Table 11. Projected Water Demand by Sector in AFY, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP .................. 17 Table 12. Potential Recycled Water Users .................................................................................... 18 Table 13. Projected Water Supply and Demand Imbalances ....................................................... 19 Table 14. Projected Recycled Water Production and/or Use ....................................................... 20 Table 15. Banning WWTP Effluent Concentrations and Limitations ............................................ 21 Table 16. Preliminary Cost Estimate ............................................................................................. 30 Table 17. Cost Summary of Phase I of the Proposed Project, in 2023 dollars ............................. 31 Table 18. Replacement Costs, in 2023 dollars .............................................................................. 32 Table 19. Monetary Analysis ......................................................................................................... 32 Table 20. Non-Monetary Criteria .................................................................................................. 35 1325
Page | vii
Table 21. Potential Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures ........................................ 39 Table 22. Project Schedule – Phase 1 ........................................................................................... 48 Table 23. Rate Increases ............................................................................................................... 50 List of Appendices
Appendix A – RO Analysis Technical Memo
Appendix B – Rancho San Gorgonio Water Supply Assessment Appendix C – 50-Year Lifecycle Cost
Appendix D – Preliminary Detailed Site Plan and Process Flow Diagram Appendix E – Preliminary Capital Cost Estimate
Appendix F – Nitrogen Removal and Plant Reliability Technical Memo Appendix G – WDR Board Order R7-2016-0015
1326
Page | viii
List of Abbreviations
ADD – average day demand
AFY – acre-feet per year
BMP – best management practice
BMZ – Beaumont Management Zone
CEQA – California Environmental Quality Act
CIP – capital improvement plan
CWSRF – Clean Water State Revolving Fund
DDW – State Water Resources Control Board, Division of Drinking Water DWR – California Department of Water Resources
ETo – evapotranspiration
FONSI – Finding of No Significant Impacts
gpm – gallons per day
GSAs – Groundwater Sustainability Agencies
GSPs – Groundwater Sustainability Plans
IS-MND – Initial Study-Mitigated Negative Declaration
MBR – membrane bioreactor
MCL – maximum contaminant level
MGD – million gallons per day
MWC – Banning Heights Mutual Water Company
NEPA – National Environmental Policy Act
NTU – nephelometric turbidity unit
O&M – operation and maintenance
RO – reverse osmosis
RWQCB—Colorado River Basin Regional Water Quality Control Board SGMA – Sustainable Groundwater Management Act
SGPWA – San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency
STMZ – San Timoteo Management Zone
SWP – California State Water Project
SWRCB – State Water Resources Control Board
TDS – total dissolved solids
TN – total Nitrogen
US EPA – United States Environmental Protection Agency
UVAOP – ultraviolet advanced oxidation
WDRs – waste discharge requirements
WIFIA – Water Infrastructure Finance Innovation Act
WWTP – City of Banning Wastewater Treatment Plant
1327
Page | ix
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The City of Banning (City) has prepared this feasibility study to support a grant application for WaterSMART: Title XVI WIIN Act Water Reclamation and Reuse Projects for Fiscal Years 2023 and 2024 per Funding Opportunity Announcement No. R23AS00464. This study evaluates the feasibility of upgrading the City’s Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) to tertiary disinfected recycled water standards for non-potable reuse under the terms of the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR) Water Reclamation and Reuse (Title XVI) program. This study is structured to follow the Bureau of Reclamation Manual, Directives and Standards, “WTR 11-01.” The existing WWTP consists of preliminary treatment, primary treatment, secondary treatment, solids handling, disinfection (currently not in use), and evaporation/percolation ponds. The WWTP effluent is currently in compliance with discharge requirements, but it requires significant upgrades to comply with impending water quality discharge limits by the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB). In addition, the Trickling Filters, which perform secondary treatment, have reached their end of life. WWTP effluent discharges to percolation ponds that recharge into the Cabazon Groundwater Basin but is not entirely extracted by Banning - the percolated water flows to other water agencies located downgradient.
The proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project (Project) evaluated by this study consists of three phases: I) upgrading the existing WWTP to recycled water standards and building pipelines to connect the WWTP to customers currently using ground water from non-potable wells, II) building pipelines to connect the WWTP to the future recycled water customers, and III) building pipelines to connect the WWTP to a groundwater recharge basin upgradient of the Cabazon storage unit. Phase I will be implemented in the near term, and Phases II and III will be implemented in the long-term. Phases II and III are not included in this Feasibility Study for clarity. The City has only requested funding for Phase I in the WaterSMART funding application but will seek additional funding for Phases II and III in the future and will provide an updated Feasibility Study at that time.
Currently, there are no non-potable recycled water uses that have been implemented in the City.
By implementing both project components, non-potable reuse and indirect potable reuse, the supply and usage of locally sourced non-potable water supply will increase by an estimated 4,035 AFY (3.6 MGD) of recycled water.
The City relies upon purchasing water from the San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency (SGPWA) for groundwater recharge. The increased supply of local non-potable water supplies produced from this Project would decrease demands on the SGPWA, and on its supplier, the California State Water Project, thereby reducing diversions from natural watercourses in the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta. The Project also provides non-quantifiable benefits including improving nonpotable water supply reliability and drought resiliency. 1328
Page | 1
1. INTRODUCTION
Prelude
The proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project (Project) is the subject of this feasibility study, which supports a grant application for WaterSMART: Title XVI WIIN Act Water Reclamation and Reuse Projects for Fiscal Years 2023 and 2024 per Funding Opportunity Announcement No. R23AS00464. This study is structured to follow the Bureau of Reclamation Manual, Directives and Standards, “WTR11-01," which was intended for reclamation projects. The purpose is to evaluate Project feasibility under the terms of the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR) Water Reclamation and Reuse (Title XVI) program.
The Project evaluated by this study involves upgrading the existing Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) at the City of Banning (City) to Title 22 standards for recycled water use.
At this time, effluent from the WWTP meets the effluent water quality discharge requirements.
However, the WWTP will not be able to meet the impending discharge limits proposed by the Colorado River Basin Regional Water Quality Control Boad (RWQCB). In addition, many treatment facilities at the plant have reached the end of their useful life. WWTP effluent is currently discharged to percolation ponds that recharge into the Cabazon Groundwater Basin but is not entirely extracted by Banning - the percolated water flows to other water agencies located downgradient.
By replacing existing equipment with new facilities that can treat the water to tertiary disinfected recycled water standards, the WWTP effluent can be used to meet current and future nonpotable water demands in the City. This allows the City to both meet the impending RWQCB requirements as well as benefit from their WWTP effluent. These benefits include reducing the City’s reliance on imported water and improving the reliability of groundwater for drinking water purposes. Since the City is considered a Disadvantaged Community, a reliable local supply of water will also support City growth and economic development, which are dependent on the availability of water supplies.
Non-Federal Project Sponsor
The City of Banning is serving as the non-federal project sponsor. The City was incorporated as a Charter City in 1913, pursuant to the California Constitution Article XI and the California Government Code and is governed by an elected five-member council. It is a full-service city, providing water and wastewater services through its Water and Wastewater Utilities Department, under the purview of the City Council.
Study Area and Project Map
The City of Banning is in the northwestern portion of Riverside County, approximately 25 miles east of downtown Riverside and approximately 30 miles west of the City of Palm Springs. The City 1329
Page | 2
is bounded by the San Bernardino Mountains to the north; Cherry Valley to the northwest; the City of Beaumont to the west and southwest; unincorporated County area to the south; the San Jacinto Mountains to the southeast; and the Morongo Band of Mission Indians and unincorporated community of Cabazon to the east. The City’s total land area is 14,848 acres or
23.2 square miles. See Figure 1 on the following page for a map of the City boundaries.
The City’s water service area comprises 100 percent of the population residing within the City limits, and a small unincorporated area of Riverside County. The City's Water Service Area comprises about 16,908 acres or 26.4 square miles.
The City is a retail agency and within the San Gorgonio Pass Subbasin portion of the Coachella Valley Groundwater Basin. The City is a member of the San Gorgonio Pass Regional Water Alliance (Alliance). The Alliance was created to identify challenges in water supply and water quality in the region and to improve coordination and communication among local, state, and federal governments and water purveyors and other water resource stakeholders in the San Gorgonio Pass region.
Since 2015, the City has participated in the following two additional agreements:
1. San Gorgonio Integrated Regional Water Management Group, which includes: City of Banning, Banning Heights Mutual Water Company, Cabazon Water District, High Valleys Water District, Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District (CFCWCD), and the San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency.
2. San Gorgonio Pass Subbasin Groundwater Sustainability Agency, which includes: the Desert Water Agency, Banning Heights Mutual Water District, Cabazon Water District, Mission Springs Water District, San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency and the City of Banning.
3. San Timoteo Groundwater Sustainability Agency, which includes: City of Banning, Beaumont-Cherry Valley Water District, City of Redlands, Yucaipa Valley Water District, San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency.
The City participates in the Beaumont Management Zone (BMZ) Maximum Benefits Program, which is under the oversight of the RWQCB and is intended to ensure the long-term sustainability of water quality in the BMZ. Yucaipa Valley Water District, Beaumont Cherry Valley Water District, and City of Beaumont also participate in the program.
1330
Page | 3
Figure 1. City of Banning Project Map (courtesy of 2018 Integrated Master Plan (2018 IMP)) 1331
Page | 4
1.3.1 Land Use
The City includes a mixture of residential uses and equestrian estates, combined with more recently planned residential housing developments. The community focal point is an extended commercial downtown stretching along Ramsey Street. Ramsey Street largely parallels Interstate 10; consequently, one can find almost any type of restaurant, bank, or service station here - a wider variety than one would expect in a city of this size. Table 1 provides some basic statistics on current land use and economy for the County of Riverside and the City. Figure 2 on the following page shows the City’s known developments, which includes the agricultural, open space, and community areas.
Table 1. Current Land Use & Economic Statistics for Riverside County and City of Banning Land Item Riverside County Banning
Land Area (sq. miles) 7,206 sq. miles 23 sq. miles
Land Area (acres) 4,611,840 acres 14,720 acres
Agricultural Land 263,796 acres 1,200 acres
Developed Land 165,151 acres 428 acres
Population 2,470,546 31,125
Housing Units 857,148 10,991
Median Home Price $350,100 $234,900
Owner Occupancy Rate 66.3% 65.9%
Employed (16yrs +) 59.7% 44.5%
Median Household Income $67,005 $42,274
Percent in Poverty 11.3% 20.6%
Manufacturing $15.1 Billion $72.8 Million
Agriculture/Crops $3.9 Billion N/A
Retail & Wholesale Sales $43.8 Billion $248.7 Million
1332
Page | 5
Figure 2. City of Banning – Known Developments (courtesy of 2018 IMP) 1333
Page | 6
1.3.2 Climate
The City is located within the San Gorgonio Pass, which is a transitional zone where coastal climates transition to desert, resulting in significantly differing landscape and geology. The climate can best be characterized by hot, dry summers and short, mild winters. The region receives an average annual rainfall of approximately 19.7 inches, most of which takes place between December and March. Evapotranspiration (ETo) in the area ranges from 7.88 inches in July to 1.94 inches in December.
As the State of California and the Riverside County region has undergone a several-year drought, rainfall has been much lower in the City. Recent ETo and rainfall for the City is listed in Table 2.
Table 2. Recent Climate Characteristics (2022 – 2023)
CIMIS Station 239 (Hemet)
(cimis.water.ca.gov)
Month Rainfall (in.) Eto (in.)
Mar (2022) 0.69 2.30
Apr (2022) 0.27 3.15
May (2022) 0.00 4.21
Jun (2022) 0.02 6.14
Jul (2022) 0.00 7.89
Aug (2022) 0.00 7.70
Sep (2022) 0.17 9.16
Oct (2022) 0.25 8.34
Nov (2022) 1.77 6.47
Dec (2022) 1.18 4.65
Jan (2023) 0.91 2.87
Feb (2023) 0.69 2.13
Totals 5.95 65.01
1.3.3 Population
According to the 2020 Census Data, the resident population of the City is 29,528, and estimated to be 30,273 as of July 1, 2021. Since the City's water service area comprises 100 percent of the population residing within the City limits, the total current resident population served by the City’s water system is approximately 31,125 persons, including those outside City limits. The City is currently experiencing a peak population, based on State of California Department of Finance estimates. Since the City is a commercial and government-services center for the region, daytime population increases demand for potable water beyond the City's resident population. 1334
Page | 7
Reclaimed Water Area
There are no non-potable reclaimed water uses that have been implemented in Banning.
Currently, the City’s existing non-potable water system delivers water from a non-potable groundwater well, Well M7, to Sun Lakes Country Club for irrigation use. The City has begun constructing a 24-inch diameter pipeline to connect the existing non-potable water pipe to the WWTP. The backbone pipeline is expected to be completed, tested, and accepted by the end of 2023. Once reclaimed water becomes available from the upgraded WWTP, the WWTP will replace Well M7 to serve Sun Lakes Country Club and other irrigation customers as part of this Project. The existing non-potable water system and planned backbone pipeline are shown in Figure 3 below.
Figure 3. City of Banning Reclaimed Water Area (courtesy of 2018 IMP) 1335
Page | 8
2. STATEMENT OF PROBLEM AND NEEDS
Introduction
This section reviews the City’s need for water reclamation, as well as short- and long-term recycled water demands and supplies. This section also includes discussions of sources of additional supplies and water quality concerns.
Need for Water Reclamation
With climate change bringing on more unpredictable and severe variations in weather which have recently been more frequent, and longer duration droughts in California and the entire Western United States, it is crucial for water agencies to engage in comprehensive planning to develop and implement sustainable sources of water. The effects of drought are clearly demonstrated with the Governor of California declaring a statewide State of Emergency due to drought. The Governor’s State of Emergency declaration is accompanied by a call for all state residents to cut down on water use by 15%.
The last severe drought to affect the State occurred only a few years ago between 2012-2017 with 2013-2014 having extraordinarily dry conditions. The current drought may even be on a more dire path as the 2020 water year was the third driest water year on record in the last 127 years. With climate change resulting in hotter, drier summers and reduced precipitation, severe and prolonged droughts are forecast to be a normal part of California’s future.
This water reclamation Project will generate sustainable supplies to the City’s water supply portfolio that will help Banning better prepare for future water supply challenges.
In addition to drought preparation, water reclamation will help reduce the City’s reliance on imported water. Currently, the City has access to imported water from the Sacramento-San Jaquin River Delta in Northern California through the San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency (SGPWA).
The Bay Delta water system provides Southern California agencies with over 1 million acre-feet of water annually. According to the City’s 2020 Urban Water Management Plan (2020 UWMP), the City purchased an average of 847 acre-feet per year (AFY) per year between 2010 – 2015, and an average of 752 AFY per year between 2015 – 2020 for groundwater recharge. By providing recycled non-potable water from the WWTP to irrigation customers, this will allow the City to rely less on imported water and depend on its local water supply to meet non-potable water demands.
Current Water Supplies
2.3.1 Water Sources and Supplies
The City currently uses potable water and non-potable water to meet the water needs of its service area. The City’s water is obtained entirely from groundwater through nineteen (19) potable groundwater wells, one (1) non-potable groundwater well, and three (3) co-owned wells 1336
Page | 9
with the Beaumont-Cherry Valley Water District (BCVWD). The City also has access to imported water from the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta in Northern California through the SGWPA and surface water from the Whitewater River. Both imported and surface water are used to recharge the groundwater aquifers.
Imported Water Sources
The SGPWA is one of 29 agencies in the State that have a State Water Project (SWP) Water Supply Contract with the Department of Water Resources (DWR). These agencies receive an allocation from the SWP each year. SGPWA also acquires water supplies through contracts with other agencies and annual water transfers and exchanges. Currently, as a wholesale agency, SGPWA distributes imported SWP water to three (3) member agencies: the City of Banning, BCVWD, and Yucaipa Valley Water District.
Table 3 shows the City’s recent imported water purchases from 2015 to 2020 and compares them to the years 2010 to 2015. As shown in the table, the City purchased an average of 752 AYF per year from 2015 to 2020.
Table 3. Imported Water Purchases, courtesy of the 2020 Urban Water Management Plan (2020 UWMP)
Year Purchases (AFY)
2015 686
2016 1,477
2017 1,350
2018 500
2019 250
2020 250
2015-2020 Avg. 752
2010-2015 Avg. (2015 UWMP) 847
Groundwater Sources
The City is within the boundaries of the Coachella Valley Hydrologic Unit, which encompasses several groundwater basins, including the Coachella Valley Groundwater Basin (Basin), within which the City is located. The Basin extends from Banning to the Salton Sea.
The City is underlain by the San Gorgonio Pass Subbasin (SGP Subbasin) portion of the Basin. The SGP Subbasin is divided into water storage units. The City extracts groundwater from the Banning 1337
Page | 10
Storage Unit, the Banning Bench Storage Unit, the Cabazon Storage, the Beaumont Storage Unit, and the Banning Water Canyon Storage Unit.
Over the past five years of operation, groundwater extraction has averaged 7,513 AFY. Table 4 displays the City's groundwater supplies from 2015 to 2020.
Table 4. Imported Water Purchases, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP Year Production (AFY)
2015 6,723
2016 7,035
2017 7,576
2018 7,924
2019 7,226
2020 8,596
Average 7,513
2010 – 2015 Avg. (2015 UWMP) 8,246
Currently, the City does not utilize the entire capacity of all of its storage units. The maximum annual amount pumped by the City in the past 10 years is just under 9,000 AFY. Due to the projected developments, the City expects pumping to increase by 25% within 10 years and over 50% by the end of 2045. Table 5 below shows the City’s projected water supplies and available volumes.
Table 5. Projected Water Supply Availability in AFY, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP Year 2025 2030 2035 2040 2045
Basin Projected
(Available)
Projected
(Available)
Projected
(Available)
Projected
(Available)
Projected
(Available)
Beaumont Basin(1) 1,491
(1,491)
1,267
(1,267)
1,077
(1,077)
916
(916)
778
(778)
West Banning
Basin
1,430
(1,430)
1,430
(1,430)
1,430
(1,430)
1,430
(1,430)
1,430
(1,430)
Cabazon Basin 853
(N/A)
960
(N/A)
1,054
(N/A)
1,136
(N/A)
1,208
(N/A)
Banning Bench 1,055
(1,330)
1,187
(1,330)
1,304
(1,330)
1,330
(1,330)
1,330
(1,330)
Banning Water
Canyon
3,679
(3,730)
3,730
(3,730)
3,730
(3,730)
3,730
(3,730)
3,730
(3,730)
Imported Recharge
into Beaumont
Basin
250 500 1,000 1,750 2,500
Water Supply
Deficit(2)
999 2,126 3,156 4,128 4,991
1338
Page | 11
Total Available
Local
Groundwater
Supply
8,508 8,574 8,595 8,542 8,476
Storage Banked in
the Beaumont
Basin
42,169 38,422 30,291 19,510 7,622
Notes:
(1) The City’s appropriated water rights will continue to decrease over time due to overlying water rights or demand increases. (2) The water supply deficit is currently covered by Beaumont storage.
Surface Water
The Whitewater Flume was built to provide water and power to the City and Banning Heights Mutual Water Company (BHWMC). BHWMC utilizes approximately 1,000 AFY of the Whitewater River diversions in the Flume, and the remainder of the diverted water flows into the San Gorgonio River below the Banning Heights Mutual Water Company (BHMWC) extraction point.
A portion of the natural runoff and the Whitewater River diversions are diverted into spreading ponds located approximately one mile north of the Banning Bench in order to increase groundwater recharge.
Since 1913, surface water from the Whitewater River has been diverted into the Banning Water Canyon Storage Unit, with an average of 1,500 AFY diverted into Banning Water Canyon since 1961.
Rights to Groundwater
The City’s rights to annual groundwater extraction are shown in Table 5. The City will pull the differential amounts between the “Projected” and “Available” from the Beaumont Basin Storage Account. Water recharged (i.e., imported water) in the Beaumont Basin will also be credited in the City’s storage account, allowing the “Projected” volume to increase. The City also anticipates that it would recharge more during wet years so that water supply can be available during drought periods when local groundwater levels are impacted.
The amount of “Available” yield not produced in the Beaumont Basin by the Overlying Water Right holders is issued to the retail agencies, with the City of Banning receiving 31.43% of the “Available” yield. The amount of Unused Overlying Water from the Beaumont Basin that will be allocated to the City of Banning is projected to decrease by 15% every five years from 2024 on.
Planned Supply Projects
The City continually reviews practices that will provide its customers with adequate and reliable supplies. Trained staff continue to ensure the water quality is safe and the water supply will meet present and future needs in an environmentally and economically responsible manner. The City coordinates its long-term water shortage planning with SGPWA and other local agencies through the development of their respective UWMPs. The City also meets bi-monthly with the San 1339
Page | 12
Gorgonio Pass Regional Water Alliance, which is comprised of thirteen (13) local water purveyors, to discuss local issues with different agencies.
Any new City water supply projects will be to add, replace, or upgrade wells to support population growth and new development. The projects that have been identified to improve the City’s water supply reliability and enhance the operations of the City's facilities include replacement of water meters, fire hydrants, valves, and pipelines and construction of new storage reservoirs.
2.3.2 Wastewater Treatment Plant Flows
The City provides sewer service to the area within City limits and to unincorporated areas of Riverside County that surround the southeast portion of the City. The City of Banning is responsible for the collection, conveyance, treatment, and disposal of wastewater generated within its service area. Municipal wastewater in the City’s service area is generated from residential, commercial, and institutional sewer discharges. The City does not currently have any major industrial sewer discharges (i.e., brine). However, there are some cannabis cultivation facilities that will be operational soon, which will need to be monitored and regulated.
The City’s wastewater collection system drains primarily from west to east. The wastewater discharged from the City is collected from a network of 112 miles of gravity sewer mains. The local collector sewers discharge into larger sewer trunk mains, then to the Banning WWTP, located in the southeast corner of the City (see Figure 4 on Page 14).
The WWTP has a current capacity of 3.6 million gallons per day (MGD) and is designed to treat wastewater to secondary standards. The WWTP consists of preliminary treatment, primary treatment, secondary treatment, solids handling, disinfection (currently not in use), and evaporation/percolation ponds. The preliminary treatment system consists of a mechanical bar screen, compactor, grit removal system, and cyclone separator. Effluent from the preliminary treatment system is gravity fed to two primary clarifiers. Primary effluent is pumped to two Trickling Filters, each rated for 1.8 MGD. The Trickling Filter effluent is sent to two secondary clarifiers. Secondary effluent flows through a chlorine contact chamber and is then discharged to 10 unlined evaporation/percolation ponds which recharges the Cabazon Groundwater Basin. This recharge is provided only through surface percolation, and no injection wells are used by the City.
Primary and secondary sludge is processed via two primary anaerobic digesters. A second-stage digester is currently used as a sludge holding tank before thickened sludge is sent to the sludge drying beds. Sludge is allowed to dry and then is hauled offsite for final disposal. A gravity thickener was used to thicken secondary sludge but is currently not in service. An overall process schematic of the existing WWTP is shown in Figure 5 on Page 15.
The quantities of wastewater generated are proportional to the City’ population and the water used by its residents. The wastewater flows are metered at the influent point to the WWTP. Total wastewater collected in the City between 2018 and 2022 is shown in Table 6.
1340
Page | 13
Table 6. Wastewater Flows Collected in City
Year Wastewater (AFY) Wastewater (MGD)
2018 2,259 2.02
2019 2,234 2.00
2020 2,185 1.95
2021 2,226 1.99
2022 2,307 2.06
Average 2,242 2.00
Due to projected housing developments within the City’s service area, wastewater flows are expected to significantly change. Based on review of available data, it was determined that the most accurate forecasting methodology for projected sewer flow included a combination of population and land use flow factors. Table 7 below shows the projected wastewater flows from the years 2023 through 2027:
Table 7. Projected Wastewater Flows Collected in City
Year Flows (AFY) Flows (MGD)
2023 2,352 2.10
2024 2,430 2.17
2025 2,520 2.25
2026 2,610 2.33
2027 2,700 2.41
1341
Page | 14
Figure 4. City of Banning Reclaimed Wastewater Treatment Plant Location (courtesy of 2018 IMP)
1342
Page | 15
Figure 5. Process Schematic for Existing WWTP
2.3.3 Non-Potable Groundwater Well Capacities
The City has been operating one well (Well M7) and estimates that this well produces an average capacity of approximately 350 gpm. In addition, the City also started to operate a second well (Well M12) in mid-year 2017 with an estimated capacity of approximately 1,000 gpm. A third well (Well NP-1) is located near the WWTP, which was recently equipped. The status and capacities of the wells are summarized in Table 8.
Table 8. Existing City Non-Potable Groundwater Well Capacities Well Number Current Status Future Status Estimated
Capacity (AFY)
Estimated
Capacity (MGD)
Well M7 Operational Potable 560 0.5
Well M12 Operational Potable 1,568 1.4
Well NP-1 Recently
Equipped
Non-Potable 1,344 1.2
Total 3,472 3.1
1343
Page | 16
As listed in Table 8, the total estimated capacity of the three wells with the addition of Well NP1 is approximately 3,472 AFY (3.1 MGD) of non-potable water. Although Wells M7 and M12 are both equipped, City staff plans to eventually convert Well M7 and Well M12 over to the potable water system by the end of year 2025 and year 2040, respectively, to supplement the potable water supply. Along with this conversion, it is assumed that Well NP-1 will supplement the recycled water system supply. With only Well NP-1 and Well M12 online by the end of year 2025, the groundwater well supply is estimated to provide up to 2,912 AFY (2.6 MGD) of non-potable water. By the end of year 2040, only Well NP-1 is assumed to be online, which results in a groundwater well supply of 1,344 AF (1.2 MGD). The capacities listed in MGD reflect the assumption that wells would be pumping 24 hours per day.
2.3.4 Recycled Water Production
As mentioned in Section 2.3.1, the Banning WWTP is the only wastewater treatment facility for the City. The WWTP currently provides only secondary treatment, and the treated wastewater does not meet Title 22 Standards. Further, the City does not use any recycled water produced by any other neighboring agencies. Thus, no wastewater has been “recycled” (re-used) within the City’s service area from 2019 to 2023, as Table 9 indicates.
Table 9. Recycled Water Produced and/or Used in City
Year Recycled Water
Produced or Used
(AFY)
2019 0
2020 0
2021 0
2022 0
2023 0
The amounts indicated in Table 9 above coincide with the projections in the City’s 2020 UWMP.
That is, the 2020 UWMP did not project any recycled water use through the year 2020.
Current and Projected Water Demands
2.4.1 Current Water Demands
Annual water consumption from 2016 to 2020 listed in Table 10 range from a high of 8,325 AF in 2020 to a low of 6,712 AF in 2016, with an average of 7,648 AF.
1344
Page | 17
Table 10. City Recent Water Use
Year Total Consumption
(AFY)
Per Capita (GPCD)
2016 6,997 203
2017 7,381 213
2018 7,927 228
2019 7,297 209
2020 8,369 240
Average from 2016 to 2020 219
2.4.2 Projected Water Demands
Future water use projections must consider significant factors on water demand, such as development and/or redevelopment, and climate patterns, among other less significant factors that affect water demand. Climate conditions will continue to be a major influence on demand as drought conditions will increase demand at a time when these supplies are limited.
The City's projected water use for 2025-2045 is broken down by sector in Table 11 below.
Table 11. Projected Water Demand by Sector in AFY, courtesy of the 2020 UWMP Sector 2025 2030 2035 2040 2045
Water Service Area
Population
38,180 45,235 52,290 59,345 66,400
Consumption Rate (GPCD)
Including 1.0% Annual
Passive Savings
222 211 201 191 181
Demands
Single Family Residential 4,505 5,071 5,569 6,004 6,382 Multi-Family Residential 92 103 114 123 130
Commercial 2,263 2,548 2,798 3,016 3,206
Industrial 195 220 241 260 276
Institutional/Governmental 26 29 32 35 37
Landscape Irrigation 977 1100 1208 1,302 1,384
Total Water Sales 8,059 9,070 9,961 10,739 11,415
Unaccounted for Water 1,448 1,630 1,790 1,930 2,052
Total Water Consumption
(Total Supply into System)
9,507 10,701 11,751 12,670 13,467
1345
Page | 18
2.4.3 Projected Recycled Water Demands
The City currently serves one customer, Sun Lakes Country Club, with non-potable water from Well M7 and Well M12. Typical annual demand for the Sun Lakes Country Club is 850 AFY (0.76 MGD). Since the Sun Lakes Country Club is located on the westerly end of the City, once the City constructs the recycled water backbone pipeline to reach the Sun Lakes Country Club, other potential customers would be within proximity to receive recycled water. Therefore, construction of recycled water facilities would prove feasible if the funding for recycled water improvements and pipeline infrastructure was covered, at least in-part, by developers, and an agreement was in place for the use of recycled water. The City would then be able to provide recycled water to its customers. The City’s previous 2006 Recycled Water Master Plan (2006 RWMP) identified potential customers across the Interstate 10 Freeway. The methodology to determine these customers and their demands is described in Section 3.3. However, the 2018 Integrated Master Plan indicated that these potential customers were not feasible, due to the challenges to cross the 10 Freeway. The potential recycled water customers are listed in Table 12 below and shown in Figure 6 on the following page.
Table 12. Potential Recycled Water Users
Customer Recycled Water Demand
(AFY)
Recycled Water Demand
(MGD)
Existing Customers Currently Using Potable Water or Ground Water from Non-Potable Wells
Sun Lakes Country Club 850 0.76
Banning High School 175 0.16
Dysart Park 87 0.08
Lions Park 79 0.07
Subtotal 1,191(1) 1.07
Projected Future Developments
Rancho San Gorgonio
Development
217 0.19
Five Bridges Development 223 0.20
Neighborhood Park 35 0.03
Subtotal 475(2) 0.42
Total 1,666 1.49
Notes:
(1) Will serve in Phase I of the Project.
(2) Will serve in Phase II (future phase) of the Project. 1346
Page | 19
Figure 6. City of Banning Potential Recycled Water Customers (courtesy of 2018 IMP)
2.4.4 Projected Water Supply and Demand Imbalances
Table 13 shows the imbalances between the projected water supplies and demands of the City.
As shown in the table, demand continues to increase as supplies decrease. This indicates the need for a new, drought-proof local supply of water to meet the demands of the City.
Table 13. Projected Water Supply and Demand Imbalances
2025 2030 2035 2040 2045
Total Available Local
Groundwater Supply in AFY
(see Table 5)
8,508 8,574 8,595 8,542 8,476
Total Water Consumption in
AFY (Total Supply into
System) (see Table 11)
9,507 10,701 11,751 12,670 13,467
1347
Page | 20
Local Groundwater Supply
Shortage in AFY Supplied by
Storage Banked in
Beaumont Basin
-999 -2,127 -3,156 -4,128 -4,991
Storage Banked in the
Beaumont Basin in AFY (see
Table 5)
47,169 43,422 35,291 24,510 12,622
Future Recycled Water Supplies
The City plans to upgrade the existing WWTP treatment to meet tertiary treatment standards and facilitate infrastructure to supply recycled water. This proposed expansion described in the 2018 IMP is also in accordance with the City’s 2006 RWMP. The proposed WWTP upgrade will include enhancing biological treatment and constructing recycled water laterals along the backbone pipeline. Facilities to be constructed would include recycled water pipelines to transport recycled water to the recycled water customers.
Upon completion of the upgrades, approximately 4,035 AFY (3.6 MGD) – the total projected WWTP effluent – of recycled water will be available to recycled water customers. Assuming that the improvements would be completed by the year 2027, projected recycled water use would be as shown in Table 14 below.
Table 14. Projected Recycled Water Production and/or Use Year Phase Recycled Water
Produced / Used (AFY)
Recycled Water
Produced / Used (MGD)
2025 N/A 0 0
2027 I 4,035/1,191 3.6/1.07
The projected quantities shown in Table 14 above show the recycled water produced and used in Phase I of the project (described further in Section 4.2). Once the WWTP upgrades are completed, 4,035 AFY (3.6 MGD) will be available for recycled water use. Phase I will serve the existing customers currently using potable water or ground water from non-potable wells (Sun Lakes Country Club, Banning High School, Dysart Park, and Lions Park) with a total demand of 1,191 AFY.
Water Quality Concerns
The main water quality concerns are the standards and regulations that the potential recycled water sources currently do not meet. These include the Regional Water Quality Board Order, Title 22 Requirements, and Beaumont Basin Plan requirements.
2.6.1 Regional Water Quality Control Board Order
1348
Page | 21
On June 30, 2016, the RWQCB adopted Board Order R7-2016-0015 (Board Order), which describes the Waste Discharge Requirements (WDRs) and other terms and conditions of operation for the WWTP. The Board Order requires the WWTP to remove constituents that present the greatest risk to groundwater quality such as nitrogen, coliforms, and total dissolved solid (TDS). According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA), the maximum contaminant level (MCL) for Nitrate as Nitrogen is 10 mg/L. Per the Board Order, it is assumed all nitrogen available converts to nitrate/nitrite so Total Nitrogen (TN) is used as the measurement of concern. The wastewater effluent limitations per the Board Order are outlined in Table 15.
Table 15. Banning WWTP Effluent Concentrations and Limitations Parameter Units Impending Effluent Limits
30-Day Mean 7-Day Mean
Flow MGD 3.6 N/A
20C BOD5 mg/L 30 mg/L 45 mg/L
TSS mg/L 30 mg/L 45 mg/L
pH -- 6.0 – 9.0
TDS mg/L Not to Exceed 300 mg/L of the Water Supply
TN(1) mg/L 10 mg N/L
Notes:
(1) City does not need to comply with this limit at this time.
The WDRs identified TN and TDS as constituents of concern. Currently, the average TN concentration in the WWTP’s effluent is 27 mg-N/L, well above the future TN limit of 10 mg-N/L specified in the Board Order. The two existing Trickling Filters used for secondary treatment at the WWTP are therefore not able to meet the impending water quality limits by the Board Order.
Based on a recent structural condition assessment, both Trickling Filters are also nearing the end of their lifecycle. This Project therefore involves implementing a new biological treatment system with nitrification/denitrification (NDN) to ensure nitrogen levels in the WWTP’s effluent meet the impending Board Order TN requirement. The selected system to replace the existing Trickling Filters is Membrane Bioreactor (MBR). Section 4.6 describes the analysis that was done to select MBR as the recommended biological treatment option for the City.
The WDRs also state that effluent TDS is not to exceed a level of 300 mg/L above the potable water supply “reasonably protects present and anticipated beneficial uses of groundwater in the area,” (typical incremental addition of dissolved salts from domestic water usage is 150 to 380 mg/L.) The level of TDS in Banning’s potable water supply is approximately 200 mg/L, which would result in an effluent TDS limit of approximately 500 mg/L. Currently, the average TDS in the treated wastewater is about 390 mg/L, so future TDS limits in an updated WDR would not require additional treatment.
1349
Page | 22
2.6.2 Title 22 Requirements
In order for the WWTP effluent to be used as recycled water to meet the current and project non-potable irrigation water demands, it must meet tertiary disinfected recycled water standards. The current WWTP effluent does not comply with State Water Resources Control Board, Division of Drinking Water (DDW) water recycling criteria outlined in the California Code of Regulations Title 22 requirements. To comply with Title 22, the effluent must meet the following requirements for “Disinfected Tertiary Recycled Water”:
• Average daily turbidity less than 2 nephelometric turbidity unit (NTU); approximately 3 – 5 mg/L TSS.
• Effluent cannot exceed 5 NTU more than 5% of the time. • Effluent cannot exceed 10 NTU at any time.
• Coagulant must be added if the influent to the filter exceeds 5 NTU for more than 15 minutes, or 10 NTU at any time.
• The disinfection process must provide a chlorine residual that provides 450 milligram minutes per liter (mg-min/L) under minimal modal contact time (CT) of 90 minutes. o This corresponds to a residual of 5 mg/L or less, or any process that achieves 5-log virus removal.
• Total coliform cannot exceed the average most probable number (MPN) of 2.2 per 100 milliliters (mL).
• No more than one sample per month can exceed an MPN of 23 per 100 mL.
In order to supply recycled water, the City will be required to improve the removal efficiency of the existing WWTP to comply with the TN, turbidity, and disinfection requirements. The Project involves implementing MBR and chlorine disinfection at the WWTP. These proposed treatment systems ensure that the WWTP will comply with Title 22 requirements for disinfected tertiary recycled water.
2.6.3 Beaumont Basin Plan Requirements
In order to serve Sun Lakes Country Club, which is located above the Beaumont Basin, the WWTP and Well NP-1 must meet the Beaumont Basin maximum benefit objectives of 330 mg/L for TDS.
Currently, the WWTP effluent and Well NP-1 have an average TDS of 390 mg/L and 430 mg/L, respectively. Therefore, neither source currently meets this limit. Due to this restriction, and potential stricter TDS limits for the San Gorgonio region in the future, a TDS treatment is required.
The proposed TDS treatment for this Project is a two-stage reverse osmosis (RO) system to be implemented as the last step in the WWTP treatment process. Details about the RO requirements for the WWTP and Well NP-1 can be found in the RO Analysis Technical Memo in Appendix A.
1350
Page | 23
3. WATER RECLAMATION, RECYCLING OPPORTUNITIES
Introduction
This section provides a discussion of the City’s water reclamation and reuse opportunities including:
• Potential uses for reclaimed water and sources to be reclaimed • Markets available to use the water produced
• Considerations that may prevent implementation of a water reuse project • Water and wastewater agencies with jurisdiction and their facilities • Current water reuse
• Water reclamation and reuse technology currently in use and opportunities for improvement
Uses for Reclaimed Water
The available market is the non-potable demand from the existing customers currently using potable water or ground water from non-potable wells as well as the future recycled water customers listed in Section 2.4 Table 12. These customers consist of parks, schools, and other landscape irrigation users. The market for water produced by Phase I of this Project (described further in Section 4.2) is expected to be 1,191 AFY (1.07 MGD).
Appendix B includes the Rancho San Gorgonio Water Supply Assessment, which states that the Rancho San Gorgonio Development must utilize recycled water for all common area irrigation demands (see Appendix B, Section 5 “Recycled Water System,” pages 37-41 of the document, page 38-42 of the PDF). For the other customers, discussions have been initiated to obtain letters of intent.
Water Market Available to Utilize Reclaimed Water
The future recycled water demand projections listed in Section 2.4 Table 12 are based on a review of the identified potential customers in the 2006 RWMP. This section describes the methodology used to project the future demand potential.
It should be noted that the future demands described herein do not necessarily represent the actual future demands. This section is limited to identifying the future demand potential.
3.3.1 Methodology
As described in Section 2.4, the 2006 RWMP identified potential 18 recycled water customers based on the following three criteria:
1. Location shall be near a recycled water distribution pipeline or in proximity of other potential customers.
2. ADD exceeds 10,000 gpd. Potential customers with ADD less than 10,000 gpd may be eligible if their location is near a recycled water pipeline. 1351
Page | 24
3. Location within City limits.
The list of potential recycled water customers was reviewed to determine the current irrigation status of each customer and the feasibility of tying into the recycled water system, resulting in an updated list of 15 customers.
3.3.2 Potential Customers
Since the 2006 RWMP, several customers, including Caltrans, Repplier Park, and Gilman Ranch Museum, have reduced demands due to changes such as drought tolerant landscaping. Based on an initial review of the recycled water system layout, connecting these customers was not considered cost effective. In addition, customers north of the Interstate 10 would require a second pressure zone, resulting in an additional pump, large lengths of pipeline, and additional storage to serve these customers. Since those customers were not large users, City staff decided to keep the recycled water system south of the Interstate 10. The customers that are included in this analysis and their demands are summarized in Section 2.4, and the location of the recycled water customers is shown in Figure 6.
Considerations That Will Prevent Implementing Water Reclamation One consideration of concern is water quality, particularly TN and TDS levels of the WWTP. As mentioned previously in Section 2.5, the WWTP must comply with the Board Order, Title 22, and Beaumont Basin Plan requirements to supply recycled water. One of the main objectives of this Project is therefore to overcome these water quality limitations by implementing treatment systems that will effectively lower TN and TDS to allowable levels.
Another consideration is community push back for tertiary recycled water. With this in mind, the community will be involved with this Project through public meetings to voice their concerns. It is, however, expected that the reliability and high water quality of recycled water will help to stimulate recycled water demand and mitigate the public’s concerns.
Agencies with Jurisdiction Over Sources of Reclaimed Water The WWTP and groundwater wells are solely owned by the City.
Potential Sources to be Reclaimed
Effluent from the City of Banning WWTP and Well NP-1 are two potential sources to be reclaimed.
Descriptions of the two sources are described in Section 2.3.
Description and Location of Source Water Facilities
Effluent from the City of Banning WWTP and Well NP-1 are two potential sources to be reclaimed.
Descriptions of the two sources are described in Section 2.3.
Current Water Reclamation Taking Place in Study Area
As discussed in Section 1.4, there is no water reclamation taking place in the City of Banning. 1352
Page | 25
Other Current and Projected Wastewaters and Disposal Options If the WWTP does not get upgraded to Title 22 standards, the current disposal option will remain; the effluent from the WWTP will continue to percolate into the 10 unlined percolation ponds within the Cabazon Groundwater Basin, with no benefits to the City.
In order to meet the Board Order TN restriction, however, the biological treatment process at the WWTP would need to be upgraded regardless of whether the WWTP effluent was used for reclaimed water purposes.
Water Reclamation Technology Use in Study Area
As discussed in Section 1.4, there is no water reclamation taking place in the City of Banning.
1353
Page | 26
4. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATIVES
Non-Federal Funding Condition
If Federal funding were not provided for the Project, the City would delay the project and continue to apply for funding under other opportunities as described in Section 9.5.
Specific Objectives Alternatives Are Designed to Address The objectives of the proposed Project are to:
• Increase water supply availability, reliability, and drought resiliency by supplementing a local water supply, and
• Improve local water supply reliability by proactively planning for facilities needed to meet future demand.
There are three proposed potential recycled water project alternatives to achieve these objectives. These alternatives include:
• Alternative 1: Do Nothing
• Alternative 3: Non-Potable Reuse
• Alternative 4: Hybrid Non-Potable Reuse and Indirect Potable Reuse
4.2.1 Alternative 1 - Do Nothing
This alternative involves no recycled water upgrades of the WWTP. The existing facilities would remain at the WWTP, and effluent from the WWTP would continue to discharge to the percolation ponds near the WWTP site. Under this alternative, due to the WWTP’s current high TN levels, the plant would not meet the impending Board Order requirements. In addition, the existing non-potable water customers would continue to be served by potable water or ground water from non-potable wells, and therefore Wells M7 and M12 would not be converted to the potable water system. In order to recharge the groundwater to serve these customers, the City would continue to purchase imported water from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta through SGPWA. However, with worsening climate change conditions, State water supplies are becoming scarcer. Because of this, competition for water allocations to water retailers will increase, making it more challenging for the City to receive imported water. Therefore, imported water should not be solely relied on to meet future demands that exceed the City’s local supply.
The O&M costs for the “Do Nothing” alternative include the purchase of imported water and pumping costs to serve the existing non-potable water customers. The current estimated annual O&M cost to deliver imported water is estimated at $463,848 per year. This includes an average (based on 2015-2020) purchase of 752 AF of imported water at $399/AF, or $300,048, plus $163,800 for pumping, or $463,848 per year. The projected O&M cost for imported water in 2045 is $2,779,000 for purchase and $1,517,090 for pumping for a total of $4,296,090. This is based on a purchase of 2,500 AF of imported water (see Table 5 in Section 2.4) and a 5% price escalation rate of imported water purchases and pumping per year.
1354
Page | 27
4.2.2 Alternative 2 - Non-Potable Reuse
Alternative 2 involves three phases. Phase I will begin early 2025 to meet the current demands of Sun Lakes Country Club. Phase II will begin by 2029 to meet the demands of the future remaining recycled water customers.
Phase I
Since Well M7 is planned to be converted to the potable water system by the end of 2025, Phase I involves using Well NP-1 to supply 850 AFY (0.76 MGD) to Sun Lakes Country Club in place of Well M7.
A recent Well NP-1 pump test shows an 800-gpm capacity, which exceeds the demand of the Sun Lakes Country Club. As a result, Well NP-1 will operate intermittently to satisfy the current recycled water demand.
Construction of the backbone pipeline along Lincoln Street to connect Well NP-1 to the Sun Lakes Country Club will be completed by the end of 2023. The design of the two reservoirs/forebays and booster stations needed to store the Well NP-1 supply and pump the water to the backbone pipeline, respectively, will be completed during the first quarter of 2024. The City is currently developing environmental documentation and will begin construction of the reservoirs/forebays and booster stations within the second quarter of 2024.
To meet Beaumont Basin requirements for TDS and TN, a 1 MGD RO system will be implemented at Well NP-1, and evaporation beds will be constructed for the RO brine. The RO permeate will travel through the backbone pipeline to Sun Lakes Country Club, with the forebay storing Well NP-1 supply and the booster station pumping the water from the forebay to the backbone pipeline.
Well NP-1 will continue to serve Sun Lakes Country Club until the WWTP upgrades are completed at the end of 2027.
The next step of Phase I is to upgrade the WWTP. The existing Trickling Filters and secondary clarifiers will be decommissioned, and a new 3.6 MGD MBR facility and chlorine disinfection tank will be installed to meet Title 22 recycled water standards. Other miscellaneous upgrades of the WWTP, including headworks, primary clarifier, and digester facilities, will also be implemented in this phase.
Laterals with pipeline diameters ranging from 6-12 inches will be constructed to connect the remaining customers currently using potable water or ground water from non-potable wells listed in Section 2.4 (Banning High School, Dysart Park, and Lions Park).
Once the construction of the WWTP upgrades is complete, the RO system and brine evaporation ponds used for Well NP-1 will be repurposed for WWTP effluent use. 1,191 AFY (1.07 MGD) of the WWTP effluent will serve the demands for Sun Lakes Country Club, Banning High School, Dysart Park, and Lions Park, and the rest will continue to discharge to the percolation ponds. 1355
Page | 28
Since the WWTP effluent will be used to meet the recycled water demands, Well NP-1 will be used as a backup source.
Phase II
In Phase II, laterals will be constructed to connect the future recycled water customers, including Rancho San Gorgonio Development, Five Bridges Development, and Neighborhood Park to the main recycled water system.
In order to meet the Beaumont Basin requirements to serve these remaining customers, an additional RO module will be installed at the WWTP. The permeate from the RO modules will blend for a total of 1,666 AFY (1.49 MGD) of WWTP effluent to serve the recycled water customers. The remaining WWTP effluent will continue to discharge to the percolation ponds.
Figure 6 in Section 2.4 shows the proposed layout of Alternative 2.
4.2.3 Alternative 3 – Hybrid Non-Potable Reuse and Indirect Potable Reuse Alternative 3 is similar to Alternative 2 but incorporates an additional phase for indirect potable reuse. Instead of the WWTP effluent that is not used to meet recycled water demands discharging to the percolation ponds, in Alternative 3, the remaining effluent will flow to one of two groundwater aquifers for indirect potable reuse. By percolating to new basins upgradient of the Banning groundwater storage unit, this will keep groundwater recharge within the City’s wells.
Options for recharge of groundwater aquifers via recharge basins include North Basin and Five Bridges. The requirements to recharge to North Basin and Five Bridges Basin are described in the sections below. Figure 7 on the next page shows the proposed layout of Alternative 3.
Due to the limited surface recharge capacity of the proposed groundwater basins, injection wells may be required to recharge groundwater in the targeted area. In order to allow for indirect potable reuse through injection wells, ultraviolet advanced oxidation (UVAOP) will be required.
The current facility plan would include needed infrastructures (e.g., transformer size, space allocation, etc.) to facilitate this addition in the future when needed. The surface recharge at these basins will take into account ground water travel time to the nearest potable groundwater wells and appropriate monitoring wells for full compliance with Title 22 regulations.
North Basin
North Basin is in the northeastern part of the City boundary. This site is not owned by the City.
Since the site has been mined and a large pit exists, it is assumed that minimal earthwork will be required. The site improvements included as part of this analysis include a berm on all four sides of the basin, a berm to create two cells for operational flexibility, basin piping, maintenance ramps, security, and monitoring equipment. Since the potential recharge basin is at a higher elevation than the WWTP, an 800 hp pump and 15,000 feet of 16-inch diameter pipeline will be 1356
Page | 29
required to convey water from the WWTP to the recharge basin. The City will also need to add monitoring wells and lysimeters.
Five Bridges Basin
This option involves groundwater recharge at the future Five Bridges Recharge Basin, which is located at the southwest part of the City within the Five Bridges Development. The site will likely be owned by the City. Although the Five Bridges development is not anticipated to occur until the build-out phase, City staff believe that the basin can be constructed beforehand. It is anticipated that site improvements will include earthwork, berms on all four sides of the basin, a berm to create two cells for operational flexibility, maintenance ramps, security, and monitoring equipment. This alternative will require an approximately 2,000 feet of 16-inch diameter pipeline to convey water from the WWTP to the recharge basin. The City will also need to add monitoring wells and lysimeters.
Figure 7. Preliminary Site Layout for Alternative 3 (courtesy of 2018 IMP) 1357
Page | 30
Description of the Proposed Water Reclamation Project
The selected alternative is Alternative 3. This alternative includes non-potable reuse with a total demand of 1,666 AFY (1.49 MGD). The remaining recycled water supply from the WWTP will be used for indirect potable reuse at either North Basin or Five Bridges. With the combination of both non-potable reuse and indirect potable reuse, the City will have seasonal flexibility and will be able to maximize the use of recycled water throughout the year. Since the City will be able to maximize the recycled water supply from the WWTP, the estimated net yield is 4,035 AFY (3.6 MGD).
This Project (i.e. Alternative 3) will be done in 3 Phases, however, only Phase I will be implemented at this time. Phases II and III are future phases that will be implemented in the longterm. The City has only requested funding for Phase I in the WaterSMART funding application but will seek additional funding for Phases II and III in the future at which time the City will develop updated feasibility studies to includes Phases II and III.
As mentioned in Section 4.2, Phase I involves constructing an RO system and brine evaporation ponds for Well NP-1, which will later be repurposed for WWTP use. A new 3.6 MGD MBR facility and chlorine disinfection tank will be installed to meet Title 22 recycled water standards, and other miscellaneous upgrades of the WWTP will also be implemented in this phase. Laterals will be built along the backbone pipeline to connect the WWTP to the existing customers currently using potable water or ground water from non-potable wells that can utilize recycled water to meet irrigation demands.
The preliminary cost estimates for Phase I of the proposed Project are summarized in Table 16 below. A breakdown of the capital costs and replacement costs (over a 50-year period – the expected lifecycle of the Project) associated with Phase I of the Project are shown in Tables 17 and 18, respectively. Lifecycle costs over the 50-year span of the Project can be found in Appendix C, and a preliminary detailed site plan and process flow diagram for the Project can be found in Appendix D.
Table 16. Preliminary Cost Estimate
Estimated
Annual Yield
(AFY)
Capital Cost(1) O&M Cost Annual
Cost
($/year)
Unit
Cost
($/AF)
Phase I 1,191 $93,487,328 $3,500,000 $3,890,000 $3,668
Notes:
(1) Capital costs include a construction contingency of 25% and additional markups for mobilization (5%), general conditions (5%), contractor profit (5%), and escalation to-point of construction (5%). Cost estimates and cost assumptions are provided in detail in Appendix E. 1358
Page | 31
Table 17. Cost Summary of Phase I of the Proposed Project, in 2023 dollars Item Cost
CEQA
CEQA (Biological, Cultural, Air Quality, and IS/MND) $180,000 Permitting $120,000
Subtotal $300,000
Design
Preliminary Design $1,409,808
Final Design $5,639,232
Subtotal $7,049,040
Construction
RO system $3,497,500
Brine Drying Beds and Evaporators $5,256,100
MBR Facility (3.6 MGD) $52,887,000
Primary Clarifier $1,944,100
Chlorine Tank $2,377,700
Upgrade Ferric Sulfate Feed/Storage System $298,100
Digester Coating $463,500
Replace Piping in Grit Chamber $58,300
Replace TF Center Drives $499,300
Replace East Primary Clarifier Center Drive $99,900
Replace Existing PVC Digester Gas Piping $16,700
Replace Digester Hot Water Boiler $176,400
Replace TF Effluent Distribution Valves (4) $174,800
Replace TF Recirculation Pumps (2) $124,900
Replace Grit/Cyclone Unit $299,600
Replace Two Old Grit Pumps $174,800
Recycled Water Laterals $2,141,700
Subtotal $70,490,400
Construction Administration
Construction Management and Inspection $7,049,040
Environmental Monitoring and Support During Construction $100,000 Subtotal $7,149,040
Other
Contingency $8,498,848
Subtotal $8,498,848
TOTAL ESTIMATED PROJECT COSTS $93,487,328
1359
Page | 32
Table 18. Replacement Costs, in 2023 dollars
Description of Replacement
Requirement
Replacement
Frequency
Year(s) Cost
Civil/Structural, Mechanical,
Electrical/Controls Replacements Every year
Every Year from 2028
to 2077 $868,658.82
RO Membrane Replacement and
MBR Membrane Replacement Every 5 years
2032, 2037, 2042,
2047, 2052, 2057,
2062, 2067, 2072,
2077 $2,200,000.00
Estimated Costs of Alternatives
Estimated capital and annualized costs were developed for each of the project options and are summarized in Table 19.
Table 19. Monetary Analysis
Estimated Annual
Yield (AFY)
Capital Cost O&M Cost Annual Cost
($/year)
Unit Cost
($/AF)
Alternative 1 752 (from
groundwater)
$0 $463,848 $493,848 $657
Alternative 3
(Phase I only)
1,191 $93,487,328 $3,500,000 $3,890,000 $3,668
As seen in Table 19, the proposed Project (Alternative 3 Phase I) has higher capital and annual costs than the “Do Nothing” Alternative. However, most of the benefits resulting from the implementation are difficult to quantify, as they include climate change and environmental impacts, as well as improved water supply quality and reliability.
Waste-Stream Discharge Treatment
The following waste streams will be involved in the Project: screenings, grit, primary sludge, secondary sludge and RO brine.
The WWTP currently has a mechanical bar screen and a grit chamber to remove debris and solid materials from the wastewater. These screenings and grit are then hauled offsite to a landfill.
Downstream of the headworks, there are two primary clarifiers that separate settleable solids from wastewater. After primary treatment, the effluent flows to the Trickling Filters then the secondary clarifiers, which separate biological floc from the treated wastewater. Sludge from the primary and secondary clarifiers is processed by two primary anaerobic digesters. A second-stage digester is used as a sludge holding tank before dewatered sludge is sent to the sludge drying beds. Sludge is allowed to dewater in these beds and is then hauled offsite for final disposal. 1360
Page | 33
For Phase I of the Project, an additional primary clarifier will be added to the treatment process for redundancy in the system and to allow for peak flows in the WWTP influent. Additionally, the Trickling Filters will be replaced by MBR treatment, and the secondary clarifiers will be decommissioned. Therefore, the sludge from the primary clarifiers will combine with the waste activated sludge from the MBR system, rather than from the secondary clarifiers, to be processed by the digesters.
An additional waste stream that will be included in the Project is RO brine from the RO system.
There is expected to be around 0.035 MGD of RO brine that will require approximately 15 acres of salt evaporation ponds and 10 evaporators. This amount will increase as recycled water demand increases and more RO modules are needed. The brine evaporation ponds will be constructed on the WWTP property near the existing percolation ponds.
Alternative Technologies
Four viable biological treatment options were selected for evaluation to treat the anticipated average daily flow of 3.6 MGD. The treatment alternatives include:
1. Return Flow from Trickling Filter Effluent to Primary Clarifier
2. Conventional Activated Sludge
3. Moving Bed Biofilm Reactor
4. Membrane Bioreactor
See Appendix F for the Nitrogen Removal and Plant Reliability Technical Memo comparing the four alternatives. Due to its high effluent water quality, operational ease, flexibility to meet more stringent permit regulations, and scalability, a Membrane Bioreactor was recommended in the Technical Memo to be considered for future implementation. 1361
Page | 34
5. ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
Introduction
The following sections provide an economic analysis of the Project compared to other alternatives.
Economic Analysis
Currently, no non-potable water reuse is being practiced in the City, and the effluent from the City’s WWTP is discharging to percolation ponds that Banning gains no benefits from. Producing reclaimed water would significantly enhance the City’s drinking water reliability and increase its economic advantage because of the sustainable growth and profit from selling the WWTP effluent to irrigation customers. The City has taken significant steps in establishing a water recycling program in the City including:
• Identifying existing and future customers that can utilize recycled water • Serving existing customers from non-potable groundwater wells • Constructing 24-inch backbone pipelines that extend across the City with easy access to existing customers that can utilize recycled water and future recycle water customers When the proposed facilities are complete (Phase I is constructed), the City will be able to convert all non-potable wells to potable, thus benefiting from the investments made in drilling and equipping these wells.
At this time, the City uses imported water for groundwater replenishment. By supplying these irrigation customers with a reclaimed local water supply instead of pumped groundwater (as is currently done), this will reduce the amount of required imported water for the City, thereby reducing the City’s overall water costs.
Another economic benefit of the Project is its impact on City growth. City growth is dependent on the availability of water supplies to meet various demands for new City population. Increasing the reliability of drinking water will therefore allow the City to meet its needs for growth.
As mentioned in Section 2.6, there is a compliance order from RWQCB that limits the TN from the WWTP. MBR, the selected treatment system, will be a reliable process that would meet these requirements. Among the alternatives proposed in Section 4.6, MBR would produce the best water quality. With the addition of RO, effluent from the WWTP would consistently meet the Beaumont Basin Plan requirements as well, allowing the City to supply recycled water to Sun Lakes Country Club and the remaining customers with significant irrigation demand.
Cost Comparison of Alternatives that Would Satisfy Demand of Proposed Project See Section 4.4 for a cost comparison of the proposed alternatives. 1362
Page | 35
Description and Benefits of Water Supply Alternatives
Table 20 below compares the non-monetary criteria of the three Alternatives.
Table 20. Non-Monetary Criteria
Alternative 1 Alternative 3
(Phase I only)
Regulatory Compliance 1 5
Reliability/Process Robustness 2 5
Enhancement of Indirect
Potable Reuse
1 2
Groundwater Quality
Enhancement
1 5
Flexibility for Future Water
Reuse
1 5
Operational Simplicity 5 4
Ease of
Implementation/Funding
5 5
Total 16 31
As seen in Table 20, the proposed Project (Alternative 3 Phase I) has a higher ranking in terms of non-monetary criteria than the “Do Nothing” alternative (Alternative 1). Alternative 1 will keep the current WWTP system as is, keeping facilities that have reached their end of life, and therefore remaining non-compliant with the impending Board Order restrictions. Therefore, Alternative 1 is ranked the lowest in terms of regulatory compliance, enhancement of indirect potable reuse, groundwater quality enhancement, and flexibility for future water reuse.
Alternative 3 (Phase I only) is ranked the highest for regulatory compliance, reliability/process robustness, groundwater quality enhancement, and flexibility for future water reuse, as this alternative involves upgrading the treatment from the existing Trickling Filters to MBR to meet Board Order requirements and Title 22 standards (with the addition of chlorine disinfection).
Alternative Most Likely to be Implemented in Absence of Project The Alternative that would most likely be implemented in the absence of the Project is Alternative 1 – do nothing.
However, In order to meet the impending Board Order TN restriction which will exceed the WWTP treatment capacity, the biological treatment process at the WWTP would need to be upgraded regardless of whether the WWTP effluent was used for reclaimed water purposes.
Qualitative Benefits and Justification of Water Reclamation The non-quantifiable benefits are numerous. The sustainable recycled water supply will be tolerant to drought and will benefit the City’s customers through improved water supply reliability. 1363
Page | 36
Another benefit is the reduction of reliance on imported water and the implementation of regional management of water supplies and groundwater quality.
Reclaiming treated wastewater also has environmental impacts. By using a local supply of water, energy is saved by not pumping imported water from the Bay Delta. By not using water resources imported from other regions, more water is available for environmental uses in those areas.
Additionally, since onsite treatment systems and the existing WWTP do not effectively remove nitrate from wastewater, another benefit of this Project would be the reduction of the amount of nitrate that percolates into the groundwater. This would not only help the City meet the Board Order requirements, but also alleviate the rising nitrate levels observed in some wells in the Region.
1364
Page | 37
6. SELECTION OF THE PROPOSED WATER RECLAMATION PROJECT
Introduction
This section describes the benefits of water reclamation for the City.
Justification of Water Reclamation as Selected Alternative The Project meets the objective of providing a cost-effective non-potable water supply. The Project has numerous qualitative and environmental benefits. These benefits are as follows:
• Increases local supply of non-potable water,
• Improves non-potable water supply reliability,
• Environmental benefits,
o Reduction of nitrate in the groundwater,
o Energy savings from less imported water from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta,
o Decreases demand on the regional wholesale water agency, SGPWA, which makes more water available for environmental uses from imported supply areas, o Reduces the use of existing diversions from natural watercourses. By implementing the Project, the City will reduce dependence on imported water supplies which are diverted from natural watercourses in the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta The proposed facilities do not pose significant impacts to the environment and the City does not anticipate opposition to the Project. No obstacles have been identified that would prevent implementation of the project.
Analysis of Water Reclamation
6.3.1 Reduction, Postponement, or Elimination of Development of New or Expanded Water Supplies and Reduction of Diversions of Natural Water Courses To the extent that agencies like the City of Banning can develop local supplies, the wholesale agencies forego the need to expand their own supply sources or can reduce their reliance on other sources. Most of the imported supplies are obtained from diversions from natural water courses, including the Sacramento and San Joaquin Rivers. Local supply projects like this Project result in reduced development efforts by the wholesalers.
6.3.2 Reduction of Demand on Existing Federal Water Supply Facilities The California State Water Project (SWP) and the federal Central Valley Project share the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta as a water supply. The imported water supply utilized by the SGPWA and the City comes from the SWP facilities. Although the Project would not reduce demand on the federal facilities, it could indirectly reduce the demand on the shared state and federal supply. 1365
Page | 38
6.3.3 Reduction, Postponement, or Elimination of new or Expanded Wastewater Facilities This Project involves expansion of limited processes, including a new primary clarifier. Although the two existing primary clarifiers at the plant accommodate an average flow of 3.6 MGD, they do not allow for peak flow of redundancy. Therefore, a new primary clarifier will be installed to handle daily peak flow rate. The rest of the facilities at the plant are sized for the expected influent flow of 3.6 MGD and will not require expansion.
Expanding the primary treatment system and upgrading other systems at the WWTP, including headworks, secondary treatment, and digester facilities, will eliminate the need for a new wastewater facility.
1366
Page | 39
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS AND POTENTIAL EFFECTS
Introduction
This section describes the potential environmental impacts and effects of the proposed Project, the environmental analysis and documentation prepared to date, how the project will affect water supply and water quality, and a discussion of public outreach and regional cooperation.
The governing laws are the State of California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) and the National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA).
Potential Environmental Impacts and Effects
The City does not anticipate that the Project will have significant impacts on endangered or threatened species, public health or safety, hydrology and water quality, regulated waters of the United States, or cultural resources. The City does not anticipate that the Project will have significant environmental effects as defined by State and federal environmental laws. As such, the City will prepare a Negative Declaration to obtain CEQA coverage and expects that USBR will adopt a Finding of No Significant Impacts (FONSI) to obtain NEPA coverage for the Project. The City completed an Initial Study-Mitigated Negative Declaration (IS-MND) in October 2007. The IS-MND covered significant elements of the current proposed project. The findings of the October 2007 IS-MND were either “Less Than Significant Impact” or “No Impact”. The City has identified the potential environmental impacts described in Table 21, along with best management practices (BMPs) and potential mitigation measures.
Table 21. Potential Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures Potential Impact Potential Mitigation
Air quality and
greenhouse gases
An air quality analysis will be completed as part of the CEQA analysis. Project construction will comply with local air quality requirements. Typical dust control measures, such as watering and reducing off-road vehicle speeds, will be employed. Project operations will be evaluated for consistency with the State GHG reduction targets found in AB 32 and SB 32. Emissions from operation of the proposed facilities are not expected to exceed applicable significance thresholds.
Biological resources Construction of the project facilities is not expected to impact biological resources. Biological resources will be surveyed prior to design and sensitive species and their habitats will be avoided in the project design. The Project is not expected to impact wetlands or waters of the U.S. as regulated by U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, RWQCB, and California Department of Fish and Wildlife. The Project will comply with adopted Habitat Conservation Plans and Natural Community Conservation Plans.
1367
Page | 40
Operation of the Project is not anticipated to affect biological resources as all O&M activities will be constrained to the WWTP and associated brine minimization and drying beds, Operation will be sustainable and will have no impact on riparian and aquatic habitats.
Cultural resources No Cultural resources are known to exist on the Project site.
Cultural resources will be surveyed prior to design and the Project will be designed to avoid any identified cultural sites.
Onsite construction monitoring mitigation may be necessary to ensure that discovery of any previously unidentified
archeological resources is handled appropriately.
The City will comply with California Assembly Bill 52 regarding formal consultation with Native American tribes about the proposed Project.
Hydrology and water
quality
The City will characterize the RO brine (concentrate) discharge to the evaporation (drying) beds to verify quality of the solids before final disposal.
The proposed Project is not within the 100-year floodplain.
During the design This conclusion will be confirmed.
Hydrologic impacts, including erosion and siltation during construction of the proposed facilities would be minimized through compliance with existing regulations, including enrollment in an NPDES construction general permit,
completion of a storm water pollution prevention plan, and implementation of required BMPs.
Groundwater levels,
supplies, and recharge
during operation
The Project will result in directing a portion of the WWTP effluent for non-potable water reuse. This will reduce the amount of WWTP effluent currently discharged to the
percolation ponds. The Project will not impact any drinking wells.
Transport, use, and disposal
of hazardous materials
during construction and
operation
The RO system will use a variety of chemicals typically used in water treatment, possibly including scale inhibitors, membrane cleaning solutions, chlorine, ammonia, and caustic soda. Some of the chemicals will be delivered to the plant while others may be generated on-site. Chemical storage will have full containment structures to prevent spills along with alarms. Proper handling of these chemicals will be
incorporated into the Standard Operating Procedures.
Compliance with existing regulations is expected to minimize impacts to a less than significant level.
1368
Page | 41
Noise Construction noise is considered a nuisance and is regulated by the City’s Noise Ordinance. The majority of construction activities for the Project will be in the vicinity of the WWTP which is located in an isolated part of the City. Construction equipment will be fitted with approved mufflers and other measures may be utilized to comply with the existing
regulations.
Traffic impacts during
construction
Construction traffic associated with the proposed facilities construction will be temporary, and the impacts will be insignificant. Construction traffic controls will be employed to reduce public hazards.
Public Outreach
The majority of the proposed facilities will be within the footprint of the existing WWTP. As such the City does not anticipate any public opposition to this Project. Also, the City will add significantly needed upgrades to its WWTP, which would enhance its reliability. The City plans to implement more public outreach and enhance publicity for the proposed Project. The upgraded WWTP and non-potable reuse are expected to promote growth in this disadvantaged community.
The City has constructed a significant portion of the non-potable reuse conveyance system, and this Project would complement the completed facilities.
Effect of Historic Properties
The City does not anticipate that the project will have any adverse effects on historic properties.
The majority of construction will be within the WWTP footprint.
Avoiding Public Health and Environmental Quality Issues Associated with Use of Reclaimed Water
The proposed treatment facilities for the WWTP upgrades including MBR and partial RO will result in a reliable high-quality effluent suitable for non-potable reuse for irrigation purposes.
The effluent water quality will consistently meet all State Title 22 requirements.
The City will apply the treatment technologies described in Section 4.2 so that the product water will meet state and federal non-potable reuse water quality requirements for irrigation purposes.
The primary requirements are outlined in the State Title 22 requirements. The City will work closely with the SWRCB the State’s enforcement agency, in developing and permitting the Project. Typical steps include:
• Meetings and coordination,
• Submittal of the Project application,
1369
Page | 42
• Review and approval of the preliminary design,
• Review and approval of the project plans and specifications, and operating plan, • Inspection of plant construction and witness of start-up testing, and • Amendment of the City’s discharge permits.
Future phases of the Project include groundwater recharge of the Banning groundwater storage unit. The planned upgrades at the WWTP will incorporate space and hydraulic head for additional advanced treatments to be added in the future.
1370
Page | 43
8. LEGAL AND INSTITUTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Introduction
This section focuses on the legal and institutional requirements which must be considered prior to implementation of the Project. The following is a discussion of water and wastewater rights, legal and institutional requirements, interagency agreements, permitting requirements, unresolved issues, and wastewater discharge requirements.
Analysis of Water Rights Issues
There are no anticipated water rights issues potentially resulting from implementation of the proposed project. Through various adjudications and overlying water rights, the City owns and operates the sources of water supply (WWTP and groundwater wells).
Discussion of Legal and Institutional Requirements with Potential to Affect Implementation of Project
8.3.1 Department of Water Resources – Sustainable Groundwater Management Act The Sustainable Groundwater Management Act (SGMA) was passed by the California State Legislature in September 2014, establishing new requirements for groundwater management in medium and high priority groundwater basins. The act requires the development and implementation of Groundwater Sustainability Plans (GSPs) for each groundwater basin and subbasin. The GSP must contain objectives and actions to achieve and maintain groundwater sustainability and to avoid the undesirable results of overdraft. SGMA also requires the establishment of Groundwater Sustainability Agencies (GSAs) to oversee development and implementation of GSPs and provides authority to GSAs to sustainably manage groundwater.
Local water authorities and counties have primary responsibility and authority for the development and implementation of GSPs and GSAs; however, the State has been given authority to intervene if specific requirements are not met.
8.3.2 Groundwater Sustainability Agencies
SGMA requires that high and medium priority groundwater basins, as designated by the California Department of Water Resources (DWR), create groundwater sustainability agencies by June 30, 2017. The bill authorizes any local agency or combination of agencies to become a GSA with the purpose of developing and implementing GSPs in order to meet the goals and standards of sustainable management of groundwater basins as described in SGMA. Multiple GSAs and GSPs in a single basin are allowed under the law; however, multiple GSPs within a basin must be coordinated and meet all requirements for achieving sustainable groundwater management within the entire groundwater basin or be subject to state intervention. A combination of agencies creating a GSA can be formed by a joint powers agreement, a memorandum of agreement, or other legal agreement.
1371
Page | 44
8.3.3 Groundwater Sustainability Plans
SGMA requires that GSAs develop and implement groundwater sustainability plans. GSPs must be completed by January 31, 2020 for basins deemed by DWR to be in critical overdraft. For all remaining medium and high priority basins, GSPs must be completed by January 31, 2022.
Implementation of the GSPs must result in groundwater quantity and quality sustainability within 20 years (by 2040 or 2042 based on the basin overdraft situation). DWR may grant up to two extensions of an additional five years to GSAs to achieve sustainability upon a showing of good cause. If the GSPs are not completed within the above timeframe, or if the SWRCB, in consultation with DWR, determines that groundwater sustainability is not being achieved in the time given, authority for developing and implementing a GSP will be designated to the RWQCB.
8.3.4 San Gorgonio Pass Subbasin
The SGP Subbasin (DWR Basin 7-021.04) is located in Southern California between the San Bernardino Mountains to the north, the San Jacinto Mountains to the south, Coachella Valley to the east and San Bernardino Valley to the west. The SGP Subbasin adjoins the San Timoteo Groundwater Subbasin to the west and the Indio Subbasin to the east. The SGP Subbasin boundaries generally correspond to the DWR’s California’s Groundwater Bulletin 118.
The San Gorgonio Pass (SGP) Subbasin (7-021.04) is one of several alluvial basins and subbasins identified by the California Department of Water Resources (DWR) as being in a medium-priority subbasin in Bulletin 118 (2003). Beginning in 2015, GSAs within the SGP Subbasin formed to address the long-term reliability of groundwater through the development a single GSP. The SGP Subbasin GSP (SGP GSP) was developed in a coordinated fashion by the Desert Water Agency GSA, San Gorgonio Pass GSA, and Verbenia GSA with the goal of achieving sustainability for the SGP Subbasin as a whole. The SGP GSP was adopted by the respective GSAs and submitted to DWR on January 25, 2022, ahead of the January 31, 2022, deadline.
The SGP GSP jurisdiction includes the Desert Water Agency GSA, San Gorgonio Pass GSA, and Verbenia GSA. Desert Water Agency GSA consists of the Desert Water Agency. San Gorgonio Pass GSA consists of Banning Heights Mutual Water Company (MWC), the City of Banning, Cabazon Water District (WD) and San Gorgonio Pass Water Agency (SGPWA). Verbenia GSA consists of Mission Springs WD and SGPWA. The SGP Subbasin GSAs are not required to develop a Coordination Agreement. Despite this, the GSAs entered into a cooperative Memorandum of Agreement for development of the GSP and grant funding. The three GSAs have cooperatively worked together to coordinate SGP GSP development. The SGP Subbasin includes a portion of an adjudicated area, known as the Beaumont Basin, that resides outside the Plan Area. Since it was previously adjudicated, the portion of the Beaumont Basin located in the SGP Subbasin is not subject to SGMA regulations.
1372
Page | 45
8.3.5 Santa Ana River Basin Plan
An updated Water Quality Control Plan for the Santa Ana River Basin (Basin Plan) was adopted by the Regional Board on March 11, 1994, approved by the State Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB) on July 21, 1994, and approved by the Office of Administrative Law (OAL) on January 24, 1995. The Basin Plan identifies the Region’s ground and surface waters, designates beneficial uses for those waters, establishes water quality objectives for the protection of those uses, prescribes implementation plans and establishes monitoring and surveillance programs to assess implementation efforts. Amendments to the Basin Plan to incorporate a revised Total Dissolved Solids and Nitrogen Management Plan (Salt Management Plan) into the 1995 Basin Plan were approved by the Regional Board on January 22, 2004, by the State Water Resources Control Board on October 1, 2004 and by the Office of Administrative Law on December 23, 2004. The surface water standards provisions of the amendments were approved by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency on January 20, 2007. This amendment included revised groundwater subbasin boundaries (now called management zones), revised TDS and nitrate-nitrogen (nitrate-N) groundwater quality objectives, revised TDS and nitrogen waste load allocations, revised reach designations, and revised TDS and nitrogen objectives and beneficial uses for specific surface waters.
Antidegradation water quality objectives set forth by the Basin Plan amendment restricted the use of recycled water for irrigation and groundwater recharge for certain groundwater management zones, including the Beaumont Management Zone (BMZ) and the San Timoteo Management Zone (STMZ). In particular, the ambient TDS concentrations of these management zones exceeded the antidegradation objectives, meaning that no assimilative capacity existed for which the Regional Board could allocate the use of the City’s recycled water within the BMZ or STMZ. Under the antidegradation objectives, the use of recycled water would require mitigation even though the reuse would not materially impact future TDS concentrations or impair beneficial uses. Thus, alternative maximum-benefit objectives were specified for the BMZ and the STMZ. The maximum-benefit objectives were established based on demonstrations by the involved agencies that antidegradation policies were satisfied.
Discharge of recycled water over the BMZ by the City of Banning as a result of the project will be in full adherence to the requirements set forth in the Basin Plan.
Discussion of Need for Multi-Jurisdictional or Interagency Agreements As the sole retail supplier of water in the service area, and the agency responsible for wastewater processing, the City of Banning is able to produce recycled water for distribution within its service area without agreements with any other agency.
Discussion of Permitting Procedures Required
The following permits will be required for the Project:
1. DDW Title 22 Permit
1373
Page | 46
2. California State Water Resources Control Board General Permit (combining NonDischarge National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System [NPDES], Waste Discharge Requirement [WDR], and Waste Recharge Requirements [WRR])
3. AQMD
4. CEQA (IS-MND)
A Title 22 Engineering Report is required to be submitted for approval by DDW for meeting water quality requirements of the treated recycled water and groundwater recharge requirements.
After the WWTP’s design documents are finalized, the City will submit the necessary reports, analyses, and applications to obtain required permits from both DDW and the RWQCB.
As described in Section 7, the City will prepare a Negative Declaration to obtain CEQA coverage for the Project in parallel with Project design.
Discussion of Unresolved Issues Associated with Implementing Proposed Project There are no unresolved issues associated with implementing the proposed project.
Identification of Current and Proposed Discharge Requirements The current discharge requirements for the WWTP are laid out in the RWQCB Board Order, which describes the WDRs and other terms and conditions of operation for the WWTP.
The Board Order can be found in Appendix G.
Rights to Wastewater Discharges
The City’s rights to groundwater extraction are in Table 5 in Section 2.3.
1374
Page | 47
9. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY OF SPONSOR
Introduction
The City has developed an implementation schedule and general funding plan that demonstrates that at the Feasibility Study stage, the City has the financial capability if the project moves to construction.
Schedule
The proposed schedule for the Project includes three phases, however only Phase I will be implemented in the near term. In Phase I, the RO system for Well NP-1 and WWTP upgrades will be installed, as well as the recycled water laterals for Banning High School, Dysart Park, and Lions Park.
The preliminary and final design of Phase I is expected to be completed by the 2nd quarter of 2026. Design includes initiating the necessary permits, completing CEQA/NEPA documentation, completing design, going out to bid, obtaining the authority to award the construction contracts, awarding contracts, and issuing notices to proceed.
The first step of construction for Phase I will be installing the Well NP-1 upgrades, including the RO system and brine evaporation ponds, and WWTP upgrades, including the new MBR facility, primary clarifier, chlorine tank, and lab and control building. Once easements have been obtained for the recycled water laterals, construction of the laterals will occur in parallel with construction of the WWTP upgrades. Development and testing of the new facilities will follow. Phase I is estimated to be completed in 3 years by the 4th Quarter of 2027, as shown in Table 22 on the following page.
1375
Page | 48
Table 22. Project Schedule – Phase 1
2024 2025 2026 2027
Project Component Duration Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Well NP-1 RO System and Brine Evaporation
Ponds
12 months
Predesign 3 months
Final design 3 months
Bidding 3 months
Construction/startup 3 months
WWTP Upgrades 33 months
Predesign 6 months
Final design 6 months
Bidding 3 months
Construction/startup 18 months
Recycled Water Laterals 24 months
Easements 6 months
Bidding 3 months
Design 6 months
Construction/development 6 months
Testing 3 months
1376
Page | 49
Willingness and Capability of the City of Banning to Fund the Project The Project will be funded through the City's capital replacement and operating budgets, as well as development activity revenues via the City’s local development impact fee program. The City also has the capability to fund projects through debt issuance.
Project Funding Plan
9.4.1 Operating Budgets
The City owns and manages both a water utility and wastewater utility as individual selfsupporting enterprises. Therefore, the utilities must develop financial plans that provide sufficient revenues to meet all operation and maintenance expenses, water purchases, wastewater treatment, debt service requirements, capital improvements funded from current revenues, and other expenditures.
In 2022, the City Council of the City of Banning approved a Water and Wastewater Rate Study (Rate Study). The Rate Study developed financial plans that projected operating revenue, expenses, and capital financing costs for the utilities over a five-year planning period beginning July 1, 2022 and ending June 30, 2027. The financial plans projected future rate revenues under existing rates, operation and maintenance (O&M) expenses, principal and interest expense on debt, transfers, and capital improvement program (CIP) requirements.
For the water utility, the Rate Study identified:
- Operation and Maintenance Expenses: The O&M expenses increase from $7.9M in FY 2023 to $10.0M in FY 2027.
- Debt Service: There is an existing revenue bond with an annual payment of $2.0M.
There is no future debt planned.
- Capital Improvements: The CIP identified an average of $6.2M per year in capital projects from FY 2023 to FY 2027.
- Reserves: Continue to maintain the operating fund reserve level. The operating fund reserve is designed to help cover fluctuations in day-to-day expenses. The new target, consistent with industry reserve guidelines, will be 90 days of O&M expenses, a change from the existing 10% of O&M expenses and debt service payments.
For the wastewater utility, the Rate Study identified:
- Operation and Maintenance Expenses: The O&M expenses increase from $3.7M in FY 2023 to $4.6M in FY 2027; increases in cost to operate and maintain the proposed Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project are included as part of the Rate Study projections.
1377
Page | 50
- Debt Service: There is an existing revenue bond with an annual payment of $290k associated from a 2019 Refunding Revenue Bond. The City anticipates a net debt issuance of $25.0M in FY 2025, which will add an annual payment of $1.9M starting in FY 2025. The primary expense for the new debt issuance is for the Wastewater Treatment Plant and Recycled Water Upgrades Project. The Rate Study ensures the appropriate level of debt service coverage.
- Capital Improvements: The CIP identified an average of $12.1M per year in capital projects from FY 2023 to FY 2027.
- Reserves: Continue to maintain the operating fund reserve level. The operating fund reserve is to help cover fluctuations in day-to-day expenses. The scheduled target will be 90 days of O&M expenses, a change from the existing 10% of O&M expenses and debt service payment.
The revenue requirements listed above for the water and wastewater utilities set the basis for the development of suitable rate schedules to produce revenues adequate to meet financial needs while recognizing customer costs of service. In November of 2022, City Council held a public hearing resulting the approval of the rate increases for a period of five years as shown in Table 23.
Table 23. Rate Increases
Fiscal Year Effective Month Water Utility Wastewater Utility FY 2022-2023 January 10.75% 40.00%
FY 2023-2024 July 0.00% 25.00%
FY 2023-2024 January 10.75% 25.00%
FY 2024-2025 January 10.75% 3.00%
FY 2025-2026 January 10.75% 3.00%
FY 2026-2027 January 10.75% 3.00%
There is a current fund balance in the Water Operations Fund of $17.5M and a fund balance in the Wastewater Operations Fund of $3.7M.
In addition to operating and capital revenues related to rates, the City has continued to charge a monthly Tertiary Surcharge of $2.72/month per account to fund capital improvements at the wastewater treatment plant. The Wastewater Tertiary Fund has a fund balance of $7.7M of which $7M would be allocated to the Proposed Project.
Additionally, the City has the capability to fund projects through either cash payment or debt issuance.
9.4.2 Development Impact Fees
In 2018 the City Council of the City of Banning completed and approved an Integrated Master 1378
Page | 51
Plan (2018 IMP) that evaluated the performance and condition of the City’s potable water, wastewater and recycled water system (future) systems under current and future conditions through year 2040. The 2018 IMP includes a capital improvement plan (CIP) to guide the City in the planning and development of facilities required to meet system performance for existing and future customers.
In September 2019, the City Council approved new and updated the development impact fees, including impacts fees to cover the costs for water, recycled water, and wastewater facilities.
The Water Impact Fee fund balance is approximately $3.3M of which $1.5M would be allocated to the Proposed Project.
The Wastewater Impact Fee fund balance is approximately $10.8M of which $7.5M would be allocated to the Proposed Project.
The City of Banning is currently witnessing a significant amount of growth in the residential sector. It is expected the available funding in the utility impact fee funds will continue to increase allowing for additional allocations to the Proposed Project.
The City has the capability to fund projects through either cash payment or debt issuance.
Over time, staff will present updated rate studies to City Council in order to ensure that rate revenues are sufficient to cover ongoing operations, maintenance, replacement costs and debt service coverage obligations.